# Drop Files, Analyze When Ready, Right-Click to Edit > Drop stems (upload starts immediately) or an Ableton project (Import to finish). Analyze is two checkboxes; each one you check is its own credit charge. Then right-click to fix key, tempo, stems, and sections. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/drop-upload-and-right-click-editing Getting a song into a programmed Ableton set is three moves: **drop**, optionally **Analyze**, then **right-click** on the song page when something needs a tweak. You do not pick stem groups in the uploader, and you do not hunt for an Edit button to change tempo or key. > **Shipping note:** Drop = upload is live. Right-click key/tempo/meter, stems, and sections is rolling out with a Bands update — if those menus are missing, use **Edit** → change → **Done** (LTC/Length still use Edit). ## Drop → upload starts immediately Open the song, then drop stems / a zip / an Ableton project on the **Upload** panel (or click **Drop files to add**). Ordinary stem batches upload on drop — no Confirm / Upload button. Staging is status-only; **groups are edited later on the song page**. A single non-Ableton audio file may briefly offer Stem / Ref / LTC. Ableton projects keep Import + Cancel — see [Importing a Song from Ableton Live](/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live). Step by step with screenshots: [Uploading Raw Stems or a Zip of Stems](/docs/uploading-raw-stems-or-a-zip). ## Analyze when ready (credits) On upload, two checkboxes start **unchecked**. Check what you want: 1. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** — Key, tempo, time signature, and song sections. Does **not** show lyrics. 2. **Lyrics and Chords** — Lyrics and chords, shown together after this runs. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is **5 credits per minute** of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** is **15 credits per minute**, rounded up, minimum 15. Each selected option is its own charge. Both together on a 4-minute song is about 80 credits. Leave both unchecked to upload audio only and set metadata by hand for free. The song-page offer card starts with **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** checked and **Lyrics and Chords** unchecked. Empty **Key**, **Tempo**, or **Time** chips request **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** only. Timed lyrics: [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). Pricing: [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained) and [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). ## Right-click on the song page | Job | How | | --- | --- | | Key / Tempo / Time (meter) | **Right-click** the header chip | | Stem rename / group | **Right-click** the stem | | Section rename / Ableton cue | **Right-click** the section on the timeline | Then **Download → Ableton Set**. Structure tweaks in Live come back by dropping the `.als` and confirming **Update arrangement** — free. ## Frequently asked questions ### Do I pick stem groups when I upload? No. Rename and regroup on the song page after drop (or let Analyze take a first pass). ### Does every upload spend analysis credits? No. On upload both Analyze checkboxes start unchecked, and an unchecked option is not charged. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is 5 credits per minute, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** is 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. Both together is two runs. ### Does Analyze give me lyrics? Only if you check **Lyrics and Chords**. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not show lyrics. An empty Lyrics tab after that option alone is expected. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ### How do I change tempo or key? **Right-click** the **Tempo** or **Key** chip. If your build still shows **Edit**, use **Edit** → chip → **Done** for the same fields until right-click is fully rolled out. --- # Managing Members and Access > Invite band members and crew as members of specific bands or as account admins, choose View (stream), Download or Manage access, and change, demote or remove anyone from Account → Members. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/managing-members-and-access Your Pliris account is a **workspace** that can hold several bands. Add your band, your crew and anyone else on the show, and give each person exactly the access they need: which bands, and what they can do there. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Member management](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/member-management)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## See everyone in your workspace Click your profile icon → **Account → Members**. You'll see: - **Account admins:** full control, including future bands. - **Members:** access limited to specific bands, with their access level, bands and status. Filter by access level, band or status, or search by name or email. ![Account → Members, with account admins and members.](/help-assets/members-01-members-page.png) ## Invite someone 1. Open a band and click **Invite**, or click **Invite member** on the Members page. 2. Enter their email address. 3. Choose a **role**: - **Member** (most common): access to the bands you pick. - **Account admin**: full access, now and future, including every band, billing, account settings and inviting people. Keep this to a very small number of people. 4. Choose what they **can do** (see below) and **which bands** they're in. 5. Click **Send invite**. ![The Invite a member dialog with View access for one band.](/help-assets/members-04-invite-view-access.png) They get an email saying you added them to the band. They click to accept. No password is needed. Once they accept, they appear as **Active**. ## Access levels | Level | What they can do | Good for | |---|---|---| | **View** (being renamed **Stream**) | Browse and play reference files and stems, rehearse on song pages and setlists. Nothing to download. | Subs, lighting and video programmers, anyone learning the show | | **Download** | Everything in View, plus download Ableton sets, stems, LTC, reference files and ProPresenter files | Playback engineers, programmers, music directors | | **Manage** | Everything in Download, plus edit songs, arrangements, setlists and members, for their bands | People who help you run the show | Pick bands the same way: a sub for one show gets one band; someone you trust across all your projects can get every band. Members only see the bands you give them. ![A member with access to one band only sees that band.](/help-assets/members-09-one-band.png) ## What members can do Members can play every song in their bands and rehearse the whole setlist in order. On a song page they can **solo** a part, use **focus mode** to hear it in the context of the full song, **mute** it to play along, press **L** to loop a section, use the **arrow keys** to jump, **Shift + arrow keys** to scrub, and **Space** to stop. ![A member rehearsing with focus mode on a stem group.](/help-assets/members-08-focus-mode.png) With **Download** access, a **Download** button appears on each song so they can download the Ableton project. ![The Download button a member with Download access sees.](/help-assets/members-11-download-button.png) ## Change someone's access On **Account → Members**, open the member's menu and choose **Edit access**. Change their level or bands and save. Changes apply immediately; they see them on their next page load. ![The Edit member dialog.](/help-assets/members-10-edit-access.png) From the same menu you can **promote** a member to account admin, **Demote to member** (they lose billing, account settings, future bands and the ability to invite), or **Remove from account**. ![A member's menu: Demote to member, Remove from account.](/help-assets/members-12-member-actions.png) ![The Demote to member dialog.](/help-assets/members-13-demote.png) Someone you remove keeps their own Pliris account, but loses access to your bands straight away. ## If a member can't see something Check two things on **Account → Members**: 1. They're in the right band. 2. Their access level covers what they need. For example, **View** can't download. Still stuck? Contact support with their email and the band name. ## Your plan vs their access Your **plan** (Free or All-Access) decides what Pliris unlocks. A member's **access level** decides what they can do inside a band. Both have to allow it. For example, a Free account still can't use paid-only Ableton templates, even with **Manage** access. Band settings, such as the Ableton template your exports use, can be changed by band admins and account admins. Members with **Manage** access export with whatever template the band has set. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I add a band member to Pliris? Open the band, click **Invite**, enter their email, choose **Member**, pick their access level and bands, and click **Send invite**. They accept from the email. ### Can band members download my stems? Only with **Download** or **Manage** access. With **View** access they can play and rehearse but not download. ### What's the difference between an account admin and a member? An account admin has full access to every band, now and in the future, including billing and members. A member only has access to the bands you choose, at the level you choose. ### How do I remove someone from my band? Go to **Account → Members**, open their menu and choose **Remove from account**. They lose access immediately. ### Do invited members need a password? No. They accept the emailed invite and they're in. --- # The Pliris Loop > Every song in Pliris follows the same four steps: upload and import, edit, export to Ableton Live, then update and re-import when rehearsal changes things. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-pliris-loop Pliris works as a loop. You bring a song in, shape it, send it to Ableton Live, and when rehearsal changes something you bring the update back in. Learn the four steps once and you know how every song moves through Pliris. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Welcome to Pliris](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/welcome-to-pliris)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. The goal: cut your programming time by 90% or more, cut rehearsal time by 50% or more, and stop the late-night programming sessions after rehearsal changes. ![A band's song list in the Bands app.](/help-assets/pliris-loop-01-bands-app-library.png) ## The four steps 1. **Upload and import.** Bring songs in through the **Bands** app or the **Files** app. You can start from raw stems, a fully programmed Ableton Live song, or a whole Ableton Live set you've already built. See [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems) and [Importing a Song from Ableton Live](/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live). 2. **Edit.** Adjust the song in the Bands app: key, tempo, time signature and song sections. See [Editing Songs in Pliris](/docs/editing-songs-in-pliris). 3. **Export to Ableton Live.** Download the song, or your whole setlist, as a fully programmed Ableton Live project. See [What Is in an Exported Ableton Project](/docs/what-is-in-an-exported-ableton-project). 4. **Update and re-import.** When you add audio files, remove sections, or change your set or a single Ableton Live file, re-import the update into Pliris. You're back at step 1, and the loop continues. See [Updating Your Set from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton). ## What you get once a song is in Pliris - A fully programmed Ableton Live song, and a fully programmed Ableton Live set - Click, a songs track, song sections, cues and song slates - Output and stem routing done, color coding, tempo and time signature changes, and locators if you want them - Chords in ChordPro format - Lyrics timed automatically, which you can edit afterward - An LTC file to control lights, video and anything else you run - A reference file and an LTC reference to send to your lighting or video department ## Who it's for - **Playback engineers** who want to work with more clients and spend less time on each one. - **Solo artists and band members** who know they need playback but don't have the budget for a playback engineer. - **Worship leaders** who want Ableton's power without the time it usually takes. ## Frequently asked questions ### What is the Pliris loop? It's the four steps every song follows: upload and import, edit, export to Ableton Live, then update and re-import. When rehearsal changes a song, you re-import it and the loop starts again. ### Do I need to rebuild songs I've already programmed in Ableton? No. You can import a fully programmed Ableton Live song or set into Pliris. You don't have to start from stems. ### Does Pliris replace Ableton Live? No. Ableton Live stays your playback engine. Pliris programs the session for you and exports it as an Ableton Live project. See [What Is Pliris?](/docs/what-is-pliris). ### What happens when we change a song in rehearsal? Make the change, then re-import the updated file into Pliris. The song updates, and you can export it again. --- # Ways to Get Songs into Pliris > Upload and import is step one of the Pliris loop. There's no wrong way to upload, but the right path for your files saves analysis credits and editing time. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/ways-to-get-songs-into-pliris Upload and import is the first step of the Pliris loop: upload and import, edit, export to Ableton Live, then update and re-import. You can bring songs in from almost anything you already have. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Upload and import: intro](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/upload-and-import-intro)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## There's no wrong way to upload You can't really make a mistake when you upload. Some paths are just slower. For example, if you upload an Ableton project's stems and then drop the .als file on afterward, nothing breaks. It takes more time, can spend analysis credits you didn't need, and usually means extra editing, compared with uploading the Ableton project on its own. ## Pick the path that matches your files - **Raw stems, or a .zip of stems:** upload them to a song and choose the analysis you want. See [Uploading Raw Stems or a Zip of Stems](/docs/uploading-raw-stems-or-a-zip). - **A stereo recording (no stems):** see [Uploading a Stereo Recording](/docs/uploading-a-stereo-recording). - **Stems in cloud storage:** paste a share link into Files. See [Importing Stems from Cloud Storage](/docs/importing-stems-from-cloud-storage). - **An Ableton Live song you've already programmed:** import the project so your work comes with it. See [Importing a Song from Ableton Live](/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live). - **Changes you made in Ableton after exporting:** re-import them. See [Updating Your Set from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton). - **A whole Ableton Live set:** see [Importing a Whole Ableton Live Set](/docs/importing-a-whole-ableton-live-set). - **A whole catalog at once:** see [Bulk Uploading a Folder of Songs](/docs/bulk-uploading-a-folder-of-songs). > **Pro tip:** If you already have the Ableton project, upload that instead of the stems. You skip analysis you don't need and the editing that comes after it. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I make a mistake when uploading to Pliris? Not really. Every path gets your song in. Some just take longer, cost analysis credits you didn't need, or leave more editing to do. ### Should I upload stems or my Ableton project? If you have a programmed Ableton project, upload the project. It carries your work with it, so you skip extra analysis and editing. ### What file types can I upload? Raw stems, compressed .zip files of stems, and Ableton Live projects and sets. You can also import from cloud storage links. ### What comes after uploading? Editing. Then you export to Ableton Live, and re-import whenever rehearsal changes something. See [The Pliris Loop](/docs/the-pliris-loop). --- # What Is Pliris? > The big-picture mental model — what Pliris is, who it's for, and the four nouns that hold your whole live rig together. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/what-is-pliris ## The short version Pliris™ turns raw stems into a show-ready Ableton Live set — routed, clicked, cued, and timecoded — then runs the whole performance stack around it. You bring your stems. Pliris turns them into a fully programmed, ready-to-run show — tempo, key, sections, and, when you ask for them, lyrics and chords, plus MIDI cues and LTC/SMPTE timecode. The promise is simple: **from stems to set in seconds.** That's not a slogan. The thing that used to eat an hour or two of your night — dragging stems into a session, tapping tempo, marking sections, wiring up a click and cue track — starts with the **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** option. Lyrics and chords are a second checkbox, **Lyrics and Chords**. You upload. You check the options you want. You download a show. ## Who it's for Pliris is built for the people who run playback for a living or for a calling: - **Worship teams** running tracks on a Sunday and needing them to just work. - **Touring bands** carrying a rig from room to room, night after night. - **Music directors (MDs)** who own the arrangements and need to change them fast. - **Playback engineers** who need clean stems, tight timecode, and MIDI cues that fire on the beat. If you've ever built a click track by hand at 1am before a show, Pliris was made for you. ## The four nouns Everything in Pliris hangs off four ideas. Learn these and you understand the whole app. ### Bands A **band** is the container for everything else — songs, arrangements, stems, setlists, members. It's your workspace. If you're an engineer working with more than one artist, each one gets its own band. ### Songs A **song** lives inside a band. It's the tune itself — "House of the Rising Sun," "Something I Can Dance To," whatever's on your set. Add a song and Pliris automatically creates its first arrangement. ### Arrangements An **arrangement** is a specific version of a song: the studio cut, the live version, the acoustic take, the "we dropped the bridge for festival sets" edit. This is where the real work lives — the stems, the tempo, the key, the sections, the lyrics, the chords, the MIDI cues. When you play a song back, you're playing an arrangement. ### Setlists A **setlist** puts songs in order for a show. Build it, reorder it, share it with the band as a public link, print it for the music stand, and — when you're ready — export the whole thing back to Ableton as one running show set. Put together, the model reads top to bottom: **bands → songs → arrangements → setlists.** ## How it fits together Here's the whole flow in one breath: 1. Create a **band**. 2. Add a **song**. 3. Upload your **stems** into its **arrangement** — drop them (upload starts immediately). Check **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** for key, tempo, time signature, and sections. Check **Lyrics and Chords** if you also want lyrics and chords. Each checked option is its own credit charge. 4. Download the arrangement as an **Ableton Set**, fully programmed. 5. Order your songs into a **setlist** and export the show. That's the path. Walk it once and you've used Pliris the way it was designed to be used. > **Pro tip:** Don't try to learn every feature on day one. Learn the four nouns and the one path. Everything else — MIDI cues, LTC, chord charts, view modes — is detail you can pick up when you actually need it. ## What Pliris is not Pliris is not a DAW. It doesn't replace Ableton Live — it feeds it. You program in Pliris in seconds, then take a real, editable `.als` session into Ableton for the final touches, and re-import your changes so the two stay in sync. ## Frequently asked questions ### Does Pliris replace Ableton Live? No — Pliris is not a DAW and doesn't replace Ableton Live; it feeds it. You program your show in Pliris in seconds, take a real, editable `.als` session into Ableton for the final touches, then re-import your changes so the two stay in sync. ### What does Pliris extract automatically from my stems? Two checkboxes, not one bundle. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** produces key, tempo, time signature, and song sections, and does not show lyrics. **Lyrics and Chords** produces lyrics and chords, shown together after it runs. Each selected option is its own credit charge. Uploading stems with both boxes unchecked does not spend analysis credits. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ### Does Analyze give me lyrics on every plan? Only when **Lyrics and Chords** is checked, and that option is on Free and All-Access alike. An empty Lyrics tab after **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** alone is expected. Plans differ on credits and caps, not on which checkbox exists. ### What's the difference between a song and an arrangement in Pliris? A song is the tune itself, living inside a band. An arrangement is a specific version of that song — the studio cut, the live version, the acoustic take — and it's where the real work lives: stems, tempo, key, sections, lyrics, chords, and MIDI cues. When you play a song back, you're playing an arrangement. ### Can I share my setlist with the rest of the band? Yes. A Pliris setlist can be shared with the band as a public link, printed for the music stand, reordered as needed, and exported back to Ableton as one running show set. ## Where to go next - Want to see how every song moves through Pliris? Read [The Pliris Loop](/docs/the-pliris-loop). - Want the full data model? Read [Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists](/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists). - Ready to build? Jump to [Creating Your First Band](/docs/creating-your-first-band). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # Signing In to Pliris > Where to sign in, how the magic-link flow works, and how one sign-in carries across every From Studio to Stage app — there is no separate Pliris login page. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/signing-in-to-pliris There's no password to remember and no separate Pliris™ account to create. If you have an active subscription (or a free account), you sign in once with your email and every From Studio to Stage app opens for you. ## Where to sign in Two front doors, both equally correct: - **[fromstudiotostage.com](https://fromstudiotostage.com)** — click **Sign in** in the top-right corner. - **[bands.fromstudiotostage.com](https://bands.fromstudiotostage.com/auth)** — go straight to the Pliris player and sign in there. **There is no `pliris.fromstudiotostage.com`.** Pliris isn't a separate website with its own login — it's the product family that lives across the From Studio to Stage apps. Sign in at either address above and you're in. ![The From Studio to Stage sign-in page: enter your email and click Send sign-in link.](/help-assets/signing-in-main-site-auth.png) ## The magic-link flow 1. Enter your email address — **the same email you subscribed with**. Access is keyed off your email, so a different address won't find your subscription. 2. Click **Send sign-in link**. 3. Open the email and click the link. That's it — no password, ever. If the email doesn't arrive within a minute or two, check your spam folder, and make sure you typed the address you pay with. The Pliris sign-in page at bands.fromstudiotostage.com works exactly the same way: ![The Pliris sign-in page at bands.fromstudiotostage.com — same email, same magic link.](/help-assets/signing-in-bands-auth.png) ## One sign-in, every app Your session is shared across all `.fromstudiotostage.com` apps. Sign in on the main site and you're automatically signed in at bands.fromstudiotostage.com (and every other Pliris app) — and the other way around. You never need to sign in twice. Once you're signed in, every published Pliris app opens with the same account: | App | What it does | Open it | | --- | --- | --- | | **Bands** | The performance database — songs, stems, arrangements, setlists | [bands.fromstudiotostage.com](https://bands.fromstudiotostage.com) | | **Lyrics** | Stage lyrics display | [lyrics.fromstudiotostage.com](https://lyrics.fromstudiotostage.com) | | **Presets** | Patch library for your devices | [presets.fromstudiotostage.com](https://presets.fromstudiotostage.com) | | **Video** | Set video playback | [video.fromstudiotostage.com](https://video.fromstudiotostage.com) | | **LTC** | SMPTE timecode generator | [ltc.fromstudiotostage.com](https://ltc.fromstudiotostage.com) | | **Cues** | Voice cues for the stage | [cues.fromstudiotostage.com](https://cues.fromstudiotostage.com) | | **Files** | Inbox links and file sharing | [files.fromstudiotostage.com](https://files.fromstudiotostage.com) | | **Monitor** | MIDI / timecode monitor | [monitor.fromstudiotostage.com](https://monitor.fromstudiotostage.com) | You can also jump between apps from the avatar menu in any app's header. ## "It keeps asking me to sign up for All-Access — but I already have it" The pricing sections on our marketing pages (like the Pliris product page) are shown to **everyone**, including signed-in subscribers — they're an ad for new visitors, not a readout of your account. Seeing a "Get All-Access" button does *not* mean your subscription is missing. If you already have All-Access: - Skip the pricing buttons entirely and head to **[bands.fromstudiotostage.com](https://bands.fromstudiotostage.com)** to use Pliris. - If you do click a checkout button, we'll block the purchase so you can't double-subscribe — that block means your subscription is active, not that something is wrong. To confirm what your account has: sign in, open the avatar menu in the header, and check your plan — or visit [fromstudiotostage.com/settings](https://fromstudiotostage.com/settings). ## Still stuck? - **Just subscribed but the app still says Free?** Sign out and back in — access refreshes at sign-in. - **Subscribed with one email but signing in with another?** Contact support and we'll line them up. - Anything else: use the chat widget or email support and include the email address you subscribed with. --- # Magic Link Sign-In Troubleshooting > What to do when the sign-in email does not arrive, the link loops, or Safari says it expired. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/magic-link-troubleshooting Pliris uses **email magic links** — no password. Most “I can’t sign in” tickets are email delivery, wrong address, or a stale tab — not a deleted account. ## Checklist 1. **Use the email you pay with.** Access is keyed off that address. 2. Wait 1–2 minutes; check **spam / promotions**. 3. Request a **fresh** link — do not reuse an old email. 4. Open the link in the **same browser** you started from when possible. 5. If the page loops back to sign-in: hard-refresh, clear site data for `fromstudiotostage.com`, or try a private window. 6. **Safari** sometimes treats the link as expired if mail app link protection previews the URL — try “Open in Browser” or copy the link into Safari/Chrome manually. ## Still stuck? Tell support: - The exact email you used - Browser and device - Whether the email arrived - What you see after clicking (loop, expired, blank, error text) ## Related - [Signing In to Pliris](/docs/signing-in-to-pliris) --- # Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists > The full data model — how bands hold songs, songs hold arrangements, arrangements hold your show, and setlists put it all in order. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists Pliris™ organizes everything around four nested ideas. Once you see how they stack, the whole app clicks into place. This is that map, in depth. ## The hierarchy **Band → Song → Arrangement**, with **Setlists** cutting across your songs to build a show. - A **band** contains songs. - A **song** has one or more arrangements. - An **arrangement** holds the actual music and everything synced to it. - A **setlist** orders songs for a specific performance. Let's take each one. ## Bands A band is your workspace and the container for everything else — songs, arrangements, stems, setlists, and members. It's the front door. If you're a touring engineer or MD working across multiple artists, each artist gets their own band, keeping catalogs cleanly separated. **Plan limits:** - **Free tier:** one band. - **Paid:** unlimited bands. You can also invite members to a band — bandmates, techs, managers — and give each one an access level (**View**, **Download** or **Manage**) for the bands you pick. See [Managing Members and Access](/docs/managing-members-and-access). ## Songs A song lives inside a band. It's the tune — title and identity. When you add a song, Pliris automatically creates its first arrangement so you always have somewhere to put the music. **Plan limits:** - **Free tier:** 15 songs total across your account. - **Paid:** unlimited songs. Think of a song as the name on the setlist. The *how it actually sounds tonight* lives one level down, in the arrangement. ## Arrangements This is where the work lives. An arrangement is a specific version of a song — a studio version, a live version, an acoustic version, a shortened festival edit. Because each version can differ in tempo, length, and structure, each one is its own arrangement. An arrangement holds: - **Stems** — the individual tracks (drums, bass, vocals, synths, etc.) you play back, mute, and solo. - **Key**, **tempo**, and **time signature** — from **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections**, or typed by hand. Tempo can be a single BPM or, for warped material, a tempo map. - **Sections** — Intro, Verse, Chorus, Bridge and friends, placed on the timeline so you can jump around (click a section, or use Left / Right for previous / next). That option fills them; it does not show lyrics. - **Lyrics** — words you can edit line by line. Timed lyrics come from **Lyrics and Chords**, not from pasting text and not from **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections**. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). - **Chords** — shown together with lyrics after **Lyrics and Chords**, or entered by hand. - **MIDI cues** — events that fire external gear (lighting consoles, click tracks, pedals) at precise timecodes. Each member programs their own; everyone can see all cues. Press **C** to quickly add one. The arrangement page has two view modes: **Simple** (a clean waveform with collapsible panels below) and **Pro** (a DAW-style layout with section lanes and draggable inline MIDI cue markers). Toggle between them at the top of the page. **Plan limits:** - **Free tier:** 1 arrangement per song. - **Paid:** unlimited arrangements per song. **The two Analyze options are the same on Free and All-Access.** **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** fills key, tempo, time signature, and sections, at 5 credits per minute of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** fills lyrics and chords together, at 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. Both together on a 4-minute song is about 80 credits. Manual mode is always available and always free (type your BPM, add sections from Ableton, upload your own stems). **All-Access** gets you more credits per month, the Standard/Pro/Custom Set Builder templates (plus uploading your own template), and full access to Playback Academy. > **Pro tip:** Because arrangements are independent, you can keep a full studio version and a stripped acoustic version of the same song side by side, and drop whichever one you need into tonight's setlist. ## Setlists A setlist puts songs in order for a performance. It's the cross-cutting layer — it pulls from your song library and sequences it for a show. From a setlist you can: - Add songs from your library and **drag to reorder** them. - Share a **public link** so the band (or crew, or fans) can view and play without an account. Public viewers can listen to reference audio but can't download stems. - **Print** a clean PDF for the music stand. - Assign **LTC timecode** values for syncing external gear. - **Export the whole show back to Ableton** as one running Live Set, every song in order. **Plan limits:** - **Free tier:** unlimited setlists. - **Paid:** unlimited setlists. ## Plan limits at a glance | Level | Free tier | Paid (All-Access) | | --- | --- | --- | | Bands | 1 | Unlimited | | Members per band | 10 | Unlimited | | Songs (account-wide) | 15 | Unlimited | | Arrangements per song | 1 | Unlimited | | Setlists | Unlimited | Unlimited | | Storage | 10 GB | 1 TB | | Credits / month | 240 | 1,000 | | Analyze options | **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** and **Lyrics and Chords** (each its own credit charge) | Same | | Manual mode (BPM, sections from Ableton, upload stems) | Included | Included | | Set Builder templates | Intro | Intro, Standard, Pro, Custom | | Upload custom Ableton template | — | Included | | Playback Academy | — | Included | There's no trial period — new accounts start on the free tier and stay there until you subscribe to Pliris. The free-tier limits above apply until you upgrade. ## Frequently asked questions ### How many bands can I create in Pliris? The free tier includes one band; paid accounts get unlimited bands. If you're a touring engineer or MD working across multiple artists, each artist gets their own band to keep catalogs cleanly separated. ### What's the difference between a song and an arrangement? A song is the tune's title and identity — the name on the setlist. An arrangement is a specific version of that song (studio, live, acoustic, festival edit) and holds the actual music: stems, tempo, key, time signature, sections, lyrics, chords, and MIDI cues. Lyrics and chords are filled by **Lyrics and Chords** or by hand — not by **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections**. ### How many songs and arrangements does the free tier include? The free tier allows 15 songs total across your account and 1 arrangement per song, along with 10 GB of storage. Paid accounts get unlimited songs and unlimited arrangements per song. ### Is there a free trial of Pliris? No — there's no trial period. New accounts start on the free tier and stay there, with the free-tier limits applying, until you subscribe to Pliris. ### Can people without a Pliris account view my setlist? Yes. You can share a public link to a setlist so the band, crew, or fans can view and play it without an account — public viewers can listen to reference audio but can't download stems. ## Where to go next - Ready to start? [Creating Your First Band](/docs/creating-your-first-band). - Curious how the two Analyze options spend credits? [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). - Which option times lyrics? [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). - How a song moves through Pliris: [The Pliris Loop](/docs/the-pliris-loop). - Ready to build a show? See [building a setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). Questions about limits or upgrades? Click the support bubble on any page or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Creating Your First Band > Add your first band, set its name and profile image, and understand what a band actually holds — the front door to everything in Pliris. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/creating-your-first-band Your band is the front door. It's the container for everything else in Pliris™ — songs, arrangements, stems, setlists, and members. Nothing happens until you've got one, so let's create it. ## What a band is A band is your workspace. Every song you add, every arrangement you build, every setlist you run for a show lives inside a band. If you work with more than one artist, you'll give each their own band to keep catalogs clean and separate. - **Free tier:** one band. - **Paid:** unlimited bands. If you're a touring engineer or MD juggling multiple artists, unlimited bands is the reason to upgrade. ## Create your band 1. Head to your **Bands** page from the top navigation. 2. Add a new band and give it a **name** — the artist or project name works best. 3. Create it. That's the container done. Your band now exists and is ready for songs. But before you fill it up, take thirty seconds to set it up properly. ## Set the name and profile image Your band profile is the first thing your team sees. A clear name and a real image keep your workspace organized and make it easy for members to spot the right project at a glance. 1. Open your band page from the top navigation. 2. Click the **settings icon** next to your band name. 3. Click the image placeholder to **upload a profile image** — a logo or artist photo is ideal. 4. Edit the **band name** in the settings panel if you need to change it. 5. **Save** your changes. > **Pro tip:** Use a distinctive image per band. Once you're managing several artists, the profile image is the fastest way to tell them apart on the Bands page. ## Invite your team (optional) A band isn't just yours — it's your whole crew's. From your band settings you can invite bandmates, techs, and managers by email and set exactly what each person can do: view only, download files, create setlists, manage arrangements, edit songs, or manage members. Account admins always have full access. You don't have to do this now. You can invite people any time from the Members section in band settings. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I manage more than one band with a single Pliris account? On the free tier you get one band; paid accounts get unlimited bands. If you're a touring engineer or MD juggling multiple artists, unlimited bands is the reason to upgrade — each artist gets their own band to keep catalogs clean and separate. ### Can I change my band's name or profile image after creating it? Yes. Open your band page from the top navigation, click the settings icon next to your band name, then upload a new profile image or edit the band name in the settings panel and save. ### Do I have to invite my band members right away? No — inviting your team is optional at setup. You can invite bandmates, techs, and managers by email any time from the Members section in band settings. ### What can I control about what each band member is allowed to do? When you invite someone to a band, you set exactly what they can do: view only, download files, create setlists, manage arrangements, edit songs, or manage members. Account admins always have full access. ### Does Analyze on my first song include lyrics? Only if you check **Lyrics and Chords**. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not show lyrics. Both together is two credit charges: **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is 5 credits per minute of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5, and **Lyrics and Chords** is 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ## What's next Your band is set up. Now put music in it: 1. Click **Add Song** and give it a title. 2. Pliris automatically creates the song's first arrangement. 3. Open that arrangement and drop your stems — upload starts immediately. On upload, both Analyze checkboxes start unchecked. Check **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** for key, tempo, time signature, and sections. Check **Lyrics and Chords** for lyrics and chords, shown together. Each selected option is its own credit charge. To understand exactly how songs, arrangements, and setlists stack up, see [Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists](/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists). And to learn how analysis works before your first upload, read [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). Stuck anywhere, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Renamed Band Links Still Work > Changing a band's name shouldn't break old shared links — slug redirects keep the previous URL working. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/renamed-band-links Renamed a band and worried every old link died? It shouldn't have. When a band's name (and URL slug) changes, Pliris™ keeps a redirect from the old slug to the new one. Shared links, bookmarks, and setlist URLs that used the previous name should keep opening the right band. ## If a link still 404s 1. Open the link in a fresh tab (or hard-refresh). 2. Confirm you're signed in with the account that has access to that band. 3. If it still fails, send the exact URL to support — we'll check the redirect and fix it. ## Frequently asked questions ### Do old band links break when I rename my band? They shouldn't — Pliris keeps a slug redirect from the old band URL to the new one so shared links and bookmarks keep working. ### Why does my renamed band link still 404? Hard-refresh or open it in a fresh tab, confirm you're signed in with an account that has access, and if it still fails send the exact URL to support so we can check the redirect. ### Do public setlist links survive a band rename? Yes — setlist URLs that used the previous band slug should redirect with the band, same as other shared links. If a specific setlist URL 404s after a rename, send that URL to support. --- # Credits Explained > What the two Analyze options do, how credits work, why each option is its own per-minute charge, and why re-importing an Ableton file never costs you anything. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/analysis-credits-explained Analysis is what turns a folder of raw stems into a programmed song — tempo, key, time signature, and sections, and, when you ask for them, lyrics and chords. Those are two options, and each one spends credits on its own. This article explains both, and how the balance works. > **Used Pliris before?** Credits used to be flat: one credit per song, whether it was a 90-second interlude or a 12-minute epic. Credits now measure **minutes of processing** — short songs cost less, and one balance covers every kind of processing your crew does, including the new features on the way. Your monthly amount went from 35 to **1,000** (free accounts from 3 to **240**), your balance converted automatically, and your current period restarted with the full monthly amount. Nothing else about your account changed. ## The two Analyze options When you drop stems into an arrangement, upload starts immediately. Analyze on that upload starts with **both checkboxes unchecked**. On the song-page offer card, **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** starts checked and **Lyrics and Chords** starts unchecked. Empty **Key**, **Tempo**, or **Time** chips request **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** only. 1. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** — Key, tempo, time signature, and song sections. This option does **not** show lyrics. 2. **Lyrics and Chords** — Lyrics and chords, shown together after this runs. This run does not replace key, tempo, time signature, or sections. For paste versus timing, and what AbleSet needs, see [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). Anything that came through wrong you can edit by hand (right-click tempo/key chips, or **Edit** → **Done** if needed; rename stems and sections on the song page). Hand edits do not spend credits. > **Pro tip:** Rename your stems on the song page after upload — Guitar, Lead Vocal, BGVs, Synths, Drums — so routing stays clean. Not sure what a stem is? Preview with **Shift + Space**, then **right-click** to rename (or **Edit** → rename → **Done** if right-click is not on your build yet). You do not pick groups in the uploader. ## How credits work Each selected option is its own analysis credit charge. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is **5 credits per minute of audio**, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** is **15 credits per minute**, rounded up, minimum 15. - **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** on a typical 4-minute song is about **20 credits**. A 2-minute interlude is 10. - **Lyrics and Chords** on that 4-minute song is about **60 credits**. A 2-minute interlude is 30. - **Both together is two runs** — about **80 credits** for that same 4-minute song (40 for the 2-minute interlude). Each option is charged on its own. You'll see the cost before anything is charged. If the balance covers the first charge and not the second, the song page says the lyrics run did not start, and **Lyrics and Chords** stays available to retry. - **Free:** 240 credits per month. - **All-Access:** 1,000 credits per month. Your balance refills to the full amount at the start of each monthly period. You can see how many credits you have left — and when they refill — in the account menu (click your avatar in any Pliris app). Two more things worth knowing: - **If an analysis fails, you're refunded automatically.** You only pay for processing that completes. A failed second run does not keep the charge for a run that never finished. - **Credits are one balance for everything.** Today that's analysis and catalog re-encoding; as new processing features roll out, they draw from the same balance — no separate limits to track per feature. Free and All-Access offer the same two options. The difference is how many credits you get, and the plan caps — not a paywall on Lyrics and Chords. ## Why the change to per-minute pricing? There are new features on the way that will also use credits, and we needed to make this shift before releasing them. Counting credits by the minute means shorter songs take fewer credits and longer songs take more — which is what lets us sustainably offer song analysis and the new features alongside it, all from one balance. It's part of the same goal everything here points at: playback programming that takes 90% less time, and rehearsal prep that's effortless because the crew does the work. ## Re-importing Ableton does NOT cost credits Here's the part worth remembering. After you download an arrangement as an Ableton Set and make edits in Live — relabeling a section, tweaking the arrangement — you'll come back to Pliris and re-import the `.als` file to sync your changes. **That re-import costs nothing.** If you're out of credits, you'll see a warning when you upload the file. Ignore it. Re-importing an `.als` isn't re-analyzing anything — there are no stems to listen to and nothing to extract. It's just pulling your section changes back into Pliris so the app and your Ableton session stay in sync. It's essentially instant, and it's free every time. Credits are spent on **processing of audio** (an Analyze option on your stems), not on syncing an Ableton file back in. ## When to spend credits Spend credits when you have new audio Pliris hasn't heard yet, or when you still need an option you haven't run: - **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** for key, tempo, time signature, and sections. - **Lyrics and Chords** for timed lyrics and chords. Don't spend them to: - Re-import an edited `.als` file (free — see above). - Edit lyrics, chords, or section labels by hand (editing is always free, and paste does not add lyric timing). - Play back, mute, solo, or rehearse an already-analyzed arrangement. - Re-run **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** hoping it will fill Lyrics. It will not. ## Frequently asked questions ### Does Analyze give me lyrics? Only if you check **Lyrics and Chords**. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** returns key, tempo, time signature, and song sections. It does not show lyrics. ### Where do chords come from? They show together with the lyrics after **Lyrics and Chords**, or you type them on the **Chords** tab. ### I ran Analyze and Lyrics is empty. Is that broken? Expected when only **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** ran. That box starts checked on the offer card; **Lyrics and Chords** starts unchecked. Check **Lyrics and Chords** (with a lead vocal or a time-aligned reference). See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ### Do I spend credits twice? Yes, if both options are selected. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is 5 credits per minute of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** is 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. Both together on a 4-minute song is about 80 credits. One option is one charge. ### Are Free and All-Access different for these options? No. Both plans show **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** and **Lyrics and Chords**. Free gets 240 credits a month; All-Access gets 1,000. Caps differ. The options do not. ### How many credits do I get each month? Free accounts get 240 credits per month and All-Access accounts get 1,000 per month. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** costs 5 credits per minute of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** costs 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. ### Why did my credit numbers change? Credits now measure minutes of processing instead of whole songs, and monthly amounts scaled up to match — 35 became 1,000 (free: 3 became 240). We made this shift because new features are coming that will also use credits, and per-minute counting is what makes analysis and those features sustainable to offer. Existing balances converted automatically, with every account's current period restarted at the full monthly amount. ### Why do I see an out-of-credits warning when re-importing an Ableton file? The warning appears on upload when your balance is empty, but you can safely ignore it — re-importing an `.als` file never costs credits. There are no stems to analyze; Pliris is just pulling your section changes back in so the app and your Ableton session stay in sync, and it's free every time. ### Does editing lyrics, chords, or section labels cost credits? No. Editing by hand is always free. Credits are spent when a selected Analyze option processes audio. Pasting lyric text does not add timing and does not spend credits. ### What if an analysis fails? You're refunded automatically. Credits are only kept for processing that completes. ## Where to go next - Which option times lyrics: [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). - What each plan includes: [Plans, Credits, and Billing](/docs/plans-credits-and-billing). Questions about your credit balance or a bad analysis, click the support bubble on any page or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # The Pliris Account Menu > The same avatar menu in every Pliris app — your profile, credit and storage meters, and account links that open already signed in. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-pliris-account-menu Every Pliris app — Files, Lyrics, Video, and more as they ship — now has the same account menu behind the avatar in the header. Whichever app you're in, click your avatar and you get the identical menu: who you're signed in as, how much of your plan you've used, and one-click access to account management. ## What's in the menu - **Your profile** — your name and email at the top, so you always know which account you're signed into. - **Credits** — a meter showing credits used out of your monthly allowance, with the date your allowance resets. See [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained) for how credits are spent. - **Storage** — how much of your plan's storage your uploads are using. - **Account** — links to **Members**, **Subscription**, and **Account settings**. - **Sign out**. - **Version** — the version you're running, bottom-right. Click it to open the changelog. What you see depends on your role: band admins get the Members link, account admins also get Subscription and Account settings, and everyone gets their profile, the meters, and sign out. ## Account links open already signed in Members, Subscription, and Account settings live in one place — the main Pliris (Bands) app — rather than being duplicated in every app. Clicking one of them opens that page **in a new tab, already signed in**. There's no second login: your Pliris session is shared across all Pliris apps on fromstudiotostage.com. Opening a new tab is deliberate. If you're mid-show in Lyrics or Video, checking your subscription will never navigate the live app away from what it's doing. ## Frequently asked questions ### Where can I see how many credits I have left? Click your avatar in the header of any Pliris app — the account menu shows a Credits meter with the credits used out of your monthly allowance, plus the date your allowance resets. See [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained) for how credits are spent. ### Why don't I see Members or Subscription in my account menu? What you see in the Pliris account menu depends on your role: band admins get the Members link, account admins also get Subscription and Account settings, and everyone gets their profile, the credit and storage meters, and sign out. ### Do I have to sign in again when I open Subscription or Account settings? No. Your Pliris session is shared across all Pliris apps on fromstudiotostage.com, so Members, Subscription, and Account settings open in a new tab already signed in — there's no second login. ### Why do account links open in a new tab? It's deliberate: if you're mid-show in Lyrics or Video, checking your subscription will never navigate the live app away from what it's doing. The account pages live in the main Pliris (Bands) app and open separately. ### How do I find out which version of a Pliris app I'm running? The version number sits at the bottom-right of the account menu behind your avatar. Click it to open the changelog. ## Where to go next - Wondering what the meters are measuring? Read [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained) and [Plans, Credits, and Billing](/docs/plans-credits-and-billing). - New to how Pliris is organized? Start with [Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists](/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # Finding Course Downloads and Templates > Where lesson downloads live, free vs paid templates, and what to do when a Downloads tab is empty. Category: Getting Started URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/finding-course-downloads-and-templates ## In-lesson downloads Many course lessons attach files on a **Downloads** tab inside the lesson player. If the tab is missing for a specific lesson, that lesson may not have files wired yet — contact support with the **course name** and **lesson number**. ## Free Playback Intro template — /template is the FREE one only [fromstudiotostage.com/template](https://fromstudiotostage.com/template) is the sign-up page for the **free Playback Intro (LITE) template** and the free Playback Method course. That is all it gives you. ## Bought a course template? Don't use /template If you purchased **Foundations**, **Advanced Arrangement**, **Tracks 201**, **Tracks 301**, or any other paid course or template (including anything invoiced through Kajabi), your template is **not** on the `/template` page — that page would only hand you the free Intro version. Your purchased template comes from the **Downloads** tab on the lessons of the course you bought, using the account you purchased with. If the Downloads tab is empty, or you're signed in with a different email than the one on your receipt, email support with your purchase receipt and we'll confirm the purchase and send your download link directly. ## Paid Ableton templates (export) Template choice at **export** time (Intro / Standard / Pro) is separate from course download packs. See [How to Choose an Ableton Template](/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template) and [Trial and Paid Limits](/docs/trial-and-paid-limits). ## ProPresenter / specialty packs Some courses mention ProPresenter or hardware-specific packs. If a lesson promises a download and the tab is empty, that is a content bug — send the lesson title so we can attach the file. ## Related - [Plans, Credits, and Billing](/docs/plans-credits-and-billing) --- # Building a Set and Updating It from Ableton > Build a setlist three ways, export it as one Ableton Live Set with samples in Chrome, edit it in Ableton, then drop the .als back on the setlist to update each song: new arrangement, overwrite, or leave unchanged. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/building-a-set-and-updating-it-from-ableton Build your show's setlist in Pliris, export it as one Ableton Live Set, rehearse and edit it in Ableton, then drop the edited `.als` back on the setlist. Every song in Pliris then matches how your band actually plays it, and nobody re-uploads stems or rebuilds reference files. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Building a set in Pliris](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/building-a-set-in-pliris)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## Create the setlist Go to **Setlists**, click **New setlist**, name it and click **Create setlist**. ![The New setlist dialog.](/help-assets/build-set-01-new-setlist.png) You can add songs three ways: - **From the setlist:** click **Add your first song**, or press **A** then **Enter**. Type to search, press **Tab** to reach **Add**, and **Escape** to close. Use the **Add** button between rows to insert a song in a specific place. - **From the song library:** click a song's **+** icon, pick the setlist under **Recent** (or create a new one) and click **Apply**. - **From a song's page:** open the arrangement and click **Setlist**. ![Adding a song from the setlist.](/help-assets/build-set-02-add-a-song.png) ![Adding a song to a setlist from the library.](/help-assets/build-set-03-add-from-library.png) ![The Setlist button on a song's page.](/help-assets/build-set-04-add-from-song-page.png) Drag songs to reorder them. The setlist shows each song's key, tempo, time signature, length and LTC start, plus the total time. **Add → Talk** adds a timed talk (for example *Welcome*, 0:30) that counts toward the total. ![A setlist with talks and total time.](/help-assets/build-set-06-talks.png) ## Export it to Ableton > **Use Chrome or Edge.** Safari can't finish large exports. See [Large Ableton Exports and Browsers](/docs/large-ableton-exports-and-browsers). 1. Click **Export Ableton** → **With samples**. 2. Chrome can't save directly to Desktop or Documents, so create a new folder inside one of them and choose it. Click **Allow**. 3. Keep the tab open until the set finishes. Speed depends on your connection, the number of songs and, most of all, the number of stems. ![Choosing a folder for the export.](/help-assets/build-set-07-choose-folder.png) ![The export in progress.](/help-assets/build-set-08-exporting.png) What you get depends on your band settings: **Template** (layout), **Returns**, **Global tracks**, **Stems** and **Stem groups** (routing), and **Setlist management**, where you choose your stage tool and can **auto-generate STOP locators** so songs stop after they play. See [Settings → Setlist management](/docs/the-setlist-management-page). ![Setlist management settings.](/help-assets/build-set-09-setlist-management.png) ## Edit the set in Ableton Open the `.als` from the export folder. Sets built from Pliris's built-in templates are saved with Ableton Live 11.3 and open in any newer version; Live may ask you to **Save Live Set As** when you save. ![The exported set in Ableton Live.](/help-assets/build-set-10-ableton-set.png) Play through every song and make the changes your band needs: remove an intro, fix a time signature, turn a fade into a hard stop, change a cue. Then save. ## Update the setlist from your edited set 1. In Chrome, open the setlist in Pliris. 2. Drag the edited `.als` (the Live Set file, not the Samples folder) onto the setlist. 3. **Update setlist from .als** lists each song and what changed. For each one choose: - **New arrangement:** keep the original and add this version (name it, for example *Live*) - **Overwrite existing:** replace the current arrangement with your edits - **Leave unchanged** 4. Click **Apply**. ![The Update setlist from .als dialog.](/help-assets/build-set-11-update-from-als.png) Pliris reads the structure, cues and timing from the set. Stems aren't re-uploaded unless you printed new audio. See [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton). Open a song from the setlist to check it. The [setlist navigation panel](/docs/the-setlist-navigation-panel) moves you through the set. A song you updated with **New arrangement** now has both versions in the library. ![Setlist navigation on a song page.](/help-assets/build-set-12-setlist-navigation.png) ![A song with Default and Live arrangements.](/help-assets/build-set-13-new-arrangement.png) ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I add songs to a setlist quickly? On the setlist, press **A** then **Enter**, type the song name, press **Tab** to reach **Add**, and **Escape** when you're done. ### Why does my set export fail in Safari? Safari can't finish large downloads. Export the set in Chrome or Edge. ### Can I save the export straight to my Desktop? Not directly. Chrome doesn't allow it, so create a new folder on your Desktop and choose that folder. ### How do I get my Ableton edits back into Pliris? Save the set in Ableton, then drag the `.als` onto the setlist in Pliris and choose, for each song, a new arrangement, overwrite, or leave unchanged. ### Do I have to re-upload stems after editing the set? No. Only structure and timing are read from the `.als`. You only update audio if you printed new stems. --- # Changing a Song's Key > Right-click the Key in an arrangement's header, type the right key, and click Save. Use it when analysis picks the relative minor or major, or when you skipped analysis. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/changing-a-songs-key Analysis detects each song's key, but it can confuse a major key with its relative minor (C major and A minor share the same notes). You can fix the key yourself in a few seconds. You don't need to contact support. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Edit a song's key](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/edit-a-songs-key)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## Change the key 1. Open the song's arrangement in the **Bands** app. The key shows at the top of the page, next to **Tempo** and **Time**. ![The arrangement header with the key showing A minor.](/help-assets/song-key-01-key-in-header.png) 2. **Right-click** the key. The **Edit Key** dialog opens. ![The Edit Key dialog: Update the stored key for this arrangement.](/help-assets/song-key-02-edit-key-dialog.png) 3. Type the key. A note on its own (**C**) or a note with major or minor (**C major**, **A minor**) both work. ![The Edit Key dialog with C typed in.](/help-assets/song-key-03-type-new-key.png) 4. Click **Save**. The header updates straight away. ![The arrangement header showing the new key, C.](/help-assets/song-key-04-key-updated.png) > **Pro tip:** The key is stored on the **arrangement**, not the song. If a song has several arrangements, change each one that needs it. Tempo and time signature work the same way: right-click them in the header. See [How to Edit Songs in Pliris](/docs/editing-songs-in-pliris) for every edit on the arrangement page, and [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song) for tempo. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I change a song's key in Pliris? Open the arrangement, right-click the **Key** in the header, type the new key, and click **Save**. ### Why did analysis get my song's key wrong? The most common mistake is picking the relative minor or major, such as A minor for a song in C major. Those keys share the same notes, so fix it by hand. ### Can I add a key if I didn't run analysis? Yes. Right-click the key in the header and type it in, the same way you'd correct it. ### Does changing the key change the audio? No. The key is information about the arrangement. It doesn't transpose or alter your stems. ### Do I have to change the key on every arrangement? Yes. Each arrangement stores its own key, so update every version that needs the change. --- # Exporting Your Songs for AbleSet, LIOBOX and TAZ > Choose your setlist tool in Settings → Setlist management and every Ableton export comes out with that tool's stop locators, section locators and song metadata, plus an AbleSet lyrics track. Switch tools and export again; nothing to reprogram. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/exporting-your-songs-for-ableset-liobox-and-taz Setlist tools like AbleSet, LIOBOX, Conductor and TAZ read Ableton locators to find your songs and sections. A plain export doesn't include them, so AbleSet shows a song with no sections. Tell Pliris which tool you use and every export is formatted for it. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Export for your setlist app](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/export-for-your-setlist-app)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ![AbleSet with an export made without a setlist tool: no sections.](/help-assets/setlist-management-01-ableset-before.png) ## Choose your setlist tool 1. Open your band's **Settings** and click **Setlist management**, under *Exports*. 2. Choose **None**, **Setlist**, **AbleSet**, **LIOBOX**, **Conductor** or **TAZ**. The options below change to match. **Setlist** is the Setlist iOS app, and **Conductor** is MultiTracks Conductor. Pick the tool you actually run the show from. There's no separate locator-format setting: the tool you pick sets the format. ![Setlist management with the six choices.](/help-assets/setlist-management-02-choose-tool.png) ### LIOBOX options - **Auto-generate STOP locators:** a locator named (STOP) at the end of every song. - **Add section locators:** hidden locators for each section, in LIOBOX format. - **Add song metadata to locators:** the start locator shows BPM, key and duration. ![LIOBOX options.](/help-assets/setlist-management-03-liobox-options.png) ### AbleSet options - **Auto-generate STOP locators:** a STOP locator at the end of every song. - **Add section locators:** a hidden locator at each section start, in AbleSet format. - **Add song metadata to locators:** the start locator reads *Title {Key, Tempo}*. - **Use AbleSet guide cues:** marks the cues track *+GUIDE* so AbleSet can mute upcoming-section cues when you loop or jump. - **Add loop guide cues:** adds a *+LOOPGUIDE* track, muted by default. AbleSet swaps in the current section's cue while looping. - **Add lyrics track:** adds a *Vocals +LYRICS* MIDI track with your timed lyrics. Songs without timed lyrics are skipped. - **Add Chords to Lyrics Track:** writes your chords into the lyrics track. Leave it off for lyrics only. ![AbleSet options.](/help-assets/setlist-management-04-ableset-options.png) For every system's options, see [Settings → Setlist management](/docs/the-setlist-management-page). ## Export and check it 1. Open a song, click **Download** and choose **Ableton Project**. Your band's template still applies. 2. Replace the old project on your computer with the new one and open it in Ableton Live. ![Download an Ableton project.](/help-assets/setlist-management-05-download-ableton-project.png) ![The export in progress.](/help-assets/setlist-management-06-exporting.png) In AbleSet you'll see the song with its key, tempo and every section, and with **Add lyrics track** on, the lyrics in time. ![AbleSet showing the song's key, tempo and sections.](/help-assets/setlist-management-07-ableset-sections.png) ![AbleSet lyrics from the exported lyrics track.](/help-assets/setlist-management-08-ableset-lyrics.png) ## Switching tools Your songs aren't tied to one setlist app. If you move from AbleSet to LIOBOX, or play a gig that uses a different tool, choose it in Setlist management and export again. The next export uses the new format. If the locators still look wrong after you export again, contact support. Tell them which tool is selected and attach a screenshot of Setlist management. Related: [Settings → Setlist management](/docs/the-setlist-management-page), [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset), [Switching Your Ableton Export Template](/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template). ## Frequently asked questions ### Why don't my song sections show up in AbleSet? The export wasn't made for AbleSet. In Settings → Setlist management, pick AbleSet, keep **Add section locators** on, and export again. ### Can I switch from AbleSet to LIOBOX without redoing my set? Yes. Choose LIOBOX in Setlist management and export again. Your songs and sections stay the same in Pliris; only the export format changes. ### How do I get lyrics into AbleSet? Turn on **Add lyrics track** in the AbleSet options. Only songs with timed lyrics are included. ### Do setting changes update files I already downloaded? No. Settings apply to your next export. Download the song or set again. --- # Fixing a Wrong Tempo (Half Time, Double Time and Tempo Changes) > If the click feels half or double speed, right-click the tempo and use ×2 or ÷2. If it drifts, type the exact tempo. For songs with tempo changes, edit points in Pro mode's Tempo lane and roll back with Undo or History. Your stems never change speed. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/fixing-a-wrong-tempo Analysis works out each song's tempo from the audio. It's a best guess, so it can land at half or double time, or slightly off. Fix it on the song page. **Re-uploading won't help**: analysis gives the same result again. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Edit tempo and tempo changes](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/edit-tempo-and-tempo-changes)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. A tempo edit changes the **grid** and the **click**. It never changes your stems: they aren't sped up, slowed down or re-rendered. ## Half time or double time If the click feels half as fast as the band (or twice as fast): 1. **Right-click** the **Tempo** in the arrangement header. The **Edit Tempo** dialog opens. ![The Edit Tempo dialog with the ÷2 and ×2 buttons.](/help-assets/tempo-02-edit-tempo-dialog.png) 2. Click **×2** to double the tempo, or **÷2** to halve it. The **÷2** and **×2** buttons next to the tempo in the header do the same thing. ![The tempo doubled from 80 to 160 BPM.](/help-assets/tempo-03-doubled-160.png) ## A tempo that's slightly off If the click drifts out of time with your tracks, the tempo is a little wrong (for example 159 instead of 160). In **Pro** mode (press **Tab**) you'll see the stems sit ahead of or behind the beat lines. 1. **Right-click** the **Tempo** in the header. 2. Type the correct tempo and click **Save**. The grid lines up with your stems. ![Typing the exact tempo in Edit Tempo.](/help-assets/tempo-04-type-exact-tempo.png) ## Songs with tempo changes When analysis finds tempo changes, the header shows a range (for example **111–130 BPM**) with a small **~**. ![A song with a variable tempo of 111–130 BPM.](/help-assets/tempo-05-variable-tempo-header.png) 1. Press **Tab** for **Pro** mode. The **Tempo** lane shows each tempo point as a BPM label. ![The Tempo lane with many tempo points.](/help-assets/tempo-06-tempo-lane-pro-mode.png) 2. **Right-click** a point for **Halve (÷2)**, **Double (×2)** or **Remove this change**, or drag it up or down to set a new BPM. ![The tempo point menu: Halve, Double and Remove this change.](/help-assets/tempo-07-tempo-point-menu.png) 3. Each change shows a toast with **Undo**. Click it straight away to reverse that change. ![The toast: Tempo set to 144 BPM at bar 24, with Undo.](/help-assets/tempo-08-undo-toast.png) To roll back several edits at once, click **History** and restore an earlier version, such as the original **Analysis**. See [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). ![Snapshot History with the original Analysis version.](/help-assets/tempo-09-snapshot-history.png) > **Pro tip:** After you delete a tempo change, refresh the page before you press Play. For the full grid (tempo, meter and sections) see [Editing the Grid: Tempo, Meter and Sections](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid) and [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song). ## Frequently asked questions ### Why does Pliris show half (or double) my song's tempo? Analysis can count the same song at half or double time. Right-click the tempo and click **×2** or **÷2**. ### Should I re-upload a song to fix its tempo? No. Analysis gives the same result again. Edit the tempo on the song page instead. ### Does changing the tempo change my stems? No. It changes the grid and the click. Your stems keep playing exactly as recorded. ### How do I undo several tempo edits? Open **History** and restore the version from before your edits. **Undo** on the toast only reverses the latest change. ### My click drifts out of time. What's wrong? The tempo is slightly off. Right-click it, type the exact tempo and click **Save**. --- # Fixing a Wrong Time Signature > When analysis reports a bar of 6/4 (or another odd meter) that isn't really there, find it in Pro mode's Meter lane, right-click it, and pick the right time signature. The fix carries straight into your Ableton export. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/fixing-a-wrong-time-signature Analysis can mistake two short bars for one long one. The most common case is a 4/4 bar followed by a 2/4 bar, which shows up as a single bar of **6/4**. Left alone, your click and count-in count six. Fixing it takes one right-click. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Fix a wrong time signature](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/fix-a-wrong-time-signature)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## Spot the change The **Time** field in the arrangement header lists every meter in the song, for example **4/4 · 6/4**. A small **!** next to it means the song has a time signature change. ![The arrangement header showing Time 4/4 · 6/4.](/help-assets/time-signature-01-header-6-4.png) ## Fix it in Pro mode 1. Press **Tab** to switch to **Pro** mode. The **Measures**, **Meter** and **Tempo** lanes appear above the waveform. 2. Zoom in and scroll to the change. Each meter is a block in the **Meter** lane that starts where it changes. ![The Meter lane in Pro mode with a 6/4 block at measure 32.](/help-assets/time-signature-02-pro-mode-meter-lane.png) 3. Play the passage and count it. Work out what the bar really is, for example four beats and then two. 4. **Right-click** the block and choose the right meter: **4/4**, **3/4**, **2/4**, **6/8** or **12/8**. The new meter runs until the next change. ![The time signature menu: 4/4, 3/4, 2/4, 6/8, 12/8 and Remove this change.](/help-assets/time-signature-03-right-click-menu.png) A toast confirms the change and offers **Undo**. Play it back and count again to check. ![The bar now set to 2/4, with the 4/4 block after it.](/help-assets/time-signature-04-changed-to-2-4.png) ![The header now reads 4/4 · 2/4.](/help-assets/time-signature-05-header-4-4-2-4.png) > **Pro tip:** Click the padlock next to **Meter** to lock the lane once it's right, so a stray click can't move it. ![The padlock on the Meter lane.](/help-assets/time-signature-06-lock-meter.png) To delete a change instead, right-click it and choose **Remove this change**. The previous meter carries on. Refresh before you press Play after a delete. ## It carries into Ableton Click **Download** and choose **Ableton Project**. The export uses the corrected meter, and your cues follow it. You don't need to fix it in Ableton and re-import. ![The Download dialog with Ableton Project selected.](/help-assets/time-signature-07-download-ableton-project.png) In Ableton the bar number is one higher (measure 33 instead of 32) because the export starts with a count-in bar. ![The 2/4 bar in the exported Ableton set.](/help-assets/time-signature-08-ableton-2-4-bar.png) For every grid edit (meter, tempo and sections) see [Editing the Grid: Tempo, Meter and Sections](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid). ## Frequently asked questions ### Why does Pliris show a 6/4 bar in my 4/4 song? Analysis heard a 4/4 bar and a 2/4 bar as one long bar. Right-click it in the Meter lane and set it to the meter it really is. ### How do I change a time signature in Pliris? Press **Tab** for Pro mode, right-click the block in the **Meter** lane, and choose 4/4, 3/4, 2/4, 6/8 or 12/8. ### Does changing the time signature change my audio? No. It changes the grid (bar lines, click and count-in), not your stems. ### Will my Ableton export use the new time signature? Yes. Download an Ableton Project after the fix and the new meter is in the set, with your cues updated. ### What does the exclamation point next to Time mean? It marks a song with a time signature change, so you can check that the change is real. --- # Fixing Song Sections After Analysis > Analysis guesses your song sections. Right-click a section to rename, split at the playhead, merge with previous or next, loop or delete it, and drag its edge to resize. Cues follow your sections automatically. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/fixing-song-sections-after-analysis When you analyze a song, Pliris makes its best guess at where each section starts and what to call it. When a guess is off, fix it on the song page. The cues follow your sections automatically, both in the player and in your Ableton export. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Edit song sections](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/edit-song-sections)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. > **Pro tip:** If the song came from an Ableton project with a guide cue, upload the Ableton file instead. Your sections will match it exactly. See [Importing a Song from Ableton Live](/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live). ![Song sections above the waveform on the song page.](/help-assets/song-sections-01-sections-overview.png) ## The section menu Click a section to jump to it. **Right-click** a section to open its menu: - **Rename** (or double-click the section) - **Split here**, at the playhead - **Edit cue**, which shows the section's current cue - **Loop section** (saved and exported; pressing **L** only loops the section while you listen) - **Merge with previous** / **Merge with next** - **Delete section** ![The section right-click menu.](/help-assets/song-sections-02-section-menu.png) ## Rename a section Right-click it, choose **Rename**, and type the new name. The section's cue is rebuilt with the new name. ![A section renamed to Pre-chorus.](/help-assets/song-sections-03-renamed-pre-chorus.png) ## Merge two sections Right-click one of them and choose **Merge with previous** or **Merge with next**. ![Merge with previous on the second of two choruses.](/help-assets/song-sections-04-merge-with-previous.png) ## Split a section 1. Press **Tab** to switch to **Pro** mode. Clicks snap the playhead to the grid, so it's easy to land on a downbeat. ![The arrangement in Pro mode.](/help-assets/song-sections-05-pro-mode.png) 2. Click where the new section should start to move the playhead there. 3. Right-click the section and choose **Split here**. It's only available when the playhead is inside that section. ![Split here in the section menu.](/help-assets/song-sections-06-split-here.png) 4. Rename the new piece. ![A new Breakdown section after the split.](/help-assets/song-sections-07-breakdown.png) ## Resize a section Hover over a section's edge and drag it. As you drag, you'll hear an audible grid: a click that goes **up** in pitch on each downbeat. Drag until you hear it, then check against the waveform. ![Dragging a section's edge to resize it.](/help-assets/song-sections-08-drag-to-resize.png) Play the song back. The cues move with your sections, so there's nothing to re-drag. ![The finished sections.](/help-assets/song-sections-09-finished.png) More detail: [Renaming Song Sections](/docs/renaming-song-sections), [Resizing Song Sections](/docs/resizing-song-sections), [Adding and Changing Song Sections](/docs/adding-and-changing-song-sections) and [Editing the Grid: Tempo, Meter and Sections](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid). ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I rename a song section in Pliris? Right-click the section and choose **Rename**, or double-click it, then type the new name. ### Why is Split here grayed out? **Split here** splits at the playhead. Move the playhead inside the section you want to split first. ### How do I merge two song sections? Right-click one of them and choose **Merge with previous** or **Merge with next**. ### Do I need to move my cues after editing sections? No. Cues follow your sections automatically, in the player and in your Ableton export. ### My sections don't match my Ableton guide cue. What should I do? Upload the song's Ableton project instead. Its sections come across exactly. --- # Making Rehearsal Edits in Ableton > Change an exported Pliris song in Ableton Live: rename, split or add sections, trim an intro, deactivate clips, and swap the click sound or cue voice. Then re-import the .als so Pliris picks up the changes. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/making-rehearsal-edits-in-ableton Songs change in rehearsal. You don't have to go back to square one: open the Ableton project you exported from Pliris, make the edits in Ableton Live, save, and re-import the Live set. Pliris updates the song without a re-upload. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Make rehearsal changes in Ableton](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/make-rehearsal-changes-in-ableton)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ![A song exported from Pliris, open in Ableton Live.](/help-assets/ableton-updates-01-song-in-ableton.png) ## Edit your sections Your song sections are named clips on the **Sections** header track. - **Rename** a section clip to change the section, for example Verse to **Pre-Chorus**. - **Consolidate** two section clips (⌘J) to merge them, or split one into two. - **Add an ending:** duplicate the outro clip and rename it **Ending**. ![Section clips on the Sections track.](/help-assets/ableton-updates-02-rename-sections.png) ![A new Ending section added after the outro.](/help-assets/ableton-updates-03-ending-section.png) ## Cut time safely 1. Select all your stems, turn on **Warp** and leave them on **Beats**. Warped stems stay in time when you cut or duplicate time. 2. Duplicate or delete time across the whole set, for example to trim an intro or jump straight to the pre-chorus. 3. Listen back before you save. ![Warping all stems before an edit.](/help-assets/ableton-updates-04-warp-stems.png) ![Trimming the intro.](/help-assets/ableton-updates-05-trim-intro.png) ## Change the click and cues - On the click track, choose another click type (for example **Lively**, sound 12). - On the cues track, choose another cue voice. - Change the click programming, for example eighths in the intro and quarters after. ![Changing the click sound.](/help-assets/ableton-updates-06-click-sound.png) ![Editing the click programming.](/help-assets/ableton-updates-08-click-programming.png) ## Deactivate clips Select a clip, such as the drums in the first verse, and deactivate it. Add a fade where the part comes back in. ![A deactivated drum clip.](/help-assets/ableton-updates-07-deactivate-clip.png) ## Bring the changes back into Pliris Save the Live set, then drag the **.als** onto the song page in Pliris. See [Re-importing Your Ableton Edits](/docs/re-importing-your-ableton-edits) and [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). Sections, cue placement, trims, deactivated clips and warping come back. At the time of writing, click sound, cue voice and click subdivision changes are stored but don't make the full round trip yet. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I change a Pliris song in Ableton Live? Yes. Edit the exported project in Ableton, save it, and re-import the .als on the song page. No re-upload. ### Where are the song sections in an exported Pliris set? They're named clips on the Sections header track at the top of the set. Rename, split or duplicate them to change sections. ### Why should I warp stems before editing? Warped stems stay in time when you cut, duplicate or delete time. Select all stems, turn on Warp and leave them on Beats. ### Will my click and cue sound changes come back into Pliris? Not yet. They're stored with the song, but the Pliris player doesn't play them and the re-export doesn't include them yet. --- # Moving and Renaming Stems on the Song Page > Shift-click to open every stem group, then right-click a stem to Move to group or Rename stem. Renaming changes how the stem appears. The underlying file is not changed. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page When you upload a song, Pliris sorts each stem into a **stem group** (Guitar, Keys, BGVs, FX and so on). If a stem lands in the wrong group, or its name got trimmed on upload, fix it on the song page with a right-click. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Move and rename stems](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/move-and-rename-stems)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## Open every group at once Groups start collapsed. **Hold Shift and click** any group's arrow to open all of them, so you can check every stem in one pass. ![Stem groups collapsed on the song page.](/help-assets/stem-groups-01-groups-collapsed.png) ![Every stem group open after a Shift-click.](/help-assets/stem-groups-02-all-groups-open.png) ## Move a stem to another group 1. **Right-click** the stem. The menu shows **Rename stem**, **Use as reference** and **Move to group**. ![The right-click menu on a stem.](/help-assets/stem-groups-03-right-click-move-to-group.png) 2. Choose **Move to group**, then pick the group. Some groups, like **Click** and **FX**, carry an **AUTO** tag in the list. ![The Move to group list with every stem group in the band.](/help-assets/stem-groups-04-choose-group.png) 3. The stem moves straight away. ![Synth FX moved into the Keys group.](/help-assets/stem-groups-05-moved-to-keys.png) You can't drag a stem into another group. Use the right-click menu. Moving a stem changes its group on this song only. It doesn't change where that group lands in Ableton. That's the group's **Routes to** setting on **Settings → Stem groups**. See [How to Change a Stem's Group on a Song](/docs/changing-a-stems-group-on-a-song) and [Pre-Routing Stems to Groups](/docs/pre-routing-stems-to-groups). To use a group of your own, create it on **Settings → Stem groups** first, then set its **Routes to**. See [Creating Custom Stem Groups](/docs/creating-custom-stem-groups). ## Rename a stem 1. **Right-click** the stem and choose **Rename stem**. ![Right-click a stem and choose Rename stem.](/help-assets/stem-groups-06-right-click-rename.png) 2. Type the new name and click **Save**. ![The Rename stem dialog: Change how this stem appears. The underlying file is not changed.](/help-assets/stem-groups-07-rename-stem-dialog.png) The new name shows on the song page and in Ableton Live when you export. The audio file itself keeps its original name. ![The stem renamed to Vocal Chop Effect.](/help-assets/stem-groups-08-renamed.png) Re-uploading a file with the same name replaces that stem. It doesn't add a duplicate. To move several stems at once, or fix a stem name on every song, see [How to Change a Stem's Group on a Song](/docs/changing-a-stems-group-on-a-song). ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I move a stem to a different stem group? Right-click the stem on the song page, choose **Move to group**, and pick the new group. ### How do I open all stem groups at once? Hold **Shift** and click any group's arrow. Every group opens. ### Does renaming a stem rename the audio file? No. **Rename stem** changes how the stem appears in Pliris and in your Ableton export. The underlying file is not changed. ### Why did my stem land in the wrong group? Pliris makes a best guess at each stem's group when you upload. When the guess is wrong, move it with **Move to group**. ### Can I drag a stem into another group? No. Right-click the stem and choose **Move to group**. --- # Preparing Stems Before Upload > Drop exported stems in a DAW unwarped. If they play in time together — including the click — they are ready. Pliris puts files on the timeline as they are. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/preparing-stems-before-upload Stems go onto the Pliris™ timeline exactly as you upload them. We do not shift a file that starts late, we do not pad a file that is short, and we do not warp anything into time. The check is in your DAW, not in Pliris. ## The listen test 1. Export stems, click, and cues from the **same bounce / session**. 2. Drop those files into Ableton or any DAW **unwarped / unaligned** — warp off, on a tempo-aligned timeline. 3. Hit play. If they all play back in time together, **including the click**, they are good to upload. Then drop them on the arrangement: [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). > **Pro tip:** Warp off is the point. You are checking the files themselves, not a session that already lined them up for you. ## What Pliris does not do - **We do not align misaligned stems.** Files land on the timeline as they are. A stem that starts two bars late in the file starts two bars late in Pliris. - **We do not match lengths.** If the files are not all the same length and clean, we leave them that way. Same start, same length, is on you. - **A click from a different bounce throws tempo.** When you upload a click, we build the grid from it. A click bounced from a different session than the stems will not match the music. The usual miss: instrument stems are tight WAVs that start on the downbeat, and the click and cue files are longer AIFs that start later. In a DAW they will not play together. In Pliris they will not either. If the listen test fails, fix it in the DAW and re-export. Do not upload hoping Pliris will clean it up. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I know my stems are ready to upload? Drop them in Ableton or any DAW with warp off, on a tempo-aligned timeline. If every file plays in time together — including the click — they are ready. ### Does Pliris align stems that start at different times? No. Pliris does not align misaligned stems. Files go on the timeline as you uploaded them. ### What if my stems are different lengths? Pliris does not match lengths up. If the files are not all the same length and clean, they land that way — re-export so click, cues, and stems start and end together. ### Why is my tempo wrong after I uploaded a click? We build the grid from an uploaded click, so a click bounced from a different session than the stems will throw tempo. Export the click with the stems from the same bounce, then run the listen test before you upload. ## Where to go next - Ready to drop files? [Uploading Raw Stems or a Zip of Stems](/docs/uploading-raw-stems-or-a-zip), then [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). - Tempo in Pliris is metadata, not time-stretch: [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song). Stuck anywhere, click the support bubble in the bottom-right of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # Re-importing Your Ableton Edits > Edited a song in Ableton Live after exporting it from Pliris? Drag the .als onto the song page, review the Update arrangement summary, and your sections, trims and deactivated clips are back in Pliris. No re-upload. Download again to take the edits back to Ableton. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/re-importing-your-ableton-edits You exported a song from Pliris, then changed it in Ableton Live during rehearsal: new sections, a trimmed intro, a few clips switched off. You don't need to redo stems or reference files. Re-import the Live set and Pliris updates the song in place. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Re-import your Ableton edits](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/re-import-your-ableton-edits)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ![A song edited in Ableton Live.](/help-assets/reimport-01-edited-in-ableton.png) ## Before you start - Re-import reads **arrangement changes**, not new audio. If you recorded or added new audio, upload those stems instead. - Use **Chrome** for drag-and-drop. ## Re-import the .als 1. On your computer, open the Ableton project folder and find the **.als** file (the Live set, not the whole folder). ![The .als file inside the Ableton project folder.](/help-assets/reimport-02-find-the-als.png) 2. Open the song in Pliris and drag the .als onto the page. Drop it on **Drop .als to update arrangement**. ![Dropping the .als onto the song page.](/help-assets/reimport-03-drop-to-update.png) 3. Review the **Update arrangement?** summary. It lists every change it detected (Sections, Locators, Tempo automation, Click length, Mix data, Stem clip alignment, Cues programming, Click programming), the sections added and removed, and before/after counts for tempo, sections and locators. 4. Click **Update arrangement**. To back out, click **Cancel**; nothing changes until you confirm. ![The Update arrangement? summary.](/help-assets/reimport-04-update-arrangement-dialog.png) The sections update, stems reload and deactivated clips show as deactivated. In Pro mode, unlock a stem to see trims that match your Ableton edit. ![The song after the update.](/help-assets/reimport-05-arrangement-updated.png) ![A drum trim from Ableton, shown in Pro mode.](/help-assets/reimport-06-drum-trim-in-pro-mode.png) ## Take the edits back to Ableton Click **Download → Ableton Project**. The new export includes your re-imported edits: sections, cue placement, trims, deactivated clips and warped stems. Your team gets updated reference and LTC files too. ![Downloading the updated Ableton project.](/help-assets/reimport-07-download-ableton-project.png) ![The re-exported song in Ableton Live.](/help-assets/reimport-08-back-in-ableton.png) ## What doesn't make the round trip yet At the time of writing: - **Click sound and cue voice** changes are stored with the song but don't play in the Pliris player, and they aren't in the re-export yet. - **Click subdivision** changes (for example eighths in the intro, then quarters) don't come back in the export yet. Cue **placement** does come back. For the full list of what's read from the file, see [What Gets Imported When You Update from Ableton](/docs/what-gets-imported-when-you-update-from-ableton). Related: [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton), [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton). ## Frequently asked questions ### Do I need to re-upload stems after editing a song in Ableton? No. Drag the edited .als onto the song page and click Update arrangement. Only upload stems if you added new audio. ### What does re-importing an Ableton file change in Pliris? Sections, locators, tempo automation, click length, mix data, clip alignment and trims, deactivated clips, and cue and click programming, as listed in the Update arrangement summary. ### Why doesn't my new click sound play in Pliris? Click sound and cue voice changes are stored with the song but aren't played back in the app or re-exported yet. Support is coming. ### How do I get my re-imported edits back into Ableton? Download the song again as an Ableton Project. The new export includes the edits. ### Why won't Pliris re-import my older Ableton set? On October 6, Pliris changed how re-import works. Every export now keeps a saved copy, so Pliris can tell what you changed in Live from what Pliris wrote. Sets you exported between September 8 and October 6 don't have that saved copy. When you drop one of them back onto a song or setlist that already has content, Pliris stops and imports nothing, so it can't overwrite your timing, cues or stems by guessing. To keep working, re-export the song or setlist from Pliris and make your Live changes on the new file. If you've already done a lot of work in Live on the older file, contact us and we'll bring your changes across. Sets you built yourself, or exported before September 8, import as usual. ### Why does Pliris say it couldn't load the saved copy of my export? Your set is a recent export, but its saved copy didn't download, usually because the upload didn't finish when you exported. Drop the file again to retry. If you see the message again, re-export the song from Pliris and use the new file. --- # Uploading a Stereo Recording > Upload a single stereo mix (a rehearsal recording or demo) to a song, analyze it for key, tempo, sections, lyrics and chords, and set it as the reference. A stereo mix is one file: it isn't split into stems. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/uploading-a-stereo-recording Don't have stems for a song? You can still upload a stereo recording, like a rehearsal take, a demo or the original mix. Pliris analyzes it and plays it like any other song. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Upload a stereo recording](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/upload-a-stereo-recording)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. > **A stereo mix does not give you stems.** Pliris doesn't split a mixed file into separate instruments. You get one file, plus its analysis. ## Create the song 1. In your band's song list, click **Add song**. 2. Enter a **Title**. **Cover art** is optional. Pliris starts the song with a **Default** arrangement. ![The Add song dialog with a title, optional cover art, and the Default arrangement note.](/help-assets/stereo-recording-01-add-song.png) ## Upload the recording 1. The song opens with the **Upload** panel. Drop your file in, or click **Drop files to add** and choose it. MP3 and WAV both work. ![The Upload panel on a new song.](/help-assets/stereo-recording-02-upload-panel.png) ![Choosing the recording from your computer.](/help-assets/stereo-recording-03-choose-file.png) 2. While it uploads, tick the analysis you want: - **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** (about 20 credits) - **Lyrics and Chords** (about 60 credits) Each option is its own credit charge. Both together is about 80 credits for a typical 4-minute song. See [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). ![The analysis options with credit estimates.](/help-assets/stereo-recording-04-analysis-options.png) 3. When the upload finishes, the file appears in the **Other** group and analysis starts. You can leave the page. ![The uploaded file in the Other group while sections analyze.](/help-assets/stereo-recording-05-landed-in-other.png) ## Set it as the reference 1. **Right-click** the file and choose **Use as reference**. 2. Confirm the prompt. The file moves to the **Reference** group. ![Right-click menu with Use as reference.](/help-assets/stereo-recording-06-use-as-reference.png) ![The file in the Reference group.](/help-assets/stereo-recording-07-reference-group.png) Key, tempo, time signature and sections appear first. Lyrics and chords take a little longer. ![The analyzed song with key, tempo and sections.](/help-assets/stereo-recording-08-analyzed.png) From here you can add the song to a setlist like any other. If you get stems later, upload them to the same song. See [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). ## Frequently asked questions ### Can Pliris turn a stereo mix into stems? No. Uploading a stereo recording gives you that one file and its analysis, not separate stems. ### How do I upload a rehearsal recording to Pliris? Add a song, drop the recording into the Upload panel, tick the analysis you want, then right-click the file and choose **Use as reference**. ### Why is my file in the Other group? A single mixed file isn't sorted into an instrument group. Right-click it and choose **Use as reference** to move it to **Reference**. ### How many credits does analyzing a stereo recording use? About 20 credits for Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections, and about 60 for Lyrics and Chords, about 80 together for a typical 4-minute song. --- # Uploading an Ableton Project Folder > Already programmed the song in Ableton Live? Choose the project folder in the uploader (Chrome), leave analysis unticked, and Pliris reads your stems, sections, tempo and time signature changes. No zip needed. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/uploading-an-ableton-project-folder If a song is already programmed in Ableton Live (stems loaded, locators or section markers, tempo and time signature changes), upload the **project** instead of its stems. Pliris reads your sections, tempo and time signature changes straight from it, so you don't spend analysis credits on work you've already done. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Upload an Ableton Live project](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/upload-an-ableton-live-project)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. The most common mistake is uploading the stems like any raw-stem song and then dropping the .als file on afterward. Nothing breaks, but it costs credits and editing time you don't need. ![A programmed Ableton Live project: stems, locators, and tempo and time signature changes.](/help-assets/ableton-projects-01-ableton-set.png) ## Before you start - Use **Chrome**. Choosing a project folder works differently in Safari. - This is for a single song. Full Ableton sets are imported differently. ## Upload the project folder 1. In your band, click **Add song**, name it, and click **Add song**. ![The Add song dialog.](/help-assets/ableton-projects-02-add-song.png) 2. In the **Upload** panel, click **or choose an Ableton project** (under **Drop files to add**). ![The Upload panel with "or choose an Ableton project".](/help-assets/ableton-projects-03-choose-ableton-project.png) 3. Find the project's folder, select it, and click **Select**. If Chrome asks whether the site can view the folder, click **Allow**. ![Selecting the Ableton project folder.](/help-assets/ableton-projects-04-select-als.png) 4. Leave **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** unticked. Your project already has them. Tick **Lyrics and Chords** only if you want lyrics and chords. 5. Stay on the page until the stems finish uploading. ![Sections, tempo and time signature read from the project, with both analysis options unticked.](/help-assets/ableton-projects-05-sections-detected.png) ## What you get Song sections, tempo and time signature changes come from your Ableton file. Press **Tab** on the song page to see the time signature changes on the timeline. ![The uploaded song with its sections from Ableton.](/help-assets/ableton-projects-06-song-uploaded.png) Without analysis, the key shows *analyze for key*. If you know the key, right-click it, type it in, and click **Save**. ![The Edit Key dialog.](/help-assets/ableton-projects-07-edit-key.png) ## Your click, guide, and Pliris's cues When **Auto-generated click, cues, and slate** is on in **Settings → Song defaults**, Pliris generates a click, cues, and song slates that follow your song's tempo, sections and name. Your uploaded click and guide cue are muted, so the click sounds the same when you download the song and when you upload it again. Leave the setting on. ![Song defaults, with Auto-generated click, cues, and slate turned on.](/help-assets/ableton-projects-08-song-defaults.png) ## If your project is already a .zip You don't need to compress a project. If it's already compressed, drag the .zip onto **Drop files to add**. Pliris pulls the stems and the .als out of it and you get the same result. If you do compress a project, run **File → Collect All and Save** in Ableton first, so every sample is inside the folder. See [Importing a Song from Ableton Live](/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live). ![Dropping a compressed Ableton project onto the uploader.](/help-assets/ableton-projects-09-drop-zip.png) ## Frequently asked questions ### Do I need analysis credits to upload an Ableton project? No. Sections, tempo and time signature changes come from your project, so leave **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** unticked. Tick **Lyrics and Chords** only if you want lyrics and chords. ### Should I upload my stems and then add the .als file? No. Upload the project folder with **or choose an Ableton project**. Uploading stems first spends credits and editing time you don't need. ### Do I have to zip my Ableton project? No. In Chrome, choose the project folder directly. If it's already a .zip, you can drag that onto the uploader instead. ### Why is the key empty after uploading? Pliris doesn't read the key from Ableton. Right-click the key on the song page and type it in. No analysis needed. ### Why is my own click muted? The **Auto-generated click, cues, and slate** song default is on, so Pliris plays its own click and cues. That keeps the click consistent between downloads and uploads. --- # Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems > Drop stems and they upload immediately. Analyze offers two checkboxes — Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections, and Lyrics and Chords — and each selected option is its own credit charge. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems Stems are the heart of it. Drop the individual tracks of your song onto the arrangement and Pliris™ uploads them immediately. Analyze is optional, and it is two checkboxes — not one pass that returns everything. > See also: [Uploading Raw Stems or a Zip of Stems](/docs/uploading-raw-stems-or-a-zip) for the upload itself, step by step, and [Uploading a Stereo Recording](/docs/uploading-a-stereo-recording) if you only have a mix. For which option times lyrics, see [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). For the short version of drop plus right-click editing, see [Drop Files, Analyze When Ready, Right-Click to Edit](/docs/drop-upload-and-right-click-editing). ## Before you upload Two things to know going in: - **Stem uploads work on Free and All-Access.** Free accounts are capped at 15 songs across the account and 10 GB of storage — plenty to learn the workflow — but there's no paywall on uploading stems. - **Use raw, individual stems.** Drums, bass, lead vocal, BGVs, guitars, synths — one file per part. Don't pre-group or pre-mix them. Rename and regroup on the song page after the files land. Stems, click, and cues should already play in time together — including the click — before you drop them: [Preparing Stems Before Upload](/docs/preparing-stems-before-upload). ## Drop your stems — upload starts immediately 1. Open the song. (Adding a song automatically creates its first arrangement, called **Default**.) 2. The **Upload** panel opens on the right. Drag files onto it, or click **Drop files to add** to browse. It accepts MP3, WAV, ZIP and Ableton projects. 3. Drag in all your stems at once — or a zip of stems. 4. Upload **starts on drop**. There is no Confirm / Upload button for ordinary stem batches. 5. **Stay on the page until the upload finishes.** While files transfer, a banner reads **Stems are still uploading. Stay on this page until they finish.** Once the panel shows **Analyzing audio**, you can leave and analysis carries on. The staging panel is **status only** — progress and a check when each file lands. You do **not** pick stem groups in the uploader. Rename and regroup after the files are on the song (see below). **One file only?** Dropping a single non-Ableton audio file (not extracted from a zip) may show a short Stem / Ref / LTC type picker before the file is claimed. Multi-file drops skip that. **Ableton project?** Zip the project and import it — that path keeps Import + Cancel. See [Importing a Song from Ableton Live](/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live). ## The two Analyze options Every Analyze surface — the upload bar, the song-page offer card, and the other Analyze checkboxes in the app — shows two options. The labels are the option names: 1. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** — Key, tempo, time signature, and song sections. This option does **not** show lyrics. 2. **Lyrics and Chords** — Lyrics and chords, shown together after this runs. **Each selected option is its own analysis credit charge. Both together is two runs.** **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is **5 credits per minute** of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5 (about 20 credits for a 4-minute song). **Lyrics and Chords** is **15 credits per minute**, rounded up, minimum 15 (about 60 credits for a 4-minute song). Both on that song is about 80 credits. You'll see the cost before anything is charged. A failed run refunds automatically. Which boxes start checked: - **On upload**, both start **unchecked**. Leaving them unchecked uploads audio without spending analysis credits. Check the ones you want before that upload analyzes. - **On the song-page offer card**, **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** starts checked and **Lyrics and Chords** starts unchecked. - **Empty Key, Tempo, or Time chips** request **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** only. A reference mix is made for free either way, and analysis runs once that mix is ready. Free and All-Access offer the same two options. Manual mode is always available on either plan — type your own BPM, bring sections in from Ableton, and upload stems without spending credits. If you check both and the balance covers the first charge and not the second, the song page says the lyrics run did not start. **Lyrics and Chords** stays available to retry. > **Pro tip:** Check only the option you need. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** alone is one charge at 5 credits per minute, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. Adding **Lyrics and Chords** later is a second charge at 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. ## Name and regroup on the song page After upload, tidy names and groups where you can hear the parts — not in the uploader. 1. Find the stem in the stem list on the arrangement. 2. **Right-click** the stem to rename it or change its group / routing (or edit the name inline). 3. Not sure what it is? Preview with **Shift + Space**, then name it — Guitar, Lead Vocal, BGVs, Synths, Percussion, Drums, whatever it actually is. > **Pro tip:** Tab through stem names when you're batch-renaming. Name, Tab, name, Tab — you'll clear a full song quickly. More detail: [How to Rename and Regroup Stems](/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page). ## Play with it while it analyzes Don't just watch the progress bar. Poke around the arrangement page: - **Press Space** to play the whole song with everything balanced. - **Try Focus mode.** Click the **headphone icon** on any stem — drums, say — and that stem jumps to full volume while everything else drops to about 30%. It's the fastest way to hear one part in context without losing the rest of the mix. - **Mute and solo.** Standard tools. Mute the BGVs and lead together, or solo just the vocals to hear them naked. - **Jump around.** Once sections come in from **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections**, click a section marker on the waveform, or use **Left / Right** for previous / next section. - **Scrub.** Click or drag the waveform to move to any spot. ## When analysis finishes What fills in depends on which box you checked: - **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** fills **key**, **tempo**, **time signature**, and **sections**. Lyrics stay empty. If the song already has an Ableton grid or a click, that grid wins over the tempo or beat map this option detects. - **Lyrics and Chords** fills the **Lyrics** and **Chords** tabs together. It does not replace key, tempo, time signature, or sections. Click any lyric line to fix a word. Fixing or pasting text does not add timing — that timing comes from **Lyrics and Chords**. If the stems have no lead vocal, upload a time-aligned **reference** with vocals first. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). Fix key, tempo, or meter with a **right-click** on the header chips (or **Edit** → chip → **Done** if right-click is not on your build yet) — see [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song) and [Drop Files, Analyze When Ready, Right-Click to Edit](/docs/drop-upload-and-right-click-editing). Add or record **MIDI cues** right on the page — press **C** to drop a cue quickly. See [Programming MIDI Cues](/docs/programming-midi-cues). Analyze gives you a starting point, not a locked-in result. Sections, lyrics, and cues are yours to fine-tune. Editing them by hand does not spend credits. ## Simple vs Pro view The arrangement page has two layouts. **Simple** mode gives you a clean waveform with sections, lyrics, cues, and stems in collapsible panels below. **Pro** mode is a DAW-style view with section lanes on the waveform and inline, draggable MIDI cue markers. Toggle between them with the view switch at the top of the page — use whichever fits what you're doing. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I upload stems on the free plan? Yes. Stem uploads work on Free and All-Access. Free accounts are capped at 15 songs across the account and 10 GB of storage. Uploading without either Analyze option checked does not spend analysis credits. ### Does Analyze give me lyrics? Only if you check **Lyrics and Chords**. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** produces key, tempo, time signature, and song sections. It does not show lyrics. ### Where do chords come from? They show after **Lyrics and Chords**, together with the lyrics, or you type them on the **Chords** tab. ### I ran Analyze and Lyrics is empty. Is that broken? Expected if you only ran **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** — that is the offer card's starting check. Check **Lyrics and Chords**, with a lead vocal in the stems or a time-aligned reference. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ### Do both options cost credits? Yes, if both are selected. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is 5 credits per minute of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** is 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. Both together on a 4-minute song is about 80 credits. One option is a single charge. Free accounts get 240 credits a month; All-Access gets 1,000. ### Are Free and All-Access different for lyrics? Same two options on both plans. Plans differ on credits and caps, not on whether **Lyrics and Chords** is offered. ### Should I upload pre-mixed or grouped stems? No — use raw, individual stems with one file per part. You do not pick groups in the uploader. Rename and regroup on the song page after drop. ### Can I set tempo and sections without spending credits? Yes. Manual mode is available on Free and All-Access — type your own BPM (right-click the Tempo chip, or **Edit** → Tempo → **Done** if needed), add sections from Ableton, and upload stems without spending credits. ## Where to go next - Which option times lyrics, and what AbleSet needs: [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). - Stems already in cloud storage, or a whole folder of songs? See [Importing Stems from Cloud Storage](/docs/importing-stems-from-cloud-storage) and [Bulk Uploading a Folder of Songs](/docs/bulk-uploading-a-folder-of-songs). - Ready to take a programmed arrangement into a session? See [Importing a Song from Ableton Live](/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live) and [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton). - Building a show? Head to [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). Stuck anywhere, click the support bubble in the bottom-right of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # Uploading Raw Stems or a Zip of Stems > Add a song, drop in your stems (WAV, MP3, or a .zip), pick the analysis you want, and stay on the page until it says Analyzing audio. You never need to zip stems first. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/uploading-raw-stems-or-a-zip Raw stems are the simplest way to get a song into Pliris. Add a song, drop in its stems, and choose the analysis you want. You don't need to compress your stems. If you already have them in a .zip, upload that instead and Pliris unpacks it in your browser. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Upload raw stems](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/upload-raw-stems)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## Add a song 1. In your band, click **Add song**. 2. Type a title and click **Add song**. Cover art is optional. Every new song starts with a **Default** arrangement. You can rename it, add more, or upload a reference track later from the song panel. ![The Add song dialog.](/help-assets/raw-stems-01-add-song.png) ## Upload your stems 1. The **Upload** panel opens on the right. Click **Drop files to add**, or drag your files onto it. It accepts **MP3, WAV, ZIP** and **Ableton projects**. 2. Select all of your stems and click **Open**. ![Choosing six stems from Finder.](/help-assets/raw-stems-02-choose-stems.png) Stems land in the song's clip pool automatically. There's no need to confirm anything or set up groups. ## Choose your analysis Two options appear once your files are added: - **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** (about 20 credits): detects key, tempo, time signature and song sections. - **Lyrics and Chords** (about 60 credits): adds lyrics and chords. Each selected option is its own credit charge, so both together is two runs. If you don't need lyrics and chords, leave that box unticked. For stems, it's worth ticking at least the first option. A reference mix is made for free either way, and analysis runs once that mix is ready. See [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). ![The two analysis options, with credit costs and your remaining balance.](/help-assets/raw-stems-03-analysis-options.png) ## Stay on the page until the upload finishes While files transfer, a banner reads **Stems are still uploading. Stay on this page until they finish.** Once the panel shows **Analyzing audio**, the upload is done. You can leave the page and analysis carries on. ![The upload panel showing Analyzing audio.](/help-assets/raw-stems-04-analyzing-audio.png) ## Uploading a .zip of stems If your stems are already compressed, upload the .zip the same way: drag it onto the uploader or choose it with **Drop files to add**. It must be a .zip file, not a folder. ![A .zip of stems selected in Finder.](/help-assets/raw-stems-05-zip-file.png) Pliris unpacks the .zip in your browser, shows you the files (for example, *Extracted 6 audio files from ZIP*), and offers the same analysis options. ![Stems extracted from the zip in the Upload panel.](/help-assets/raw-stems-06-zip-extracted.png) When it's done, the stems load into the song's groups, and key, tempo and sections appear when analysis finishes. ![The finished song with its stems loaded.](/help-assets/raw-stems-07-song-loaded.png) For renaming, regrouping and everything that happens after analysis, see [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). ## Frequently asked questions ### Do I need to zip my stems before uploading? No. Upload the individual files. Zipping them first is an extra step with no benefit. If they're already in a .zip, you can upload that as is. ### Can I upload a folder of stems? Not as a folder. Select the files inside it, or compress the folder into a .zip and upload that. ### Can I leave the page while stems upload? Not until the upload finishes. When the panel shows **Analyzing audio**, you're free to navigate away. ### How many credits does analysis cost? About 20 credits for Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections, and about 60 for Lyrics and Chords. Each option you tick is charged separately. ### Should I skip Lyrics and Chords? If you don't need lyrics or chords, yes. It's the more expensive option. --- # How to Use the Song Arrangement Page > The arrangement page is where you rehearse and build a song — stems, sections, tempo, count-in, MIDI cues, lyrics, and playback all live here. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/using-the-song-arrangement-page The arrangement page is the home base for a song in Pliris™. Open a song from your band's **Songs** library (or from a setlist), and you land here — the player, the stems, the structure, and every edit tool for that version of the song. ![The arrangement page with sections on the timeline, stem groups, and the MIDI cues panel.](/help-assets/snapshot-history-arrangement.png) ## What you're looking at From top to bottom: 1. **Song header** — artwork, song and arrangement name, and the band. 2. **Metadata chips** — **Key**, **Tempo**, **Time**, **LTC**, and **Length**. **Right-click** Key / Tempo / Time to edit (left-click often copies). LTC and Length still use **Edit** when that control is present — see [How to Edit Songs in Pliris](/docs/editing-songs-in-pliris). 3. **Header actions** — **Edit** (when shown — LTC/Length and pre-rollout builds), **Setlist**, **Download**, **Upload** (drop zone also lives on the page). 4. **Secondary controls** — **Count-in**, plus tools like **Align stems** when they apply. 5. **Player** — toggle **Simple** / **Pro**, the section lane, and the waveform. 6. **Stem groups** — Reference, Click, drums, bass, guitars, and the rest. Expand a group to use the mute (**M**), solo (**S**), or Focus **buttons** on a stem. **Shift-click** a group's arrow to open every group at once. **Right-click** a stem to **Rename stem**, **Use as reference** or **Move to group**. 7. **Bottom panels** — **MIDI cues**, **Lyrics**, **Chords**, and **Notes**. 8. **Transport** — play / pause, scrub, prev / next, master volume. If you opened the song from a setlist, the [setlist navigation panel](/docs/the-setlist-navigation-panel) can sit alongside so you can jump songs without leaving the page. ## Simple vs Pro - **Simple** — clean waveform with collapsible panels below. Best for rehearsal and day-to-day edits. - **Pro** — DAW-style layout with **Measures**, **Meter**, **Tempo** and **Song** lanes above the waveform, and diamond MIDI cue markers you can drag. Best for cue programming, fine timing and fixing the grid. Toggle them with the **Simple** / **Pro** control above the player, or press **Tab**. ## Getting around the song - **Space** — play / pause (when focus isn't in a text field). - **Click a section** on the lane to jump there, or use **Left / Right** for previous / next section. - Scrub the waveform or the transport bar to move freely. - Expand stem groups to hear parts in isolation (solo / Focus buttons) or cut them (mute). Playback and setlist shortcuts: [Keyboard Shortcuts](/docs/keyboard-shortcuts). ## The main jobs on this page | Job | Where | | --- | --- | | Upload or replace stems | Drop files (upload starts immediately) → [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems) | | Set key, tempo, time | **Right-click** the chip → [Changing a Song's Key](/docs/changing-a-songs-key), [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song), [Fixing a Wrong Time Signature](/docs/fixing-a-wrong-time-signature) | | Set LTC / length | **Edit** (when shown) → click the chip → [How to Edit Songs in Pliris](/docs/editing-songs-in-pliris) | | Rename / regroup stems | **Right-click** a stem → [Moving and Renaming Stems on the Song Page](/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page) | | Rename sections | **Right-click** a section on the timeline → **Rename** | | Count-in | **Count-in** control under the header → [Changing Count-In](/docs/changing-count-in) | | MIDI cues | **MIDI cues** panel (or press **C**) → [Programming MIDI Cues](/docs/programming-midi-cues) | | Push Ableton edits | Drop an `.als` on the page → [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton) | | Undo a change | **History** in the player toolbar → [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history) | > **Pro tip:** Drop files, optionally Analyze, then right-click to fix anything that landed wrong — see [Drop Files, Analyze When Ready, Right-Click to Edit](/docs/drop-upload-and-right-click-editing). Arrangement edits and Ableton drops are captured in Snapshot History so you can roll back. ## Frequently asked questions ### Where do I open the arrangement page? From your band, open **Songs** and click a song (or open a song from a setlist). Pliris opens that song's arrangement — the page with the waveform, stem groups, and metadata chips. ### What's the difference between Simple and Pro on the arrangement page? **Simple** is a clean waveform with panels below for cues, lyrics, chords, and notes. **Pro** adds a DAW-style layout with section lanes and draggable MIDI cue markers on the waveform — use it when you're programming or nudging cues. Lyrics and Chords populate after **Lyrics and Chords**, not after **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** alone. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ### Can I rehearse from the arrangement page without exporting to Ableton? Yes. Play the arrangement in the browser, mute and solo stems, click sections (or use Left / Right) to jump around, and use count-in and MIDI cues the same way you would on stage. Export is optional when you want a Live set back. ### Why don't I see a History button? History needs **manage** access on the band (or band admin). View-only or download-only members won't see it. ## Where to go next - Playback and setlist shortcuts → [Keyboard Shortcuts](/docs/keyboard-shortcuts). - How songs and arrangements nest → [Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists](/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists). - Tell Pliris the right BPM → [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song). - Bring Ableton changes back → [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # How to Edit Songs in Pliris > Rename a song, change cover art, and right-click on an arrangement to update key, tempo, sections, stems, and more — without touching the audio file itself unless you mean to. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/editing-songs-in-pliris In Pliris™, a **song** is the name and identity in your library. An **arrangement** is the version you actually play — stems, tempo, sections, cues. Most day-to-day edits happen on the arrangement page (see [Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists](/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists)); a few live on the song in the library. > Prefer **right-click** for Key/Tempo/Time, stems, and sections ([overview](/docs/drop-upload-and-right-click-editing)). **Edit** still covers LTC/Length (and any field without a right-click menu yet). ## Song-level edits (library) In the band's **Songs** list, open the song's row menu (⋯) for: - **Rename song…** — changes the title everywhere that song appears. - **Edit cover art** — upload or change artwork. - **Add arrangement** — a second version (live cut, acoustic, festival edit). Paid plans allow more than one arrangement per song. - **Add to setlist…** / **Delete song** — as needed. - **Move to another band…** / **Duplicate to another band…** — send the song to another band on this account, or leave a separate copy there. See [Move or Duplicate a Song to Another Band](/docs/move-or-duplicate-a-song-to-another-band). Renaming the song does **not** rename the arrangement. The arrangement keeps its own name (often **Default** until you change it). ## Arrangement edits — right-click 1. Open the song's arrangement. 2. Change what you need: - **Right-click** **Key**, **Tempo**, or **Time** (meter) chips to edit them. See [Changing a Song's Key](/docs/changing-a-songs-key). A time signature change partway through the song is fixed in Pro mode: [Fixing a Wrong Time Signature](/docs/fixing-a-wrong-time-signature). - **LTC** / **Length** — use **Edit** when that control is still present (right-click rollout covers Key/Tempo/Time first). - **Right-click** a stem to rename it or move it to another group ([how](/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page)). - **Right-click** a section to rename it or map its Ableton template cue. 3. Keep working — changes save into [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). If you used **Edit**, click **Done** when finished. ![Arrangement header with Key, Tempo, and other metadata chips — right-click a chip to change it.](/help-assets/snapshot-history-arrangement.png) ## What these edits are (and aren't) | You can change | What it means | | --- | --- | | **Tempo** | Metadata for click, grid, count-in, and export — **not** time-stretching the stems | | **Key / time signature / LTC / length** | Arrangement metadata used in the player and exports. The key doesn't transpose your stems, and it's stored per arrangement | | **Section names** | Labels on the timeline and in Ableton exports → [Renaming Song Sections](/docs/renaming-song-sections) | | **Stem names / groups** | How tracks are organized in the mixer | To replace audio, drop files on the arrangement or [replace stems](/docs/replacing-stems-and-re-analyzing). To pull structure from Ableton, [drop an `.als`](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). > **Temporary workaround:** After deleting a **tempo** or **time signature** change on the song page, **refresh before pressing Play** — otherwise the player can keep the old map until a hard refresh. ## Always available (no special edit mode) These don't need a header Edit toggle: - **Count-in** — the segmented control under the header (**Global** / **Off** / **1 bar** / **2 bars**). - **MIDI cues** — the **MIDI cues** panel → [Changing Cues in Pliris](/docs/changing-cues-in-pliris). - **Lyrics, chords, notes** — bottom tabs; edits save into history as their own versions. Those tabs fill from **Lyrics and Chords** (or from what you type). **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not show lyrics. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). - **Mute / solo / Focus** — rehearsal controls; they don't rewrite arrangement structure the way metadata edits do. > **Pro tip:** Need manage access on the band to edit. If you only see playback and Download, ask a band admin to raise your permissions. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I rename a song in Pliris? In the band's **Songs** list, open the song's ⋯ menu and choose **Rename song…**. That changes the song title in the library and on setlists; the arrangement name is separate. ### What's the difference between editing a song and editing an arrangement? The **song** is the library identity (title, cover art). The **arrangement** is the playable version (stems, tempo, sections, cues). Most musical edits happen on the arrangement via right-click (or Edit, if your build still shows it). ### Do my edits save automatically? Yes. Arrangement edits land in Snapshot History. Lyrics, chords, notes, MIDI cues, count-in, and Ableton drops save as their own versions when you change them. ### Can bandmates undo my edits? Anyone with manage access can open **History** and restore an earlier snapshot. Restoring creates a new version on top, so the restore itself is undoable. ## Where to go next - Tour the page → [How to Use the Song Arrangement Page](/docs/using-the-song-arrangement-page). - Fix a wrong key → [Changing a Song's Key](/docs/changing-a-songs-key). - Fix a wrong time signature → [Fixing a Wrong Time Signature](/docs/fixing-a-wrong-time-signature). - Move or rename stems → [Moving and Renaming Stems on the Song Page](/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page). - New uploader + right-click overview → [Drop Files, Analyze When Ready, Right-Click to Edit](/docs/drop-upload-and-right-click-editing). - Structure from Ableton → [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). - Send a song to another band → [Move or Duplicate a Song to Another Band](/docs/move-or-duplicate-a-song-to-another-band). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Move or Duplicate a Song to Another Band > Send a song to another band on the same account, or make a separate copy there, each with its own files. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/move-or-duplicate-a-song-to-another-band A song belongs to one band. When another band on the same account needs it, move the song over, or duplicate it so each band has its own copy. Both give the destination band its own stem files. Editing one band after that does not change the other. A setlist still belongs to one band. You cannot build a setlist out of songs that live on different bands. Duplicate the song onto the band that owns the setlist, then add that copy. ## What you need - Both bands are on the **same account**. The band list will not offer a band on someone else's account. - You can **edit songs** on the band the song is leaving and on the band it is going to. Account admins can. If **Move to another band…** and **Duplicate to another band…** are not in the song menu, ask an admin to give you edit access on each band. ## Move a song Moving takes the song off this band and puts it on the other one. 1. Open the band that has the song now. 2. On the song's row, open the **⋯** menu. 3. Choose **Move to another band…**. 4. Pick the destination band. 5. Click **Move song**. The song leaves this band. Its stem files are copied, so later edits over there stay over there. It comes off this band's setlists. Share links that pointed at the song stop working. Add it to a setlist on the destination band when you want it in a show. A move does not count as a new song. ## Duplicate a song Duplicating leaves the original where it is and gives the other band a separate copy. 1. Open the band that has the song now. 2. On the song's row, open the **⋯** menu. 3. Choose **Duplicate to another band…**. 4. Pick the destination band. 5. Click **Duplicate song**. The other band gets its own copy, with its own stem files. This song stays here. The copy starts off every setlist. Add it to a setlist on the destination band yourself. A duplicate counts as another song, so your plan's song limit and storage limit still apply. If you are at the cap, Pliris tells you instead of creating the copy. ## What each band gets | | Move | Duplicate | | --- | --- | --- | | Original song | Leaves this band | Stays on this band | | Stem files, reference mix, charts, and the Ableton project | Copied onto the destination | Copied onto the destination | | Setlists | Removed from this band's setlists | Copy is not on a setlist yet | | Song limit | Unchanged | Counts as a new song | The copy starts with the same cover art. Replacing the cover later uploads a new image for that song only. Pitch and time-stretch versions are not copied. Render those again on the destination band if you use them. Snapshot history stays with a song you move. A duplicate starts without that history. ## LTC The old LTC audio is cleared, because that file still starts at the previous time. Generate the LTC audio again if you send timecode to the room. See [Sending LTC / SMPTE Timecode](/docs/sending-ltc-smpte-timecode). ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I move a song to another band in Pliris? Open the band that has the song, open the song's **⋯** menu, and choose **Move to another band…**. Pick a band on the same account and click **Move song**. The song leaves this band, comes off this band's setlists, and shows up on the other band. ### What is the difference between moving a song and duplicating it? **Move** takes the song off this band. **Duplicate** leaves it here and adds a separate copy on the other band. In both cases the destination gets its own stem files, and edits on one band do not change the other. ### Can I copy a song to a band on a different account? No. Move and duplicate only list bands on the same account. ### Will editing the copy change the original band? No. Stems and the other song files are copied. A change on the destination band writes to those copies. ### Can one setlist use songs from two bands? No. A setlist belongs to one band. Duplicate the song onto that band, then add the copy to the setlist. ## Where to go next - How songs, bands, and setlists fit together → [Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists](/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists). - Put the copy in a show → [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). - Timecode audio → [Sending LTC / SMPTE Timecode](/docs/sending-ltc-smpte-timecode). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Setting the Tempo of a Song > Tell Pliris what tempo the song is — for click, count-in, the grid, and Ableton export. This does not speed up or slow down your stems. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song When you change **Tempo** on an arrangement, you are **not** changing how fast the audio plays. You are telling Pliris™ **what tempo the song is** — so the click, count-in, beat grid, section math, and Ableton export all line up with the music you already uploaded. Stems keep playing at their recorded speed; Pliris does not time-stretch them when you type a new BPM. ## How to set the tempo 1. Open the song's [arrangement page](/docs/using-the-song-arrangement-page). 2. **Right-click** the **Tempo** in the header. The **Edit Tempo** dialog opens. 3. Type the correct BPM and click **Save**. If analysis landed at half or double time, click **÷2** or **×2** instead. The same **÷2** and **×2** buttons also sit next to the tempo in the header. Left-click often **copies** the value — it does not edit it. ![Tempo shown in the arrangement header metadata (e.g. 126 BPM). Right-click to change it.](/help-assets/snapshot-history-arrangement.png) ## Why this matters Pliris uses the arrangement tempo for: - **Click** timing and feel against the grid - **[Count-in](/docs/changing-count-in)** length in real time (bars × tempo) - Jumping and labeling **sections** on the timeline - **Ableton export** — the Live set's tempo (and tempo map, when you have one) If the BPM is wrong, the click and count-in feel early or late even though the stems sound fine. Fix the tempo metadata; don't re-upload audio just to "change the speed." ## Other ways tempo gets set | Source | What happens | | --- | --- | | **Analyze** | Analysis fills tempo (and often a tempo map) from the audio — costs credits | | **Manual entry** | You type BPM via right-click on the Tempo chip — free, no credits | | **Ableton `.als` update** | Dropping a set can update tempo / tempo automation; stems stay put → [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton) | | **Variable tempo** | If the arrangement has a multi-point tempo map, use the **Variable tempo** control to pick which map export and the player should follow | > **Pro tip:** Warped Ableton projects sometimes show a tempo *range* even when the song is basically one BPM. Prefer the project's Manual/base tempo as the authority, then set that value in Pliris if the chip looks off. An Ableton grid or a click already on the song wins over a Music.ai-detected tempo or beat map. ## Frequently asked questions ### Does changing tempo in Pliris speed up or slow down my stems? No. Editing **Tempo** only updates arrangement metadata (click, count-in, grid, export). Your stem audio keeps playing at its original speed — Pliris is not time-stretching the files. ### Why does the click feel wrong even though the song sounds right? The stems are fine; the **Tempo** (or tempo map) Pliris is using doesn't match the music. **Right-click** **Tempo**, set the correct BPM (or use **÷2** / **×2**), then try count-in and click again. ### Do I spend analysis credits to type a BPM? No. Typing the tempo by hand is free. Credits apply when you run **Analyze** on audio, not when you set metadata by hand. ### I deleted a tempo or time-signature change — why does Play still sound like the old map? If you removed a **tempo point** or **time signature** change (Pro-mode grid, or wherever that delete lives on the song page), **refresh before pressing Play**. Until a fix ships, the player can keep the old map until a hard refresh. See [Editing the Grid](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid). ### Can Ableton overwrite the tempo I set? Yes — if you drop an updated `.als` and confirm **Update arrangement**, Pliris can adopt the tempo (and tempo automation) from that file. Review the summary in the dialog before confirming, and use [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history) if you need to roll back. ## Where to go next - Count-in depends on this BPM → [Changing Count-In](/docs/changing-count-in). - Full arrangement tour → [How to Use the Song Arrangement Page](/docs/using-the-song-arrangement-page). - Key and time signature work the same way → [Changing a Song's Key](/docs/changing-a-songs-key) and [Fixing a Wrong Time Signature](/docs/fixing-a-wrong-time-signature). - Structure + tempo from Ableton → [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # How to Rename Song Sections > Right-click a section on the arrangement timeline to rename it — the label updates on the player and in Ableton exports. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/renaming-song-sections Sections are the colored labels on the arrangement timeline — **Intro**, **Verse**, **Chorus**, and the rest. Renaming them changes how the song is labeled in Pliris™ and what goes out in Ableton exports. ![Section labels (VERSE, CHORUS, …) on the arrangement timeline.](/help-assets/snapshot-history-arrangement.png) ## Rename a section in Pliris 1. Open the song's arrangement page (see [Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists](/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists)). 2. Find the section on the timeline (Simple or Pro view). 3. **Right-click** the section and choose **Rename** (or double-click the section label). 4. Type the new name and press **Enter** — it saves immediately. There is no Edit mode and no separate Save/Done step. Section renames land in [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). ## Rename via Ableton instead Already renaming locators in Live? You don't have to retype them in Pliris. 1. Save the set in Ableton. 2. Drop the `.als` on the arrangement page. 3. Review the section renames in the summary (before → after). 4. Click **Update arrangement**. Details: [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). ## Section name vs Ableton template cue The same right-click menu often includes **Edit cue** — that's separate from the display name. - **Rename** — what you see on the timeline (and as the section label in exports). - **Edit cue** — which Ableton *template cue* that section maps to (for example, an "All-in" cue on a Chorus). You can use the section name, pick another cue, or choose **No cue for this section**. For per-user MIDI events that fire gear mid-song, see [Changing Cues in Pliris](/docs/changing-cues-in-pliris) — those live in the **MIDI cues** panel, not on the section label. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I rename a verse or chorus in Pliris? Open the arrangement, **right-click** the section on the timeline, choose **Rename**, type the new label, and press **Enter**. The timeline and Ableton exports pick up the new name. ### Does renaming a section change my audio? No. Section names are labels on the timeline. Stems, timing, and length stay the same unless you also move clips in Ableton and re-import, or replace audio in Pliris. ### Can I rename sections in Ableton and bring them into Pliris? Yes. Rename locators in Live, drop the `.als` on the arrangement, review the before/after names, and click **Update arrangement**. Your stems stay put. ### Why is there both Rename and Edit cue? **Rename** changes the label you see. **Edit cue** maps that section to an Ableton template cue for export (which can differ from the label). MIDI cues for external gear are a third thing — they live under the **MIDI cues** tab. ## Where to go next - Arrangement overview → [Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists](/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists). - MIDI and section cues → [Changing Cues in Pliris](/docs/changing-cues-in-pliris). - Undo a bad rename → [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # How to Change Cues in Pliris > Edit MIDI cues that fire external gear, record them live, drag them in Pro view, and map section cues for Ableton templates — all from the arrangement page. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/changing-cues-in-pliris "Cues" in Pliris™ means two related things on the arrangement page (see [Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists](/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists)): 1. **MIDI cues** — timed MIDI events (notes, CCs, program changes) that fire your gear during playback. 2. **Section cues** — which Ableton template cue a timeline section maps to on export. This page covers both. For a deeper hardware walkthrough (WebMIDI, recording, troubleshooting), see [Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear](/docs/programming-midi-cues). ![MIDI cues panel at the bottom of the arrangement page, with Record and Add output.](/help-assets/snapshot-history-arrangement.png) ## Change MIDI cues 1. Open the arrangement. 2. Open the **MIDI cues** tab in the bottom panels (or press **C** to drop a cue quickly). 3. If you don't have an output yet, click **Add output** and pick a WebMIDI destination (allow browser MIDI permission when asked — Chrome or Edge recommended). 4. Click **Add Cue** (or compose from the panel): set **timecode**, **channel** (1–16), and **command** (Note On, CC, or Program Change). 5. To capture live: arm **Record**, choose input and output, play the arrangement, and perform on your controller — Pliris stamps each message at the timecode it landed. 6. To nudge timing: switch to **Pro** view and **drag** the diamond cue markers on the waveform. 7. Use **Delete cue** on events you own and no longer need. MIDI cues are **per user**. Everyone on the band can see every cue; you can only edit your own — unless you're a **band admin**, who can edit or delete anyone's cues. ## Change a section's Ableton cue 1. **Right-click** a section on the timeline. 2. Choose **Edit cue**. 3. Pick a template cue, **Use section name**, or **No cue for this section** — it saves as you choose. There is no Edit mode and no separate Done step. That's export mapping — it does not send MIDI to gear by itself. Rename the visible label with **Rename** instead → [Renaming Song Sections](/docs/renaming-song-sections). ## Quick checks when a MIDI cue doesn't fire - Interface plugged in **before** you opened the page - Browser allowed MIDI - Cue assigned to the correct **output** - You're testing in a WebMIDI-capable browser (Chrome / Edge) ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I edit MIDI cues on a song in Pliris? Open the arrangement → **MIDI cues** tab → add or select a cue, change timecode / channel / command, or drag markers in **Pro** view. Press **C** for a fast new cue. Full detail: [Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear](/docs/programming-midi-cues). ### Can I change someone else's cues? You can see every bandmate's MIDI cues, but you can only edit or delete your own — unless you're a **band admin**, who can edit or delete anyone's cues. More detail: [Who Can Edit MIDI Cues](/docs/who-can-edit-midi-cues). ### What's the difference between Edit cue on a section and the MIDI cues panel? **Edit cue** on a section maps that section to an Ableton template cue for export. The **MIDI cues** panel is for timed MIDI messages that fire external gear during playback. ### Do Ableton updates overwrite my MIDI cues? Dropping an `.als` primarily updates structure, tempo, mix, and clip alignment. Review the import summary before confirming — and keep [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history) handy if anything looks off. See [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). ## Where to go next - Hardware-focused cue guide → [Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear](/docs/programming-midi-cues). - LTC instead of MIDI → [Sending LTC / SMPTE Timecode to External Gear](/docs/sending-ltc-smpte-timecode). - Arrangement tour → [Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists](/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists). Cues not firing after you've checked the output? Click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # How to Change Count-In > Set how many bars of click roll in before the downbeat — per arrangement, or inherit the band's global Count-in length. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/changing-count-in Count-in is how much **click** Pliris™ plays before the song's downbeat — so the band can breathe in together. You set it in **bars** (Off, 1 bar, or 2 bars), not as a free-form beat spinner. How long those bars last in real time comes from the arrangement's [tempo](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song) and time signature. Fix the BPM if the count-in feels rushed or sluggish; don't expect Count-in alone to change the song's speed. ## Change count-in on one arrangement 1. Open the song's [arrangement page](/docs/using-the-song-arrangement-page). 2. Find the **Count-in** control under the song header (next to tools like Align stems). 3. Pick one: | Control | Meaning | | --- | --- | | **Global (Off / 1 bar / 2 bars)** | Inherit this band's default Count-in length | | **Off** | Force no count-in on this arrangement — song starts at bar 1 | | **1 bar** | Force one bar of click before the downbeat | | **2 bars** | Force two bars of click before the downbeat | You should see a **Count-in updated** confirmation. This does **not** require the **Edit** button. ## Change the band default For a default that new songs (and any arrangement still on **Global**) pick up: 1. Open the band's settings. 2. Find **Count-in length** — *how much click rolls in before each song's downbeat*. 3. Choose **Off**, **1 bar** (common default), or **2 bars**. Arrangements that already force **Off / 1 bar / 2 bars** keep their override until you switch them back to **Global**. ## Good to know - Count-in is click lead-in — it does not add silence into your stem files. - Wrong feel? Check **Tempo** first ([Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song)). - Ableton updates can change click length / structure from the set; your Count-in preference still lives in Pliris. See [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I turn off count-in for one song? On that arrangement, set **Count-in** to **Off**. That forces zero bars even if the band's global setting is 1 or 2 bars. ### What's the difference between Global and 1 bar? **Global** follows the band's **Count-in length** setting (whatever Off / 1 / 2 is there now). **1 bar** locks this arrangement to one bar even if the band default changes later. ### Why does count-in feel too short or too long? Count-in is measured in **bars**, so real-world duration depends on BPM and time signature. If the click lead-in feels wrong but the stems sound right, fix the arrangement [tempo](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song). ### Do I need Edit mode to change count-in? No. Use the **Count-in** control under the header anytime you have edit access — no need to click **Edit** / **Done**. ## Where to go next - Arrangement overview → [How to Use the Song Arrangement Page](/docs/using-the-song-arrangement-page). - Tempo metadata → [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song). - Click and cues for gear → [Programming MIDI Cues](/docs/programming-midi-cues). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Editing the Grid — Tempo, Meter and Sections > Pro mode adds a Measures, Meter and Tempo grid above the waveform. Right-click a bar to change its time signature, drag a tempo point, and right-click a section to rename, split, merge, loop or delete it. These edits change the GRID — the bar lines, meter and click — and never the audio: your stems are not time-stretched, re-rendered or sped up. ⌘Z (Ctrl+Z on Windows) undoes the last edit; History keeps version snapshots on save / leave edit / .als update. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid Every song in Pliris™ has a **grid** — the bar lines the click follows, the meter it counts in, and the tempo it runs at. Analyze works that grid out from your audio when you upload, and most of the time it gets it right. When it doesn't, you can now fix it yourself. **Pro mode** puts the grid on screen as three editable lanes above the waveform. The section strip is editable in either mode — right-click a section to rename, split, merge, loop or delete it without leaving Simple. No round trip through Ableton. > **Where this changed.** Previously, section structure and the tempo map could only be changed in your Live Set and re-imported. Renaming was the only edit available in the app. That's no longer true — everything on this page happens in Pliris. ## Read this first: you are editing the grid, not the song **Nothing on this page changes how your song sounds.** Not the tempo it plays at, not its key, not its length, not one sample of your stems. The grid is Pliris's *description* of the music you uploaded — where the bar lines are, what the meter is, what the tempo is doing. Analyze writes that description automatically. When you edit it, you are correcting the description so it matches the recording. The recording never moves. | You change | What actually happens | What does **not** happen | | --- | --- | --- | | A time signature | Bar lines regroup; the click counts differently | No audio is touched | | A tempo point | The click, count-in and export follow the new value | **Your stems are not time-stretched or sped up** | | A section boundary | The section label covers a different span | The audio underneath stays exactly where it was | The clearest way to think about it: if the click is fighting the music, the click is wrong, not the music. You are fixing the click. So a tempo edit is you saying *"this song is 102 BPM"* — not *"play this song at 102 BPM."* If you type a tempo the song isn't actually at, the audio keeps playing at its recorded speed and the click drifts away from it. That is the symptom of a wrong grid, and the fix is to correct the grid, not to nudge it further. Nothing here re-analyzes anything, and **no credits are spent**. ## Turning on Pro mode Open a song's arrangement page and click **Pro** next to **Simple**, above the timeline. You can also press **Tab**. ![The arrangement page in Pro mode, showing the Measures, Meter, Tempo and Song lanes above the waveform.](/help-assets/grid-pro-mode.png) Four lanes appear: | Lane | What it shows | | --- | --- | | **Measures** | Bar numbers — the ruler everything else lines up against | | **Meter** | The time signature in force, as blocks that start where it changes | | **Tempo** | The tempo curve, with a point at each change | | **Song** | Your sections — Intro, Verse, Chorus and the rest | **Simple** hides all of this and goes back to the plain waveform. Your edits are saved either way; the mode only changes what you see. ## Zooming The grid starts at **1×**, showing the whole song. Use **+** and **−** beside the zoom readout, or press **=** and **-** on the keyboard. Zoom matters for more than reading labels: - Below **2×**, only every fourth bar line is drawn brightly — enough to orient, not enough to clutter - At **2×** and above, every bar line is drawn - At **8×**, beat lines appear between the bars At **1×** a short bar can be too narrow to show its own label, so it draws as a solid marker instead. Zoom in and the label appears. Clicking the timeline in Pro mode **snaps the playhead to the nearest bar**, so you land on the downbeat you aimed at. In Simple mode clicking seeks to the exact spot you clicked, which is what you want when you're just listening. ## Changing a time signature Right-click anywhere in the **Meter** lane at the bar you want to change. ![The Meter lane with the time signature menu open, offering 4/4, 3/4, 2/4, 6/8 and 12/8.](/help-assets/grid-meter-menu.png) Pick **4/4**, **3/4**, **2/4**, **6/8** or **12/8**. The new meter applies from that bar until the next change. A confirmation appears with an **Undo** link. The **Time** field in the header lists every meter in the song (for example **4/4 · 6/4**). A small **!** next to it means the song has a time signature change, so it's worth checking. Walkthrough: [Fixing a Wrong Time Signature](/docs/fixing-a-wrong-time-signature). **Remove this change** deletes a meter change you've added, and the previous meter carries on through that bar. > **Temporary workaround:** After you **delete** a tempo point or a time-signature change on the song page, **refresh the page before pressing Play**. Otherwise the player can keep the old map until a hard refresh. ### Adding a bar of a different length This is the common one: the song drops or adds a couple of beats going into a chorus, and Analyze has bundled them into one long bar. Say Analyze gave you a single **6/4** bar where the music is really a bar of 4/4 followed by a bar of 2/4. Both are six beats, so the audio lines up either way — but the count is wrong, and your players hear it. Fix it in two steps: 1. Right-click the 6/4 block and choose **4/4** 2. Right-click the **next** bar and choose **2/4** Between those two steps the song is two beats short and the following sections will look shifted. That's expected — finish the second step and everything lands again. The rule to keep in mind: **the beats have to add up.** If you shorten a bar without putting those beats back somewhere, everything after it moves earlier. ### The lock Each of the Meter and Tempo lanes has a small padlock. Click it to lock that lane and its blocks stop responding to edits. Useful when you're working in the tempo lane and don't want to nudge a meter change by accident. ## Changing tempo The **Tempo** lane draws the song's tempo as a line, with a point wherever the tempo changes. ![The Tempo lane with a breakpoint selected, showing its BPM readout.](/help-assets/grid-tempo-lane.png) - **Drag a point up or down** to retune from that bar onward - **Hold Shift while dragging** to fine-tune in smaller steps - **Drag left or right** to move the change to a different bar — it snaps to bar lines - **Right-click a point** for **Halve (÷2)**, **Double (×2)** or **Remove this change**. After a remove, **refresh before Play** (same temporary workaround as deleting a meter change above) - **Right-click empty space** in the lane to add a change at that bar The BPM readout beside each point shows the tempo there. Detected tempos are often not round numbers — a song Analyze measured at 101.9894 BPM displays as **102**. Pliris keeps the precise value internally so playback stays accurate; the label is rounded so it reads like the header. **Changing the tempo here does not change the speed of your song.** Your stems are not time-stretched, re-rendered or altered in any way — they keep playing exactly as recorded. You are telling Pliris what tempo the song already *is*, so the click, count-in and Ableton export line up with it. If a song is recorded at 102 BPM and you set the grid to 120, the audio still plays at 102 and the click marches away from it. The number is a description, not a control. See [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song) for the difference between the header tempo and the tempo map. ## Editing sections Right-click any section in the **Song** lane. These edits work in **Simple** as well as Pro — right-click the section strip either way. ![The section right-click menu: Rename, Split here, Edit cue, Loop section, Merge with previous, Merge with next, Delete section.](/help-assets/grid-section-menu.png) | Action | What it does | | --- | --- | | **Rename** | Rename the section inline. **Double-clicking** the section does the same thing | | **Split here** | Splits the section in two **at the playhead**. Greyed out unless the playhead is inside it | | **Edit cue** | Choose which template cue this section fires | | **Loop section** | Marks this section to loop during playback (persisted and exported). Right-click again for **Stop looping**. **L** alone is a temporary transport loop while listening — it does not mark the section | | **Merge with previous** | Joins this section to the one before it | | **Merge with next** | Joins this section to the one after it | | **Delete section** | Removes the section. The neighbouring section takes over its span | ### Resizing a section This one needs **Pro mode** — the seam is part of the grid, so it is only draggable with the Pro lanes on. Drag the **boundary between two sections** left or right. The seam snaps to the beat grid, and as you drag you'll hear a tick each time you cross a beat, accented on the downbeat — so you can feel where you're landing without watching the numbers. Because it's a boundary, moving it changes two sections at once: one gets longer, the other shorter. Section starts always stay in order. ### What "Loop section" exports to your device Marking a section as a loop is not only a playback convenience — it travels into your Ableton export, and what it becomes depends on which device integration you have switched on in **Settings → Exports**. | Integration | What a looped section becomes | | --- | --- | | **AbleSet** | ` +LOOP` appended to that section's locator name — AbleSet reads locator *names*, so the suffix is the instruction | | **LIOBOX** | A `loop N` action locator at the section start | | **Setlist** (the device) | A `loop N` action locator, same as LIOBOX | | **Conductor / TAZ** | No loop marker — those integrations do not have the concept | | **No integration enabled** | The flag is stored on the section and used for playback in Pliris, and nothing extra is written to the export | So a section you loop in Pliris will loop on stage *if* the device you run is one that understands it, and *if* that integration is enabled for the export. If you mark a loop and your set doesn't loop, the integration toggle is the first thing to check. The loop flag is stored on the section itself, so it survives renames, resizes and re-exports. It is not a temporary transport loop — for that, use **L** while listening without marking the section. ## Undo, and History **⌘Z** (Ctrl+Z on Windows) undoes the last edit in this session. It works for renames, splits, merges, deletes, loop toggles and seam drags. **History** (above the timeline) is Snapshot History — version snapshots when you save arrangement edits, leave edit mode, or drop an updated `.als`. It is not a row for every click. Use it to restore an earlier version after a reload or from another machine; restoring writes a new snapshot so the restore itself is undoable. Full detail: [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). ## What your edits actually change This is worth understanding, because it explains why some edits ripple. A grid edit rewrites the song's **tempo map** and **time signature map** — the same data Analyze produced and the same data your Ableton export reads. It also relabels the **beat grid**, which is what decides where the downbeats fall. That last part is why the count follows your edit. Turn a 6/4 bar into 4/4 + 2/4 and the cues stop counting *1-2-3-4-5-6* and start counting *1-2-3-4, 1-2* — because the bar lines genuinely moved, not just the label. Your **stems are never touched**, and section times stay where they are. Nothing is re-analyzed and no credits are spent. ## When the grid and the music disagree If the grid looks wrong, check these in order: 1. **Is the bar line in the right place, or just labelled oddly?** Six beats grouped as one 6/4 bar and as 4/4 + 2/4 sound identical to the click — the downbeat lands in the same place. Only the count differs. If the sections land correctly and only the counting feels wrong, it's a grouping question, and the fix is the two-step edit above. 2. **Does the section start on a bar line?** Sections that begin mid-bar usually mean the meter before them is wrong, not the section. 3. **Did the beats add up?** After a meter edit, check that the section following it still starts where it did. If playback and the cues are right but the picture looks wrong, say so when you get in touch — that distinction tells us a great deal about where to look. ## Frequently asked questions ### Do I need Pro mode to edit tempo, meter, or sections? For the tempo and meter maps, yes — those edits happen in the **Meter** and **Tempo** lanes, and those lanes only appear in Pro. Open the arrangement page and click **Pro** next to **Simple** above the timeline. **Resizing a section** by dragging the boundary between two sections is a Pro edit too — the seam is part of the grid. Everything else on a section is not. **Rename**, **Split here**, **Merge with previous/next**, **Loop section**, **Delete section** and **Edit cue** are all on the section right-click menu and work in Simple, with no Pro mode needed. Either way your edits stay saved when you switch modes — the mode only changes what you see. ### Does editing tempo time-stretch or speed up my stems? No. Changing a tempo point only updates the click, count-in and export map. Your stems keep playing at their recorded speed — Pliris is not time-stretching or re-rendering the audio. ### I deleted a tempo point or time-signature change — why does Play still sound wrong? **Refresh the page before pressing Play.** Until a fix ships (#1929 interim), the player can keep the old map after you delete a tempo or meter change. A hard refresh clears it. ### Is 4/4 + 2/4 the same as one 6/4 bar? For the **click and downbeat placement**, yes — both layouts span the same six beats, so the following section can stay aligned. The **grouping and count** differ: one bar of *1-2-3-4-5-6* vs *1-2-3-4, 1-2*. If sections land correctly and only the counting feels wrong, fix it with the two-step meter edit above. ### Can I undo a grid or section edit? Yes. **⌘Z** (Ctrl+Z on Windows) undoes the last edit in this session. **History** keeps version snapshots (save / leave edit / `.als` update), so you can restore an earlier version after a reload — see [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). ## Related - [Fixing a Wrong Time Signature](/docs/fixing-a-wrong-time-signature) - [Changing a Song's Key](/docs/changing-a-songs-key) - [Adding and Changing Song Sections](/docs/adding-and-changing-song-sections) - [How to Change the Length of a Song Section](/docs/resizing-song-sections) - [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song) - [Changing Cues in Pliris](/docs/changing-cues-in-pliris) - [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history) --- # How to Change the Length of a Song Section > Drag the boundary between two sections on the arrangement timeline in Pro mode — it snaps to the beat grid and ticks as you cross each beat. You can still do it in Ableton by moving locators and dropping the updated .als, if the set is where you work. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/resizing-song-sections Want the Chorus to run 10 bars instead of 8, or a Verse to start two bars earlier? That's a **length** change, not a rename — and you can now do it directly on the Pliris arrangement timeline. You can still do it in Ableton instead, if the Live Set is where you'd rather work. ## The quick way: drag the boundary in Pliris Switch the arrangement page to **Pro** (next to **Simple**, above the timeline), then drag the **boundary between two sections** left or right. The seam snaps to the beat grid, and you'll hear a tick each time you cross a beat, accented on the downbeat — so you can feel where you're landing without watching the numbers. Because you're dragging a boundary, it changes **two** sections at once: one gets longer, the other shorter. That's the same rule as moving a locator in Ableton, just without the round trip. **⌘Z** undoes a drag, and every resize is written to [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history), so you can go back to how the song was earlier. Resizing moves the *boundary between two labels*, not the audio. Your stems are untouched — a longer Chorus means the Chorus label now covers more of the same recording, not that anything was stretched or re-rendered. For the rest of what Pro mode can edit — time signatures and tempo — see [Editing the Grid](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid). **Splitting and merging** sections aren't Pro edits at all: right-click a section in **Simple** mode and choose **Split here** or **Merge with previous** / **Merge with next** — see [Adding and Changing Song Sections](/docs/adding-and-changing-song-sections). ## The Ableton way If the Live Set is your source of truth, the original route still works exactly as before. Section boundaries are read from the cue markers (Locators) on your Ableton Live arrangement timeline, so that's where the change needs to happen. A section runs from its own start locator to the **next** section's start locator — there's no separate "end locator" — so which locator you move depends on which boundary you're changing, and moving either one also changes the adjacent section to match: - **To move where a section *starts*** (e.g. make the Verse start two bars earlier): move that section's own locator — the section before it shrinks or grows to fill the gap. If it's the **first** section in the song (e.g. the Intro), there's no earlier section to affect instead: moving its locator just moves where that leading section — and the arrangement's first counted section — begins. - **To move where a section *ends***, which is how you change its length (e.g. make an 8-bar Chorus run 10 bars): move the locator that starts the section *after* it — that section shrinks or grows to match. If it's the **last** section in the song, there's no next section to move instead: move the song-end marker, which changes the overall song/arrangement length rather than any adjacent section. 1. Open the song in **Ableton Live**. 2. Move the relevant boundary locator to the new point, per above. 3. Save the Live Set. 4. Open the song's arrangement page in Pliris and drag the updated `.als` onto it (the **Drop .als** overlay appears). 5. Review the summary Pliris shows you — it reads the new locator placement and rebuilds the section from it — then click **Update arrangement**. Your stems aren't touched by this — Pliris re-reads the structure around your audio, not the audio itself. Full detail on exactly what a drop picks up: [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton) and [What Gets Imported When You Update from Ableton](/docs/what-gets-imported-when-you-update-from-ableton). Made a mistake? Every `.als` drop is captured in [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history), so you can restore the version from before. ## Don't confuse this with - **Rename section** — changes the label only, not the length. [Renaming Song Sections](/docs/renaming-song-sections). - **Edit cue** (on a section) — maps that section to an Ableton *template cue* for export; it doesn't move the section's boundaries. [Changing Cues in Pliris](/docs/changing-cues-in-pliris). - **MIDI cues** (the panel) — per-user timed MIDI events that fire external gear mid-song; unrelated to section length. [Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear](/docs/programming-midi-cues). ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I drag a section marker to resize it directly in Pliris? Yes — switch to **Pro** mode and drag the boundary between two sections. It snaps to the beat grid. This changes the section on each side of that boundary, the same way moving a locator in Ableton does. The Ableton route still works if you prefer it: move that section's own locator to change where it *starts*, or the next section's locator (or the song-end marker, for the last section) to change where it *ends*, then drop the updated `.als` on the arrangement page. ### Will changing a section's length in Ableton affect my stems? No. Dropping an updated `.als` re-reads structure, tempo, mix, and clip alignment — it doesn't touch or re-analyze your stem audio. ### I don't see the length change after dropping my updated file — what happened? Check the review summary before you click **Update arrangement** — if the locator move didn't land the way you expected in Ableton, cancel and fix it in Live before dropping again. You can also compare against a previous version in [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). ## Where to go next - Edit tempo and meter in Pro mode → [Editing the Grid](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid). - Split or merge sections (right-click, no Pro mode needed) → [Adding and Changing Song Sections](/docs/adding-and-changing-song-sections). - Rename a section instead of resizing it → [Renaming Song Sections](/docs/renaming-song-sections). - Full field list for an `.als` drop → [What Gets Imported When You Update from Ableton](/docs/what-gets-imported-when-you-update-from-ableton). - Undo a bad update → [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Adding and Changing Song Sections > Rename, split, merge, delete and loop sections directly in Pliris — right-click any section on the arrangement timeline. Resizing is a Pro-mode boundary drag, not a right-click action. Reordering still happens in Ableton. Every edit is undoable and lands in History. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/adding-and-changing-song-sections Sections are the coloured blocks on the arrangement timeline — **Intro**, **Verse**, **Chorus**, and the rest. They come from one of two places: the **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** option (it does not show lyrics), or the locators in your Ableton Live Set. On upload that checkbox starts unchecked. On the song-page offer card it starts checked. Almost all of it you can now do **inside Pliris**, by right-clicking a section on the arrangement timeline. Only reordering still needs Ableton. > **This changed recently.** Section structure used to be read-only in Pliris — you moved locators in your Live Set and re-imported. Splitting, merging, deleting and resizing now happen on the arrangement page. ## What happens where | Change | Where you do it | | --- | --- | | **Rename** a section | Pliris — right-click, or double-click the section | | Set a section's **cue** | Pliris — right-click the section | | **Split** a section in two | Pliris — right-click → **Split here** (splits at the playhead) | | **Merge** two sections | Pliris — right-click → **Merge with previous** / **Merge with next** | | **Delete** a section | Pliris — right-click → **Delete section** | | **Resize** / move a boundary | Pliris — drag the boundary between two sections in **Pro** mode | | **Loop** a section | Pliris — right-click → **Loop section** (persisted / exported). **L** alone is only a temporary transport loop while listening — it does not mark the section | | **Reorder** sections | Ableton — rearrange the arrangement | | **Add** a section at a new point | Pliris — **Split here**, then rename the new half | ## What you can change in Pliris Most of it lives on a **right-click** of the coloured section block on the timeline. **Resize is the exception** — that is a Pro-mode boundary drag, not a menu item. 1. Open the song's arrangement page (see [How to Use the Song Arrangement Page](/docs/using-the-song-arrangement-page)). 2. **Right-click** the coloured section block on the timeline. 3. Choose the action you want — **Rename**, **Split here**, **Edit cue**, **Loop section**, **Merge with previous**, **Merge with next** or **Delete section**. To **resize** a section (move a boundary), switch to **Pro** mode and **drag the boundary** between two sections — there is no resize item on the right-click menu. Full walkthrough: [How to Change the Length of a Song Section](/docs/resizing-song-sections). Pro mode and the Song lane are covered in [Editing the Grid](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid). Edits save as you make them; there's no separate Save step and no Edit mode to turn on first. **⌘Z** undoes the last one, and every edit is written to [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). **None of this changes your audio.** Splitting, merging, resizing or deleting a section moves the *labels* over your song — which span is called Chorus, where the boundary sits. Your stems are never trimmed, re-rendered or time-stretched, nothing is re-analyzed, and no credits are spent. **Split here** splits at the **playhead**, so position the playhead first — it's greyed out if the playhead isn't inside the section you right-clicked. To change **tempo or time signature**, switch to **Pro** mode: see [Editing the Grid](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid). **Rename section** changes the label you see on the timeline and the label that goes out in Ableton exports — see [How to Rename Song Sections](/docs/renaming-song-sections). **Edit cue** maps that section to an Ableton template cue (an "All-in" on the Chorus, say), or to **No cue for this section** — see [How to Change Cues in Pliris](/docs/changing-cues-in-pliris). Changes land in [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history), so a bad rename is always recoverable. ## Prefer Ableton? The locator round-trip still works You do not need Ableton for split / merge / delete / loop / resize anymore. Split, merge, delete and loop are on the right-click menu above; resize is the Pro-mode boundary drag (not a menu item). If your Live Set is where you already work, you can still change structure there and push it back. Pliris reads section structure from the **locators** (cue markers along the top of the Ableton arrangement timeline). One locator starts one section, and that section runs until the *next* locator — there's no separate "end" marker: - **Add a section** — drop a new locator where you want it to start. The section before it shortens to meet it. - **Delete or merge sections** — delete the locator that starts the second one. The section before it absorbs the space, which is exactly what a merge is. - **Split a section** — add a locator part-way through it. - **Move a boundary** — drag the locator. See [How to Change the Length of a Song Section](/docs/resizing-song-sections) for which locator to move for which edge. - **Reorder sections** — rearrange the arrangement in Ableton (still the only place reorder lives). Then push it back: 1. If you don't already have a Live Set for this song — common when sections came from stem analysis rather than an Ableton import — open the arrangement and click **Download → Ableton Set**. That needs **manage** access on the band (band admin, or permission to manage arrangements or create setlists); see [Band Access Levels](/docs/managing-members-and-access). Open the downloaded `.als` in Ableton Live. 2. Make the locator changes in **Ableton Live** and **save** the set. 3. Open the song's arrangement page in Pliris. 4. Drag the updated `.als` anywhere onto the page — a **Drop .als** overlay appears. 5. Review the **Update arrangement?** summary. It lists the section count before and after, plus **Added sections** and **Removed sections** by name, so you can check the change landed before committing to it. 6. Click **Update arrangement**. Your stems aren't touched — Pliris re-reads the structure *around* your audio, not the audio itself, and nothing is re-uploaded or re-analyzed. Full detail in [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton) and [What Gets Imported When You Update from Ableton](/docs/what-gets-imported-when-you-update-from-ableton). To push edits across a whole show at once, see [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton). Every drop is captured in [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history) before it applies, so you can restore the previous version if the change isn't right. ## If your song has no sections at all An arrangement with an empty timeline usually means analysis hasn't run on it yet, not that it ran and found nothing. Sections are written by **Analyze**, which is a separate step from uploading your stems. Open the arrangement and look for the **Analyze** card. It offers two checkboxes. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** starts checked and fills key, tempo, time signature, and sections. **Lyrics and Chords** starts unchecked — leave it unchecked if you only need sections. It does not show lyrics. Empty **Key**, **Tempo**, or **Time** chips request **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** only. See [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). Two things worth knowing: - **Analyze needs a full mix to listen to.** Pliris builds one from your stems automatically, so this normally just works — but a song uploaded as a handful of separated stems with no click or guide track may also show a tempo of **0** until analysis has run. - **A song imported from Ableton doesn't need it.** If the song came in as a Live Set, its sections come from your locators. You can edit them in Pliris (right-click / Pro mode) or drop an updated `.als` if you changed locators in Live. If you'd rather not wait on analysis, the Ableton route above will populate sections on its own. ## MIDI cues are a different thing — and those you *can* add in the app Don't let the word "cue" run the two together. **Section cues** are the export labels described above. **MIDI cues** are the timed messages that fire your external gear mid-song — a patch change on the Helix, a scene change on a mixer — and those are fully editable inside Pliris. They live on the **MIDI cues** tab under the player on the arrangement page. You don't need a special Edit mode for them. - **Add** — set the type (**Preset**, **Program Change**, **Control Change**, or **Note**) and value, then click **Add**. Or just press **C** while the song is playing. - **Edit** — hover the cue row, click the **⋮** menu, choose **Edit cue**. - **Delete** — same **⋮** menu, **Delete cue**. - **Re-time** — the **◀ ▶** nudge arrows on the cue row. - **Record live** — click **Record**, pick your input and output, then change patches on your gear while the song plays and each change lands as a cue. You'll need at least one **output** first (name it after the device, e.g. "Helix"). Full walkthrough: [How to Change Cues in Pliris](/docs/changing-cues-in-pliris) and [Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear](/docs/programming-midi-cues). ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I add a section in the Bands app? Yes — put the playhead where the new section should start, **right-click** the section that contains it, and choose **Split here**, then rename the new half. There is no separate **Add section** item; split-then-rename is how you create one. You can still add a locator in Ableton and drop the `.als` if that is where you work. ### How do I merge two sections? **Right-click** either section and choose **Merge with previous** or **Merge with next**. That joins the labels — it does not delete any audio. The Ableton alternative is still available: delete the locator that starts the second section, save, and drop the updated `.als`. ### Can I delete a section I don't want? Yes — **right-click** → **Delete section**. That removes the label for that stretch; your stems stay put. Or delete its locator in Ableton and re-drop the `.als`. ### Why can't I right-click and add sections like the app suggested? You can. The right-click menu now includes **Rename**, **Split here**, **Edit cue**, **Loop section**, **Merge with previous**, **Merge with next**, and **Delete section**. There is still no standalone **Add section** item — use **Split here** at the playhead, then rename. Reorder is the one structural change that still needs Ableton. ### My song analyzed with no sections — is that a bug? Usually it means **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** hasn't been run yet. Uploading stems does not analyze them. On the offer card that option starts checked; **Lyrics and Chords** starts unchecked and will not add sections. If **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** has genuinely run and still returned nothing, that's worth reporting. ### I analyzed and Lyrics is still empty. Did sections fail too? No. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** fills sections, key, tempo, and time signature, and does not show lyrics. An empty Lyrics tab after that option alone is expected. Check **Lyrics and Chords** for lyrics and chords. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ## Where to go next - Rename a section → [How to Rename Song Sections](/docs/renaming-song-sections). - Change a section's length → [How to Change the Length of a Song Section](/docs/resizing-song-sections). - The full `.als` round-trip → [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). - MIDI cues for external gear → [Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear](/docs/programming-midi-cues). - Undo a change → [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Old Stems Play but Won't Download as WAV > Stems uploaded before March 2025 may only have MP3 versions — re-upload the original WAV to restore full-quality export. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/legacy-stems-missing-wav-download If a stem plays fine in Pliris™ but **Download** / export won't give you a WAV, you're probably looking at a legacy upload. Stems uploaded **before March 2025** were often stored for in-app playback as MP3 only. Newer uploads keep the original WAV for export and use an MP3 (or similar) for smooth playback in the browser. ## Fix it 1. Find the original WAV (or AIFF) on disk. 2. Open the arrangement. 3. Re-upload that file with the **same stem name** so it replaces the old one. 4. Wait for processing to finish, then try the WAV download / Ableton export again. You don't need to rebuild the whole song — just replace the stems that are missing full-quality originals. ## Still stuck? If re-upload finishes and WAV download is still missing, tell support the **song name**, **band**, and **stem name** — we'll check storage for that arrangement. ## Frequently asked questions ### Why does my stem play in Pliris but won't download as WAV? Stems uploaded before March 2025 were often stored as MP3 for playback only — re-upload the original WAV with the same stem name to restore full-quality download and export. ### Do I need to rebuild the whole song to get WAV downloads back? No — re-upload only the stems missing originals; processing replaces those tracks and leaves the rest of the arrangement alone. ### What should I tell support if WAV download is still missing after re-upload? Send the **song name**, **band**, and **stem name** so we can check storage for that arrangement. --- # Importing a Song from Ableton Live > Bring a song in from Ableton in one drop. Collect All and Save, zip the project folder, drop it on the uploader — Pliris reads your tempo, sections, and arrangement AND pulls in your stems together. (A bare .als is structure-only.) Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live Already built the song in Ableton Live? You don't have to start over — and you don't have to bring it in piece by piece. Zip up your Ableton **project** and drop it on Pliris™. In one step it reads your structure — tempo, sections, arrangement — *and* pulls in your stems. The one thing worth understanding first is the difference between an Ableton **`.als` file** and an Ableton **project**. It's the source of almost every "where did my audio go?" moment, and it's an Ableton concept — not a Pliris one. ## First, `.als` vs. project — the thing Ableton doesn't make obvious When you save in Ableton, the **`.als` file** is just the *set*: the arrangement, tempo, locators, mixer, and a list of **references** to your audio. It does **not** contain the audio itself. Your stems and samples live as separate files on disk, and the `.als` only points to where they are. Your **project** is the whole folder — the `.als` file **plus** the `Samples` folder that holds the actual audio it points to. So: - A **`.als` on its own** = structure only. Tempo, sections, arrangement — **no audio**. - The **whole project** = structure **and** your stems. If you've ever emailed someone "the Ableton file" and they opened it to a wall of *"Media files are missing,"* this is why. To move a song somewhere else — including into Pliris — you move the **project**, not just the `.als`. ## Import your whole project (the way you'll want almost every time) This brings the song in complete — structure and stems — in a single drop. 1. **In Ableton: File → Collect All and Save.** A dialog asks which sources to copy into the project. Set **Files from elsewhere**, **Files from other Projects**, and **Files from User Library** to **Yes** — those hold your actual stems and samples. **Files from Factory Packs** can stay **No**: those are Ableton's built-in sounds, and collecting them just bloats the zip (only switch it to **Yes** if a track plays a raw factory sample directly). Click **OK**. This copies your referenced audio into the project's own `Samples` folder, so it travels with the set — anything left uncollected stays behind on your machine and won't be in the zip to upload. 2. **Zip the project folder.** On a Mac, right-click the folder → **Compress**. On Windows, right-click → **Send to → Compressed (zipped) folder**. You want a single `.zip` of the whole project. 3. **In Pliris:** open the song and its arrangement and drop the `.zip` on the drop zone. 4. Pliris reads the `.als` inside for tempo, sections, and arrangement, and stages the referenced stems. Review the list, then **Import** (Ableton keeps Import + Cancel — ordinary stem drops have no Confirm button). That's it — one drop gets you the arrangement laid out on the page *and* your stems uploading. Ableton sidecar files (like `.asd` analysis files) are ignored automatically, so there's no need to clean out the folder first. ![Ableton's Collect All and Save dialog: Files from elsewhere, Files from other Projects, and Files from User Library set to Yes, with Files from Factory Packs set to No.](/help-assets/ableton-collect-all-and-save.png) ![Right-clicking the Ableton project folder in the macOS Finder and choosing Compress to make a single .zip.](/help-assets/ableton-compress-project.png) > **No zip needed:** in **Files**, choose **Upload → Add files → This computer → Choose folder** to upload an Ableton project folder that isn't zipped. A zip still works everywhere. > **Pro tip:** "Collect All and Save" is the whole trick. It's an Ableton command that gathers every referenced sample into the project folder. Do it, then zip the folder — and everything the song needs is inside the one file you drop. ## What gets pulled in From the `.als` inside your project, Pliris reads: - **The tempo map** — including tempo changes across the song, not just a single headline BPM. - **Sections and markers** — your locators become Pliris song sections (Intro, Verse, Chorus, Bridge, and so on), with their names intact. - **The arrangement** — the overall structure and length of the song. And from the project's `Samples` folder, it stages the **stems** those sections play against — so the timeline and the audio line up from the start. ## Just want the structure? A bare `.als` works too You don't *always* need the whole project. If the stems are **already in Pliris** and you only want to pull in structural changes — a renamed section, an adjusted arrangement, a moved marker — you can drop **just the `.als`**. Pliris treats that as a structure-only update: it re-reads tempo, sections, and arrangement and leaves your existing audio untouched. That's the right tool for the round-trip, and it's covered in depth here: - Updating one song's structure → [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton) - Pushing edits across a whole show → [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton) **Structure-only re-imports don't cost credits.** If you're out of credits you'll see a warning — ignore it. Re-reading an `.als` isn't re-analyzing audio; it's just pulling your structural changes back in, and it's basically instant. > **Rule of thumb:** First time bringing a song in, or want the audio too → **upload the whole project (zip)**. Song already in Pliris and you just changed its structure in Ableton → **drop the `.als`**. ## A note on tempo Warped clips in Ableton can produce a jittery tempo map, and Pliris may show a tempo *range* even when the song is effectively one steady tempo. That's expected — a range on the display doesn't necessarily mean a genuine multi-tempo arrangement. Pliris uses your project's base (Manual) tempo as the authoritative value. ## Frequently asked questions ### Should I drop the `.als` file or the whole project? Drop the **whole project** (zipped) when you're bringing a song in for the first time or you want your stems to come along — a `.als` on its own is just the set file and contains no audio. Drop **just the `.als`** when the song is already in Pliris and you only want to update its structure (sections, arrangement, tempo). ### Why didn't my audio come in when I imported? You almost certainly dropped a bare `.als` instead of the project. The `.als` only *references* your audio — the samples live in the project's `Samples` folder. Run **File → Collect All and Save** in Ableton, zip the whole project folder, and drop that instead. ### What is "Collect All and Save" and do I have to do it? It's an Ableton command (File menu) that copies the samples your song references into the project's own folder, so the audio travels with the set. When the dialog appears, set **Files from elsewhere**, **Files from other Projects**, and **Files from User Library** to **Yes** — those hold your stems and samples. **Files from Factory Packs** can stay **No** (that's Ableton's built-in content, which just adds bloat) unless a track plays a raw factory sample. Do it before zipping — otherwise samples that live outside the project folder won't be inside the zip and won't upload. ### Does re-importing an Ableton file overwrite my work or cost credits? Re-importing an edited `.als` to update an existing song pulls your structural changes — sections, arrangement, tempo — back into Pliris and does **not** use any credits. Your stems stay put. If you're out of credits you'll see a warning you can ignore: re-importing isn't re-analyzing audio. ### What does Pliris read from an Ableton Live Set? Pliris reads the tempo map (including tempo changes across the song), your locators as named song sections (Intro, Verse, Chorus, and so on), and the overall arrangement structure and length. When you upload the whole project, it also brings in the stems those sections play against. ### Why does Pliris show a tempo range when my song has one steady tempo? Warped clips in Ableton can produce a jittery tempo map, so Pliris may display a tempo range even for an effectively single-tempo song. That's expected — Pliris uses your project's base tempo as the authoritative value. ## Where to go next - Whole show in one Ableton Live set? See [Importing a Whole Ableton Live Set](/docs/importing-a-whole-ableton-live-set). - Want to fine-tune stems after import, or upload audio separately? See [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). - Edited the song in Ableton and want the change to flow back? See [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). - Ready to send a whole show back the other way? See [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton). Stuck on an import, click the support bubble in the bottom-right of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # Keyboard Shortcuts > Verified Pliris™ playback keys, right-click and click actions, and setlist shortcuts — a checked list, not every key in the app. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/keyboard-shortcuts Verified song-page and setlist shortcuts for Pliris™ — playback keys, right-click and click actions, and setlist keys. This is a checked list, not every key elsewhere in the app; workflow tips like stem preview and rename helpers stay in their own articles. For a tour of the arrangement page itself, see [How to Use the Song Arrangement Page](/docs/using-the-song-arrangement-page). For building and sharing a set, see [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). ## Song page (playback) - **Space** — play/pause (when focus is not in a text field) - **Left / Right** arrows — previous / next section - **Shift+Left / Shift+Right** — scrub 0.5s - **L** — loop current section - **Tab** — switch between Simple and Pro mode - **⌘Z** (Ctrl+Z on Windows) — undo the last grid or section edit - **+ / −** — zoom timeline - **C** — drop a MIDI cue at the playhead ## Right-click and click (not keys) - **Right-click** Key / Tempo / Time — edit - **Right-click** a stem — **Rename stem** / **Use as reference** / **Move to group** - **Right-click** a section — rename / Ableton cue - **Shift-click** a stem group — expand or collapse every group (if the clicked group is collapsed, all expand; if expanded, all collapse) - **Drop files** — upload starts immediately - **Click** a section — jump playhead - **Left-click** a chip — often copies ## Setlist page - **Space** — play/pause - **S** — share (needs manage) - **P** — print - **A** — add (needs manage) ## Also handy - **Esc** - **Simple / Pro** toggle - **History** ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I jump to a section with the number keys? No. Number keys **1–9** do not jump to sections. Click a section on the lane to move the playhead, or use the Left / Right arrows for previous / next section. ### How do I move a stem into a different group? **Right-click** the stem and choose **Move to group**. You cannot drag a stem between groups. For a custom group, create the group first, then right-click stems to move them into it. See [Moving and Renaming Stems on the Song Page](/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page). ### What are the mute and solo shortcuts? There aren't keyboard shortcuts for mute or solo. **M**, **S**, and Focus are mixer **button labels** on each stem — click them; don't press those letters expecting a shortcut. ### What keyboard shortcuts work on a setlist? **Space** plays or pauses. **S** shares (manage access), **P** prints, and **A** adds a song (manage access). ### Where do I change key, tempo, or a section name? **Right-click** the Key / Tempo / Time chip to edit those fields. **Right-click** a section on the timeline to rename it or set its Ableton cue. ## Where to go next - Tour the arrangement page → [How to Use the Song Arrangement Page](/docs/using-the-song-arrangement-page). - Rename and regroup stems → [Moving and Renaming Stems on the Song Page](/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page). - Build and share a set → [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Using Your Own Click and Cue Sounds > Bands' built-in Click & Cues uses stock sounds — use stem uploads or a custom Ableton template when you need your own samples. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/custom-click-and-cue-sounds Pliris™ can generate Click & Cues for you, but those use **stock sounds**. If you need *your* click sample or *your* cue blips, you have two paths. ## Path 1 — Upload them as stems (any plan) 1. Render your click and/or cue audio as regular audio files. 2. Upload them onto the arrangement like any other stem. 3. Leave them unmuted when you rehearse or export. This works on **every plan, including Free**. You hear your exact sounds in the app. They play as normal audio tracks — they are **not** wired into the smart cue / click system (no automatic cue list behavior from those files alone). ## Path 2 — Custom Ableton template (paid + account admin) 1. Build your samples into a custom Ableton template (Foundations + your AI cues player, or your own rack). 2. Have an **account admin** upload it and select it under **Account settings → Ableton template** (band admins and manage-access members can export with whatever template is set, but they can't open Account settings to change it). 3. Export arrangements so the show leaves with your sounds baked in. Custom templates also need the **custom templates** capability on a paid plan — Free can't upload proprietary `.als` / `.zip` templates. Full steps: [How to Choose an Ableton Template](/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template). ## Which should you pick? - Need your sounds **in rehearsal inside Pliris today** → Path 1. - Need your sounds **in the Ableton show file every export** → Path 2 (or Path 1 stems included in export, depending on template). For programming MIDI to external gear (not audio cue samples), see [Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear](/docs/programming-midi-cues). ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I use my own click sound in Pliris? Not in the built-in Click & Cues generator (that uses stock sounds) — upload your click as a regular stem on any plan, or bake it into a custom Ableton template on a paid plan with custom templates. ### Will uploaded click stems trigger the smart cue system? No — stem uploads play as normal audio. They aren't wired into the automatic click/cue list behavior; use them for rehearsal sound or include them in export depending on your template. ### Do I need a paid plan for custom click and cue samples? Stem uploads work on Free. Custom Ableton templates that embed your samples need a paid plan with custom templates **and** an account admin to upload/select the template under Account settings. ### Can a band admin upload a custom template themselves? Not unless they're also an account admin — template changes live under **Account settings**, which is account-admin only. Ask your account admin to switch the template, then export as usual. --- # Building and Sharing a Setlist > Create a setlist, add and reorder songs, share it public or private, print it to PDF, and assign LTC timecode values. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist A setlist puts your songs in order for a show — and then does the work you'd otherwise do by hand: share it with the band, print it for the music stand, and line up LTC timecode for the whole night. Here's how to build one and get it into everyone's hands. ## Create a setlist and add songs 1. Go to your band's **Setlists** page. 2. Click **New setlist**. 3. Give it a name — the show, the date, the venue, whatever you'll recognize — and click **Create setlist**. 4. Click **Add your first song** (or press **A** then **Enter**), type to search, and add it. Use the **Add** button between rows to insert a song in a specific place. 5. Keep adding until the whole set is in. **Add → Talk** adds a timed talk (for example *Welcome*, 0:30) that counts toward the total time. > **Pro tip:** You can also add a song to a setlist from the song itself — click **Setlist**, then either drop it into an existing setlist or create a new one on the spot. Or click a song's **+** icon in the library and pick the setlist. ## Reorder the set Songs don't come in already in show order. Fix that: - **Drag and drop** songs to put them in the exact order you're playing them. The order you set here is the order everything else follows — the shared link, the printed sheet, and any Ableton export you build from the setlist. ## Share it — public or private Click **Share** to get the setlist to your team. - **Public link.** Enable public sharing to generate a link anyone can open — no account, no login. They get a clean, read-only playback view: they can listen to reference audio, but they can't download your stems. **MIDI cues are intentionally stubbed** on public shares so guests hear the same playback without getting your show's MIDI map. - **Private / team-only.** Keep it restricted so only your band members can see it. Send the public link to crew, subs, or bandmates and they're looking at the same set you are, in the same order. > **Pro tip:** Public links aren't permanent if you don't want them to be. You can disable a link or set it to expire from the Share dialog anytime. ## Print to PDF For the music stand or the pedalboard: 1. Open the setlist. 2. Click **Print** in the toolbar. 3. Choose your layout options — timing, notes, and what else to include. 4. Download the PDF or print it directly. Tape it to your pedalboard, hand it to the front-of-house engineer, keep a copy on the stand. Whatever works for the room. ## Assign LTC timecode values If you run timecode to sync lighting, backing tracks, or other gear, your setlist is where it comes together. Each arrangement can carry its own sync timecode, and once those are assigned, the whole set is timecode-ready. If you followed the analyze-and-import flow, your LTC values may already be assigned for you. To generate the actual LTC audio, head to the LTC tools — see [Sending LTC / SMPTE Timecode](/docs/sending-ltc-smpte-timecode). From the Arrangement Browser you can search your library and download an LTC file already configured with the right start time, duration, and frame rate for each song. > **Pro tip:** Assigning LTC per arrangement is the fastest path to timecode for a full show. Set it once on the song and every setlist that includes it inherits the right values. By default, LTC is tied to the **arrangement**, not to its position in a setlist — reordering songs doesn't change any song's timecode, so there's no LTC "reset" step after a reorder. Check or change this under your band's **Settings → LTC**. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can someone view my shared setlist without a Pliris account? Yes. Enabling public sharing on a setlist generates a link anyone can open with no account or login — they get a clean, read-only playback view where they can listen to reference audio but can't download your stems. MIDI cues don't appear on that public link by design. ### Why don't MIDI cues show on my public setlist link? By design. Public share links stub MIDI so guests get consistent playback without receiving your show's MIDI map. Use a private / team share (or have them sign in as band members) when they need the real cues. ### Can I disable or expire a public setlist link? Yes. Public setlist links aren't permanent unless you want them to be — you can disable a link or set it to expire from the Share dialog at any time. ### Can I add a song to a setlist without opening the setlist first? Yes. From the song itself, click **Setlist** and either drop the song into an existing setlist or create a new one on the spot. ### Do I have to assign LTC timecode separately for every setlist? No. LTC sync timecode is assigned per arrangement, so once you set it on the song, every setlist that includes that song inherits the right values. See [Sending LTC / SMPTE Timecode](/docs/sending-ltc-smpte-timecode) for generating the actual LTC audio. ### I reordered my setlist — do I need to reset or re-export LTC? Depends on your band's LTC mode (**Settings → LTC**): - **Auto, per arrangement** (the default) — no. Timecode is tied to the arrangement itself, so a song keeps the same LTC start time regardless of where it falls in the running order. Nothing to reset or re-export. - **Auto, per setlist** — no action needed either, but for a different reason: timecode here is assigned to the song's *slot in that setlist*, so Pliris automatically recalculates it the moment you reorder. **Don't pull the file from the Arrangement Browser afterward, though** — that tool only ever reads an arrangement's own start time, not a per-setlist slot, so it can hand you the wrong value. Read the updated timecode straight off the setlist row instead, and if you need an actual WAV, enter that value manually at [ltc.fromstudiotostage.com](https://ltc.fromstudiotostage.com) (Option 1: manual start timecode) rather than via the Arrangement Browser. - **Manual** — values are hand-assigned and don't move on their own. Re-run the **Smart LTC** tool after reordering to get new sequential times for the current order. ## Where to go next - Build a set, export it to Ableton and bring your edits back (with the course lesson) → [Building a Set and Updating It from Ableton](/docs/building-a-set-and-updating-it-from-ableton). - Want the whole show as one Ableton project? See [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton). - Need timecode audio to route to your gear? See [Sending LTC / SMPTE Timecode](/docs/sending-ltc-smpte-timecode). - Building songs first? Start with [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). Stuck building a set, click the support bubble in the bottom-right of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # The Setlist Navigation Panel > Open a song from a setlist and a floating panel follows you — jump back to the set, skip to the next song, or leap anywhere in the list. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-setlist-navigation-panel When you open a song from a setlist, you usually aren't done with the setlist — you're working through it. The setlist navigation panel keeps the whole set one click away while you're inside a song, so you never have to hit the back button to get to the next tune. ## How it appears Click any song row in a setlist. The song opens as usual — and a floating panel appears in the **bottom-left corner** of the arrangement view. It only shows up when you arrived *via* a setlist; open the same song from your library and it stays out of your way. ## What's in the panel - **The setlist name** at the top — click it to jump straight back to the setlist. - **Prev / Next** buttons, with a counter showing where you are in the set (say, `3 / 12`). - **The full song list**, numbered and in show order, with the current song highlighted. Click any song to jump straight to it. The panel travels with you: move to another song through it and it's still there on the next page, already pointing at your new position in the set. You can rehearse an entire show front to back without ever leaving the player. ## Minimize or dismiss it - **Minimize** (the shrink icon) collapses the panel to a small **blue pill** showing the setlist name. Click the pill to expand it again — handy when you want the screen for the timeline but the set within reach. - **Close** (the X) hides the panel for that page view. It isn't gone for good: open a song from the setlist again (or refresh the page) and it comes back. > **Pro tip:** During rehearsal, minimize rather than close. The pill keeps your place in the set visible without covering the player controls. ## Frequently asked questions ### Why doesn't the setlist panel show up when I open a song? The setlist navigation panel only appears when you arrived at the song *via* a setlist — click a song row in a setlist and the panel shows in the bottom-left of the arrangement view. Open the same song from your library and it stays out of your way. ### I closed the setlist panel — how do I get it back? Closing the panel with the X only hides it for that page view. Open a song from the setlist again, or refresh the page, and the panel comes back. ### Can I keep my place in the set without the panel covering the player? Yes. Click the minimize (shrink) icon to collapse the panel to a small blue pill showing the setlist name — your place in the set stays visible without covering the player controls, and clicking the pill expands it again. ## Where to go next - Haven't built a set yet? Start with [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). - Want the whole show as one Ableton project? See [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # Why Does My Stem Show “Processing”? > What happens after upload, how long processing usually takes, and what to do when a stem is stuck. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/stem-stuck-processing After you upload audio, stems are processed (transcoded for in-app playback) and stored. That usually finishes within about **30 seconds**. ## What to try 1. Wait a minute — the app polls and also listens for webhooks. 2. Refresh the arrangement page once. 3. Confirm the file is a supported audio type (or a zip/Ableton project the importer understands). 4. If it is still stuck after a few minutes, contact support with the **song name**, **band name**, and roughly **when** you uploaded. ## Related - [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems) - [Stems Won't Play or Are Silent](/docs/stems-wont-play) - [Replacing Stems and Re-analyzing](/docs/replacing-stems-and-re-analyzing) --- # Replacing Stems and Re-analyzing a Song > How to swap files on an existing song, avoid duplicates, and get a clean re-analysis. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/replacing-stems-and-re-analyzing ## Replacing a stem Inside an arrangement, re-upload a file with the **same name** to replace the previous version (upsert). Re-uploading is safe for that path. If you upload **different names**, you get **additional** stems — that is the usual reason people see “I uploaded 8 and now I have 16.” ## Cleaning up before a fresh analysis If old files are confusing analysis or playback: 1. Remove the stems you no longer want from the arrangement. 2. Upload the definitive set (matching names if you intend to replace). 3. Run the option you still need. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** refills key, tempo, time signature, and sections, and does not show lyrics. **Lyrics and Chords** refills lyrics and chords together, and does not replace key, tempo, time signature, or sections. Each selected option is its own credit charge. 4. If sections or tempo look wrong after a partial re-upload, prefer a clean arrangement rather than layering conflicting files. Do not re-run **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** to fill an empty Lyrics tab — check **Lyrics and Chords**. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ## Duplicate stems after zip upload Zips that contain both nested folders and top-level copies of the same audio can produce extras. Prefer a flat zip of the stems you actually want, or delete the duplicates after import. ## Related - [Uploading Raw Stems or a Zip of Stems](/docs/uploading-raw-stems-or-a-zip) - [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems) - [How to Rename and Regroup Stems](/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page) - [Why Does My Stem Show “Processing”?](/docs/stem-stuck-processing) --- # Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton > Export a whole setlist as one Ableton Live Set with every arrangement in order and LTC timecode tracks pre-configured. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton This is the payoff. Once you've got a few songs in your library and a setlist in show order, Pliris™ can hand you the entire night as a single Ableton Live project — every arrangement stitched together, in order, with LTC timecode tracks already in place. That's what "from stems to set in seconds" means at the scale of a whole show. > **Browsers for large exports.** For **Export Ableton → With samples** on a large set, use **Chrome** or **Edge**. Safari cannot finish large set exports with samples (memory / folder-write limit) — switch to Chrome or Edge. Details: [Supported Browsers for Pliris](/docs/supported-browsers-for-pliris) and [Large Ableton Exports and Browsers](/docs/large-ableton-exports-and-browsers). > **Who can do this.** You need **manage** access on the band — band admin, or permission to manage arrangements or create setlists. That's the only requirement: exporting works on **every plan, including free**, and there's no flag to request. What your plan changes is which *template* you can build on — see **Pick your template** below. ## What you get Export a setlist and Pliris builds one Ableton Live Set containing: - **Every arrangement in the setlist, in order** — the same order you set when [building the setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). - **LTC / SMPTE timecode tracks, pre-configured** — so the whole show is ready to sync lighting, backing gear, and anything else that follows timecode. - **Your stems**, routed and grouped, on a Playback template. Open the `.als` in Ableton Live and you're ready for soundcheck — no manual session-building, no wiring up timecode by hand. ## Export from a setlist 1. Open the setlist you want to export. 2. Click **Export Ableton** in the setlist toolbar. 3. Pick how much you want in the download: | Preset | What you get | | --- | --- | | **Project file only** | Just the `.als` — fast to download. Open it where your stems already live. | | **With samples** | Bundles every stem, so the set opens and plays out of the box. Bigger file. In Chrome this uses a folder picker — not the normal Downloads save. | | **Build on server** *(alpha)* | The full bundle, assembled on our servers instead of in your browser — and the only export that applies **Dynamic Leveling**. Paid or trial + alpha + per-band only; free and canceled plans don't get it. When it moves to beta, paid or trial users can use it. | The two local options show their download size right in the menu, so you know what you're getting before you click. (**Build on server** shows a **LEVELED** badge instead — its size isn't known until the build runs.) ![The Export Ableton menu open on a setlist, showing the Project file only and With samples presets with their download sizes, plus the Build on server option badged LEVELED.](/help-assets/setlist-export-ableton-menu.png) 4. **What happens next depends on which you picked:** - **Project file only** — the download starts right away. Pliris assembles the `.als` on a Playback template in your browser, zips it, and hands you the file. - **With samples** — in Chrome, you get a **folder picker** first. That's required in Chrome; it is not the normal Downloads save. You cannot save into a system folder itself (Desktop, Downloads, Documents). Create or pick a folder *inside* one of those, then save into that folder. Once the picker succeeds, Chrome can write large sets — including multi-GB ones. Pliris assembles the `.als`, bundles the stems, and writes the zip there. - **Build on server** — nothing downloads immediately. The build is **queued** and runs on our servers, showing its progress as it goes ("Waiting in queue", "Downloading stems", and so on). When it finishes you get the `.zip`. Don't worry if no download appears the moment you click — that's expected. **LTC is automatic.** There's no "include LTC" toggle to remember: any song in the setlist that has LTC assigned gets its timecode track built into the export for you. ## Pick your template The set is built on a Playback template. Depending on your plan and access you can build on: - **Playback Pro** - **Playback Standard** - **Playback Intro** Your available templates depend on your plan. Free accounts can build only on the **Playback Intro** template. Playback Standard, Playback Pro, and custom `.als` templates require a paid Pliris subscription. The export uses the band's template from **Settings → Template**; see [Switching Your Ableton Export Template](/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template). Locators for AbleSet, LIOBOX and other setlist tools come from **Settings → Setlist management**; see [Exporting Your Songs for AbleSet, LIOBOX and TAZ](/docs/exporting-your-songs-for-ableset-liobox-and-taz). > **Pro tip:** Exporting a full setlist is the big version of downloading a single arrangement as an Ableton Set. Same idea — a real, editable `.als` — scaled to the whole show instead of one song. ## Good to know - **It runs as you.** You can only export sets for bands and setlists you have access to — the same permissions that apply everywhere else in Pliris. - **Re-run anytime.** Each export starts a fresh build, so you always get the current stems and arrangements. Tweaked a song right before the show? Export again and it's included. - **Lighter option.** If you'd rather not bundle all the audio, you can build a set that references local samples instead — smaller file, but you'll need the audio on hand. - **One project, whole night.** Because every arrangement lands in a single set in order, you can run the show straight through in Ableton without loading a new project between songs. - **VoiceOver and the Chrome folder picker.** VoiceOver often never completes that picker. If the folder prompt never lands, the export stops with a size/Safari-memory message — even in Chrome. That's us, not your machine. ## The round trip Export isn't a one-way door. Open the set in Ableton, make your edits, save, and drag the `.als` back onto the setlist in Chrome. For each song, choose a new arrangement, overwrite, or leave it unchanged. It doesn't cost credits, and stems aren't re-uploaded. See [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton) and [Building a Set and Updating It from Ableton](/docs/building-a-set-and-updating-it-from-ableton). ## Frequently asked questions ### Do I need a paid plan to export a setlist to Ableton? No. Exporting works on every plan, including free — you just need **manage** access on the band (band admin, or permission to manage arrangements or create setlists). There's no separate flag to request: with manage access, the **Export Ableton** button is already there. What a paid plan changes is the *template* you can build on — free exports are built on **Playback Intro**, while a subscription unlocks Standard, Pro, and your own custom templates. ### Which Playback templates can I build my export on? Depending on your plan and access, Pliris can build the set on Playback Pro, Playback Standard, or Playback Intro. Free accounts can build only on the Playback Intro template; Playback Standard, Playback Pro, and custom `.als` templates require a paid Pliris subscription. ### If I change a song, do I have to rebuild the export? Just export again — each export starts a fresh build, so you always get the current stems and arrangements. Tweak a song right before the show, re-run the export, and it's included. ### Can I export a set without bundling all the audio? Yes. Instead of bundling stems, Pliris can build a set that references local samples — a smaller file, but you'll need the audio on hand. ### Why does Chrome ask me to pick a folder for With samples? That's required in Chrome — With samples uses the folder picker, not the normal Downloads save. You can't save into Desktop, Downloads, or Documents themselves. Create or pick a folder inside one of those, then save into it. Once that picker succeeds, Chrome can write large sets, including multi-GB ones. ### I got a size / Safari memory error in Chrome. Is my computer the problem? Usually no. If VoiceOver is on, the folder picker often never completes. When the prompt never lands, the export stops with that size/Safari-memory message even in Chrome. That's on us, not your machine. ### Does Safari work for large Ableton set exports? Not for large **With samples** exports. Safari hits a memory / folder-write limit. Use **Chrome** or **Edge** for those exports — see [Supported Browsers for Pliris](/docs/supported-browsers-for-pliris). ### Can I bring edits made in Ableton back into Pliris after exporting? Yes. Save the set in Ableton, then drag the `.als` onto the setlist and choose, for each song, a new arrangement, overwrite, or leave unchanged. It doesn't cost credits. See [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton). ## Where to go next - Haven't ordered your show yet? Start with [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). - Need standalone timecode audio for your gear? See [Sending LTC / SMPTE Timecode](/docs/sending-ltc-smpte-timecode). - Large set exports with samples: [Supported Browsers for Pliris](/docs/supported-browsers-for-pliris) and [Large Ableton Exports and Browsers](/docs/large-ableton-exports-and-browsers). Hit a snag exporting, click the support bubble in the bottom-right of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # What’s in an Exported Ableton Project? > Stems, click, LTC, tempo automation, section markers, MIDI cues, and multi-song layout. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/what-is-in-an-exported-ableton-project An Ableton export from Pliris typically includes: - **Stems** on their own tracks - **Click** track - **LTC** track (high-quality timecode with buffer where applicable) - **Tempo** and time-signature automation - **Section markers / locators** (format depends on the setlist tool you pick; see [Exporting Your Songs for AbleSet, LIOBOX and TAZ](/docs/exporting-your-songs-for-ableset-liobox-and-taz)) - **MIDI cues** you placed in Pliris - Multi-song exports namespace assets under paths like `Samples/Imported/{Song}/` ## What it does *not* do by default - Custom click/cue sample packs are not free-form on every plan — see product flags / templates. - Public setlist share links intentionally stub MIDI so guests do not get your show map. ## Related - [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton) - [Switching Your Ableton Export Template](/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template) - [Exporting Your Songs for AbleSet, LIOBOX and TAZ](/docs/exporting-your-songs-for-ableset-liobox-and-taz) - [Routing Global Tracks in Your Ableton Export](/docs/routing-global-tracks-in-your-ableton-export) --- # Large Ableton Exports and Browsers > Large Ableton set exports with samples need Chrome or Edge. Safari cannot finish big folder writes — switch browsers for the full sample export. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/large-ableton-exports-and-browsers When you export a whole setlist **With samples**, Pliris™ builds a large zip in the browser (stems + `.als`). That needs a browser that can complete a **folder picker** and write a multi-GB folder. ## Use Chrome or Edge For large set exports with samples, use **Google Chrome** or **Microsoft Edge**. 1. Open your band in Chrome or Edge. 2. Open the setlist → **Export Ableton** → **With samples**. 3. When Chrome/Edge asks for a folder, pick or create a folder *inside* Desktop, Downloads, or Documents (not the system folder itself). 4. Let the write finish. Full export walkthrough: [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton). ## Safari cannot do large set exports with samples Safari hits a **memory / folder-write limit** on large Ableton set exports. The export can fail or stop with a size / memory message. **Fix:** switch to **Chrome** or **Edge** and run the same **With samples** export there. Do not treat a thinner export option or a server-side build as the Safari answer for large full-sample sets — the supported path is Chrome or Edge. ## Frequently asked questions ### My large Ableton export failed in Safari. What should I do? Open Pliris in **Chrome** or **Edge** and run **Export Ableton → With samples** again. Safari cannot complete large folder writes for big set exports. ### Why does Chrome ask me to pick a folder? **With samples** uses the folder picker so the browser can write a large zip. Create or pick a folder inside Desktop, Downloads, or Documents — not those folders themselves. Details: [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton). ### Is this a problem with my setlist? Usually no. If the same set exports in Chrome or Edge, the limit was the browser (often Safari), not your arrangements. ## Where to go next - [Supported Browsers for Pliris](/docs/supported-browsers-for-pliris) - [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton) - [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist) --- # Updating an Arrangement from Ableton > Change a song in Ableton — mutes, deactivated clips, a duplicated chorus — drop the .als on its arrangement, and the on-page player updates in place. No re-upload. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton You're in rehearsal and the song needs a change. You do it where you'd do it anyway — in Ableton. Mute the doubled guitar, deactivate the pad clip, duplicate the last chorus for a bigger ending. You hit save. Now you don't re-upload anything. You drop that Live set onto the arrangement, and the on-page player becomes the new version — in seconds, in front of the band. ## Drop it on the arrangement Open the arrangement page and drag your edited `.als` anywhere onto it. A **Drop .als** overlay appears — let go, and Pliris reads the file. You're updating the arrangement you already have, so **your stems stay put** — Pliris isn't re-uploading audio, it's re-reading what changed *around* the audio: your mutes, your clip placement, your sections, your tempo. ![Dropping an Ableton file onto an arrangement page.](/help-assets/arrangement-als-drop.png) ## Review what it caught Before anything changes, Pliris shows you a plain-English summary of what it read from the file: | It reads | From your Ableton edit | | --- | --- | | **Sections** | Renamed, added, removed, or duplicated sections | | **Tempo** and **Tempo automation** | A new tempo, or tempo changes across the song | | **Mix data** | Track volumes and **mutes** | | **Stem clip alignment** | Clips you moved, trimmed, or **deactivated** | Renames read back as a before-and-after, so a stray change is easy to spot. For the full field list (locators, click length, time signature, and what never gets replaced), see [What Gets Imported When You Update from Ableton](/docs/what-gets-imported-when-you-update-from-ableton). When it looks right, click **Update arrangement**. ![The review dialog listing what changed, with the Update arrangement button.](/help-assets/arrangement-als-update-modal.png) ## The player updates in place That's it — the on-page player now reflects your edit, and you'll see an **Arrangement updated from .als** confirmation. Whoever's rehearsing off the page is now playing the version you just built, muted guitar and longer ending and all. ## It's saved, so you can experiment Every drop is captured in the arrangement's **[Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history)** as an **.als import** version. So make the bold call in the room — if it doesn't land, open the history and restore the version from before. Even that restore is undoable, so you can't lose anything. ## Good to know - **Your stems aren't touched.** This updates structure, mix, and clip alignment — it doesn't replace or re-analyze your audio. To bring in *new* audio, upload stems as usual. - **You need edit access.** Updating an arrangement requires **manage** access on the band (or band admin). - **One song at a time here.** Dropping a single-song `.als` updates that arrangement. To push edits across a whole show at once, see [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton). ## Frequently asked questions ### Do I have to re-upload my stems when I update an arrangement from Ableton? No. Dropping an edited `.als` onto the arrangement page updates the arrangement you already have — your stems stay put, and Pliris re-reads only what changed around the audio: mutes, clip placement, sections, and tempo. To bring in new audio, upload stems as usual. ### What changes does Pliris pick up from the .als file? Pliris reads sections (renamed, added, removed, or duplicated), tempo and tempo automation, mix data like track volumes and mutes, and stem clip alignment for clips you moved, trimmed, or deactivated — and shows you a plain-English summary before anything changes. ### Can I undo an arrangement update from Ableton? Yes. Every `.als` drop is captured in the arrangement's [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history) as an **.als import** version, so if the change doesn't land you can restore the version from before — and even that restore is undoable. ### Can I update several songs at once by dropping one Ableton file? Not on an arrangement page — dropping a single-song `.als` there updates that one arrangement. To push edits across a whole show at once, drop the set's file on the setlist page instead: see [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton). ## Where to go next - The course walkthrough, including what doesn't round-trip yet → [Re-importing Your Ableton Edits](/docs/re-importing-your-ableton-edits). - What to change in Ableton first → [Making Rehearsal Edits in Ableton](/docs/making-rehearsal-edits-in-ableton). - Exact import field list → [What Gets Imported When You Update from Ableton](/docs/what-gets-imported-when-you-update-from-ableton). - Whole set at once → [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton). - Every version, and how to restore → [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). - Getting a set into Ableton in the first place → [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton > Export your set, rehearse and edit it in Ableton, drop the one file back on the setlist — and update each arrangement or spin up new versions, your call, song by song. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton The best part of rehearsal is when the whole show tightens up at once — a mute here, a re-cut chorus there, a couple of songs reordered. With Pliris you don't have to carry all that back into the app song by song. You drop **one file** on the setlist, and it lands everywhere. ## The round-trip 1. **Export your set to Ableton.** From the setlist, export the show as a Live set — see [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton). 2. **Rehearse and edit it.** Work the set in Ableton like you always would. Change whatever needs changing, across as many songs as you like. 3. **Drop it back.** Drag that same `.als` onto the **setlist page**. A **Drop .als to update this setlist** overlay appears; let go and Pliris reads the file. ![Dropping a set's Ableton file back onto the setlist page.](/help-assets/setlist-als-drop.png) ## Choose what happens, song by song Pliris matches each song in the file to the songs in your set, then shows you what changed in each one — and lets you decide what to do with it. There are two kinds of change, with different options: **Clip-level changes** — mutes, mix, moved or deactivated clips: | Option | What it does | | --- | --- | | **Update arrangement** *(default)* | Updates the existing arrangement in place — a new version on its history. | | **Leave unchanged** | Skips this song. | **Structural changes** — sections added, removed, or reordered: | Option | What it does | | --- | --- | | **New arrangement** *(default)* | Creates a *new* arrangement of the song and swaps it into the set, leaving the original untouched. You can rename it right there. | | **Overwrite existing** | Applies the change to the existing arrangement instead. | | **Leave unchanged** | Skips this song. | Why the split? A muted track is clearly the *same* arrangement, tweaked — so the default updates it. Re-cutting the sections often means you've built a genuinely different version (a radio edit, a short version), so the default protects the original and makes a new one. Either default is one click to change. ![The per-song review, showing update-existing and new-arrangement choices.](/help-assets/setlist-als-update-modal.png) ## Reorder, and confirm If you moved songs around in Ableton, Pliris notices — **Song order changed** — and offers to match your set's order to the file. Leave it on to reorder, turn it off to keep your current order. When it all looks right, click the confirm button at the bottom of the review. Its label tells you exactly what's about to happen — usually **Apply to 3 songs** (however many you're changing), with **+ reorder** on the end when the running order changes too. If the *only* thing changing is the order, it reads **Reorder & snapshot**. Pliris applies every choice in one pass, reorders the set if you asked it to, and you're done — each updated song's on-page player reflects the new version immediately. ## Everything's saved The set gets a version, and so does every arrangement you updated — all in **[Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history)**. So a big rehearsal rework is completely reversible: if a change doesn't survive the next run-through, restore the version from before. ## Good to know - **Songs are matched by name, then order.** If a song in the file doesn't match anything in the set (or vice versa), Pliris flags it as unmatched rather than guessing. - **New arrangements are named for you.** A forked arrangement gets a suggested name you can edit before you confirm. - **You need edit access** — **manage** on the band (or band admin). - **Nothing changes until you confirm.** The review is read-only; the confirm button (**Apply to N songs**, or **Reorder & snapshot** if you're only reordering) is the only thing that writes. ## Frequently asked questions ### Will dropping an .als on my setlist overwrite my arrangements automatically? No. Nothing changes until you confirm — the per-song review is read-only, and the confirm button is the only thing that writes. It reads **Apply to N songs** (plus **+ reorder** if the order changed), or **Reorder & snapshot** when you're only reordering. For every changed song you choose whether to update the existing arrangement, create a new one, or leave it unchanged. ### What happens if I changed a song's sections in Ableton? For structural changes — sections added, removed, or reordered — the default is to create a *new* arrangement and swap it into the set, leaving the original untouched (you can rename it right there). You can switch to overwriting the existing arrangement or leaving the song unchanged with one click. ### How does Pliris match the songs in the file to the songs in my set? Songs are matched by name, then order. If a song in the file doesn't match anything in the set (or vice versa), Pliris flags it as unmatched rather than guessing. ### Does Pliris reorder my setlist to match the Ableton file? Only if you let it. When Pliris detects that the song order changed, it offers to match your set's order to the file — leave the option on to reorder, or turn it off to keep your current order. ### Can I undo a set-wide update from Ableton? Yes. The set gets a version and so does every arrangement you updated, all in [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history) — so a big rehearsal rework is completely reversible by restoring the version from before. ## Where to go next - Build the set, export it and update it, start to finish (with the course lesson) → [Building a Set and Updating It from Ableton](/docs/building-a-set-and-updating-it-from-ableton). - One song at a time → [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). - Getting the set into Ableton → [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton). - Every version, and how to restore → [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # What Gets Imported When You Update from Ableton > Dropping an .als on an arrangement updates structure, tempo, mix, and clip alignment — not your stem audio. Here's exactly what Pliris reads. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/what-gets-imported-when-you-update-from-ableton When a song is **already in Pliris™** and you drop a standalone Ableton **`.als`** on its arrangement, Pliris re-reads the set and updates the arrangement **around** your audio. Your stems stay put — this is not a re-upload and not a re-analyze. Step-by-step UX (drop → review → **Update arrangement**) lives in [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). This article is the field list: what comes in, and what doesn't. ![Review dialog after dropping an .als — sections, tempo, mix, and clip alignment before you confirm.](/help-assets/arrangement-als-update-modal.png) ## What Pliris imports from the `.als` | It reads | What that means | | --- | --- | | **Sections** | Locators renamed, added, removed, or duplicated (shown as before → after when names change) | | **Tempo** | Headline BPM for the arrangement | | **Tempo automation** | Multi-point tempo map / tempo changes across the song | | **Locators** | Locator count and placement that drive the section lane | | **Mix data** | Track **volumes** and **mutes** matched to your stems | | **Stem clip alignment** | Clips you **moved**, **trimmed**, or **deactivated** in Live (matched by track name) | | **Click length** | Click end / length in beats when the set defines it | | **Time signature** | When the set's meter differs from what's on the arrangement | | **Cues programming** | Cue placement you changed in Live | | **Click programming** | Click changes you made in Live | The review dialog speaks plain English so you can spot a stray rename or tempo jump before anything is written. When it looks right, click **Update arrangement**. ## What does *not* get replaced - **Stem audio files** — no new WAV/MP3 upload; no analysis credits for a structure-only `.als` drop. - **Your catalog identity** — song title and band membership stay as they are in Pliris unless you edit them separately. - **Click sound, cue voice and click subdivision** — at the time of writing these are stored with the song, but they don't play in the Pliris player or come back in the re-export yet. Cue **placement** does come back. See [Re-importing Your Ableton Edits](/docs/re-importing-your-ableton-edits). - **A full project zip's worth of new samples** — that's the *first import* path ([Importing a Song from Ableton Live](/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live)), not the mid-rehearsal update. Need new audio? Use **Upload** / [replace stems](/docs/replacing-stems-and-re-analyzing). Need the whole project the first time? Zip after **Collect All and Save**. ## Arrangement vs setlist drop | Where you drop | Scope | | --- | --- | | **Arrangement page** | One song — that arrangement updates | | **Setlist page** | Matched songs across the set — see [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton) | ## Safety net Every confirmed drop is stored in [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history) as an **.als import** version. Restore the previous version if the room doesn't like the change — restoring is itself undoable. You need **manage** access on the band (or band admin) to update. ## Frequently asked questions ### Does updating from an Ableton file re-upload my stems? No. A standalone `.als` update changes structure, tempo, mix, and clip alignment only. Stem files already in Pliris stay in place. Bring new audio with Upload or a project zip import. ### What should I look for in the Update arrangement review? Check section renames (before → after), tempo / tempo automation, mutes and volumes, and any clip alignment changes. If a line looks wrong, cancel and fix the set in Ableton before dropping again. ### Will my tempo and count-in change? Tempo (and tempo automation) can update from the file — remember Pliris uses that BPM for click and count-in timing, not to time-stretch audio. Count-in's **Off / 1 bar / 2 bars** preference is set in Pliris on the arrangement page; the import may update click length from the set when present. ### Can I undo an Ableton update? Yes — open **History**, find the **.als import** version (or the one before it), and restore. Restoring writes a new snapshot so you can undo the undo. ## Where to go next - The course walkthrough of the round trip → [Making Rehearsal Edits in Ableton](/docs/making-rehearsal-edits-in-ableton) and [Re-importing Your Ableton Edits](/docs/re-importing-your-ableton-edits). - The drop-and-confirm walkthrough → [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). - First-time project import → [Importing a Song from Ableton Live](/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live). - Tempo lives on the arrangement as metadata (it does not time-stretch stems) → [Bands, Songs, Arrangements, and Setlists](/docs/bands-songs-arrangements-and-setlists). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet) > Pasting lyrics fixes the words only. Timed lyrics and chords come from the Lyrics and Chords option, not from Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections. AbleSet needs that timed pass plus vocal audio. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset AbleSet (and other timed lyric exports) need **timed** lyrics — not just the correct words on the page. This page is the place to check which Analyze option times lyrics, and what paste does instead. ## The two Analyze options Every Analyze surface shows two checkboxes. The labels are the option names: | Option | What you get | What it does not show | | --- | --- | --- | | **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** | Key, tempo, time signature, and song sections | Lyrics | | **Lyrics and Chords** | Lyrics and chords, shown together after this runs | It does not replace key, tempo, time signature, or sections | Paste and edit are a third job, separate from both options: | Job | What it does | What it does not do | | --- | --- | --- | | **Paste / edit lyrics text** | Corrects the **words** | Does **not** add or fix **timing** | | **Lyrics and Chords** | Detects lyrics and chords and places lyrics **in time** | Does not replace word fixes you already made when you only needed a typo fixed | | **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** | Fills key, tempo, time signature, and sections | Does **not** time lyrics | **Each selected option is its own analysis credit charge. Both together is two runs.** **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is 5 credits per minute of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** is 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. Details: [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). Defaults: - On the song-page offer card, **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** starts checked and **Lyrics and Chords** starts unchecked. - On upload, both checkboxes start unchecked until you check one. - Empty **Key**, **Tempo**, or **Time** chips request **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** only. Free and All-Access show the same two options. Plans differ on monthly credits and caps, not on which option exists. ## Paste and edit fix words only If a word is wrong, open the **Lyrics** tab on the arrangement page, click into the line, and correct the text (including pasting a corrected lyric sheet). That updates the **text**. Plain pasted text does **not** create timing. Import with labeled blocks such as **[Verse 1]** can lock words to the arrangement's sections, but that timing is a guess, not precise line timing. Untimed or sparsely timed lyrics still will not drive AbleSet's lyrics track the way a full timed pass does. AbleSet's optional lyrics track only uses songs that already have **timed** lyrics — songs without timed lyrics are skipped. See [The Setlist Management Page](/docs/the-setlist-management-page). ## Timing requires Lyrics and Chords **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not time lyrics. To get time-synced lyrics and the chords that show with them: 1. Upload the audio for the arrangement (stems, and a reference file when the stems have no lead vocal — next section). 2. Check **Lyrics and Chords** on the Analyze surface (upload, or the offer card on the arrangement). Leave **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** unchecked if you only need words and chords. 3. After **Lyrics and Chords** finishes, open **Lyrics** and **Chords**. They show together. Check that lines land with the vocal. 4. If the **words** are wrong but the **timing** is mostly right, edit the text in place. If timing is missing or full of gaps, fix the vocal audio and run **Lyrics and Chords** again. Pasting more plain text does not add timing. **Lyrics and Chords** does not overwrite key, tempo, time signature, sections, or the beat map. Run **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** when those are what you want. ## No lead vocal in the stems — large gaps **Lyrics and Chords** listens for a lead vocal. If your multitracks are instrumental-only (or the lead is missing or too quiet), that option often returns **large gaps** — empty stretches where no lyric lines were detected or timed. 1. Keep your stems as they are for playback and export. 2. Add a **reference** file — the original recording, or a mix that includes the **lead vocal** — **in time** with the multitracks. If the reference is early or late, timing will be wrong. 3. Check **Lyrics and Chords** again so lyrics can be detected from that vocal. 4. Fix any wrong **words** on the **Lyrics** tab if the timing is already good. Stems still play as uploaded. The reference is there so **Lyrics and Chords** can hear the vocal. ## AbleSet checklist 1. The arrangement has **timed** lyrics from **Lyrics and Chords**, with vocal-capable audio (a lead vocal in the stems, or a time-aligned reference). 2. The band's setlist solution is **AbleSet**. See [The Setlist Management Page](/docs/the-setlist-management-page). 3. **Add a lyrics track** is on (Standard or Pro template — not custom templates yet). 4. Re-export the set after lyrics timing is good. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** alone does not satisfy step 1. ## Frequently asked questions ### Does Analyze give me lyrics? Only if you check **Lyrics and Chords**. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** alone produces key, tempo, time signature, and song sections. It does not show lyrics. ### Where do chords come from? They show together with the lyrics after **Lyrics and Chords**, or you type them on the **Chords** tab. ### I ran Analyze and the Lyrics tab is empty. Is that broken? Expected if you only ran **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections**. Check **Lyrics and Chords**, and give it vocal-capable audio (a lead vocal in the stems, or a time-aligned reference). Plain paste does not fill an empty timing pass. ### Do I spend credits twice if I check both options? Yes. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is 5 credits per minute of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** is 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. Both together is two runs. If the balance covers the first charge and not the second, the song page says the lyrics run did not start, and **Lyrics and Chords** stays available to retry. ### Are the Analyze options different on Free and All-Access? No. Free and All-Access offer the same two checkboxes. Plans differ on monthly credits and caps (240 on Free, 1,000 on All-Access), not on whether **Lyrics and Chords** exists. ### AbleSet is missing timed lyrics after Analyze. What do I run? **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not time lyrics, and plain paste does not add timing. Check **Lyrics and Chords** with vocal-capable audio, then re-export. The checklist above is the full path. ### Can I time lyrics by hand instead of Lyrics and Chords? Edit the **text** on the **Lyrics** tab anytime. Timing comes from **Lyrics and Chords**. If timing is empty or gappy, add a vocal reference and run **Lyrics and Chords** again rather than pasting more text. ### Will running Lyrics and Chords wipe word fixes I already made? Run **Lyrics and Chords** again when the **audio** for lyrics was wrong (no vocal, wrong take, misaligned reference). Prefer editing words in place when timing is already good. See [My Song Didn't Analyze Right](/docs/my-song-didnt-analyze-right) and [Replacing Stems and Re-analyzing](/docs/replacing-stems-and-re-analyzing). ## Where to go next - [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems) — the two options on upload and on the offer card - [My Song Didn't Analyze Right](/docs/my-song-didnt-analyze-right) — wrong key, tempo, sections, or words - [ChordPro Chart Export](/docs/chordpro-chart-export) — charts need lyrics or chords from **Lyrics and Chords** or from hand entry - [The Setlist Management Page](/docs/the-setlist-management-page) — AbleSet lyrics track - [Setlist Solutions — Setlist, AbleSet, LIOBOX, Conductor & TAZ](/docs/exporting-your-songs-for-ableset-liobox-and-taz) Stuck on lyrics or AbleSet, click the support bubble in the bottom-right of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Snapshot History — Every Version of Your Work > Pliris saves a version every time you change an arrangement or setlist. See exactly what changed, and restore any version — safely, because restoring is itself undoable. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/snapshot-history There's no **Save Snapshot** button in Pliris™ — and that's the point. Every time you change an arrangement or a setlist, Pliris quietly saves a version of it. Rename a section, regroup your stems, fix a lyric, drop in a new `.als`, reorder a set — each one lands in a history you can scroll back through. If something goes sideways an hour before doors, you can see exactly what changed and put it back. And putting it back is safe: **restoring saves a new version on top, so the restore itself is undoable.** You can never paint yourself into a corner. ![The Snapshot History drawer open on an arrangement, showing the version list.](/help-assets/snapshot-history-arrangement.png) ## Opening the history Look for the **History** button. - **On an arrangement** — in the player toolbar, alongside the other player controls. - **On a setlist** — first button in the toolbar at the top of the set. The **Snapshot History** panel slides in from the right. The page stays live behind it, so you can keep working with it open. > **Pro tip:** History is only available if you can edit. You need **manage** access on the band (or band admin). Members with view or download access won't see the button. ## What gets saved — arrangements You don't have to do anything. A version is saved when you: - **Edit arrangement details.** Right-click (or Edit) changes — key/tempo, sections, stems, cues — land in history as you save them; an Edit-mode sitting still batches into one version when you leave it. - **Drop an `.als` onto the arrangement** to update it from Ableton. - **Edit lyrics, chords, MIDI cues, voice cues, or notes.** - **Upload stems**, or when **analysis finishes**. ## What gets saved — setlists - A **baseline** the first time you open a setlist that has no history yet. - An **auto-checkpoint** about **10 seconds after you stop editing** — or when you close the tab or navigate away. Pliris won't write a version if nothing actually changed. - When you **drop an `.als` onto the setlist** and confirm the review. A setlist version records **which arrangements are in the set and what order they're in** — not what's inside each arrangement. Every arrangement keeps its own separate history. So restoring a setlist puts the running order back; it doesn't undo edits you made inside a song. ![The Snapshot History drawer open on a setlist.](/help-assets/snapshot-history-setlist.png) ## Update from Ableton, mid-rehearsal History is what makes the fastest thing in Pliris safe. You can edit in Ableton during rehearsal and push it straight to the page — and because every push is a version, you can always roll it back. **One arrangement.** Change a song in Ableton — mute a track, deactivate a clip, duplicate a chorus — and drop the `.als` onto its arrangement page. Pliris shows you exactly what it read, you click **Update arrangement**, and the on-page player updates in place. No re-upload. → [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). **Your whole set.** Export your setlist to Ableton, rehearse it, edit across songs, and drop that one set file back on the setlist page. Pliris matches each song and shows you what changed — and for each one you choose what happens: | What changed in the song | Your options | | --- | --- | | **Clip-level** — mutes, mix, clip placement | **Update arrangement** (updates the existing one) · **Leave unchanged** | | **Structural** — sections added, removed, or reordered | **New arrangement** (creates a fresh one and swaps it into the set) · **Overwrite existing** · **Leave unchanged** | Confirm — the button reads **Apply to N songs** (plus **+ reorder** if the order changed) — and Pliris applies every choice in one pass. → [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton). ![The setlist Ableton-update review, with per-song options to update the existing arrangement or create a new one.](/help-assets/setlist-als-update-modal.png) Every one of those updates lands in the arrangement's history (and the set's), so if a rehearsal idea doesn't land, you restore the version from before it. ## Reading the history Newest is at the top. Each row is a version, tagged with where it came from: | Label | What it means | | --- | --- | | **Current** | The version you're looking at right now. | | **Manual edit** | Arrangement details you changed (right-click or Edit). | | **.als import** | An Ableton file was dropped in. | | **Checkpoint** | A saved point in a setlist's editing session. | | **Baseline** | The very first version — where the history starts. | | **Auto** | A quiet, routine save. Shown as a one-liner so it stays out of your way. | ### Seeing exactly what changed Click the chevron on any row (**Show changes**) and it expands to show a plain-English diff — only the things that actually moved: - **Arrangements:** Sections, Tempo, Tempo map, Length, Key, Time sigs, Locators, Click, Mix, Stem alignment, Stem groups, MIDI cues, Voice cues, Lyrics, Chords, Notes, LTC. - **Setlists:** Songs added or removed, and **Order changed** / **Moved** when you've re-run the set. Renames show as a before-and-after, e.g. `Chorus 1 → Chorus`, so you can spot the one thing you didn't mean to touch. ## Restoring a version 1. Find the version you want and click **Restore this version**. 2. Pliris asks you to confirm — *"Restore this version? It's saved as a new snapshot on top — so this is fully undoable."* 3. Click **Confirm restore**. You'll get a **Restored** confirmation, and a new version appears at the top of the history mirroring the state you went back to. Nothing is ever overwritten or thrown away. The version you restored *from* is still sitting in the history, so if you change your mind, restore that one instead. > **One exception worth knowing:** restoring a setlist puts back its songs, order, description, and LTC start hour — but it **does not rename the setlist**. That's deliberate, so a restore can't silently change your setlist's name and link. ## Good to know - **It's on for everyone.** Snapshot History isn't a beta or a paid add-on. If you can edit, you have it. - **Nothing to turn on, nothing to remember.** There's no "save version" step to forget before a show. - **Restoring is not destructive.** It moves forward, never back. A restore is just another version. - **Versions can't be deleted individually.** A history goes away only if you delete the arrangement or setlist it belongs to. - **Naming a version** isn't available in the web app yet — versions are identified by what changed and when. ## Frequently asked questions ### Do I have to save versions manually in Pliris? No. There's no Save Snapshot button — Pliris automatically saves a version every time you change an arrangement or a setlist, so there's nothing to turn on and nothing to remember before a show. ### Can I undo a restore if I picked the wrong version? Yes. Restoring saves the restored state as a new version on top of the history, so the restore itself is fully undoable — the version you restored from is still in the history, and you can restore that one instead. ### Why can't I see the History button? Snapshot History is only available if you can edit — you need **manage** access on the band (or band admin). Members with view or download access won't see the History button. ### Does restoring a setlist version undo edits inside its songs? No. A setlist version records which arrangements are in the set and their order, not what's inside each arrangement — every arrangement keeps its own separate history, so restoring a setlist puts the running order back without undoing edits made inside a song. ### Is Snapshot History a paid or beta feature? No. Snapshot History is on for everyone — if you can edit an arrangement or setlist, you have it, with no beta toggle or paid add-on. ## Where to go next - Editing arrangements in Ableton? See [Updating an Arrangement from Ableton](/docs/updating-an-arrangement-from-ableton). - Reworking a whole set? See [Updating Your Set's Arrangements from Ableton](/docs/updating-your-set-from-ableton). - New to setlists? See [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). - Getting stems in? See [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). - Working from Ableton? See [Importing a Song from Ableton Live](/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live) and [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # Exporting a ChordPro Chart > Download your song's lyrics and chords as a .cho file. Those come from the Lyrics and Chords option, or from hand entry — not from Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections. Category: Songs & Setlists URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/chordpro-chart-export Your band needs charts. Lyrics and chords in Pliris™ come from the **Lyrics and Chords** option (shown together after it runs), or from what you type on the arrangement. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not show them. Export what you have as a **ChordPro** file instead of typing a chart in another app. The result is a plain-text `.cho` file that opens in any app that reads the [ChordPro format](https://www.chordpro.org/chordpro/chordpro-cheat_sheet/). ## Why this matters The chart your band reads and the set they're playing to come from the same source. Change the arrangement, re-export, and the chart matches — instead of a separate document that quietly drifts out of date. ## How to export one 1. Open the song's arrangement. 2. Open the **download** dialog. 3. Tick **ChordPro chart** (`.cho · lyrics + chords`). 4. Download. The file is named after the song and the arrangement — `Song Title - Arrangement Name.cho` — so exports from two arrangements of the same song don't overwrite each other. The option only becomes available once the arrangement actually has lyrics or chords on it. If it's greyed out, check **Lyrics and Chords** (with a lead vocal or a time-aligned reference), or add chords by hand on the arrangement page. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** will not turn it on. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). > **Note:** the ChordPro export is currently marked **beta** in the download dialog. It works, but expect it to keep improving. ## What's in the file A header block carrying what Pliris knows about the arrangement: ``` {title: Song Title} {subtitle: Arrangement Name} {key: A} {tempo: 120} {time: 4/4} ``` `key`, `tempo` and `time` are only written when the arrangement has them set — a song you haven't analyzed or filled in yet simply exports without those lines. Then the lyrics, with chords placed inline in standard ChordPro brackets, directly before the word they land on: ``` [Am]Something I can [F]dance to ``` Chords that fall **between** lyric lines — intros, turnarounds, instrumental sections — are written on their own line as bare chord markers. Any chords left over after the final lyric are grouped at the end under `{comment: Outro}`. ## How chords get placed For each word in a lyric line, Pliris finds the most recent chord whose start time falls at or before that word, and inserts it there. Lyric timings and chord timings from **Lyrics and Chords** follow the audio, so the chart lines up with that pass rather than with a pasted sheet that has no timing. Where a chord has several spellings available, the export prefers the simple pop spelling (`Em`, `C`, `G/B`) and falls back through the other spellings if that one is missing. Silence — the "no chord" marker — is skipped rather than printed. ## Known limitations - **Lines without timing are dropped.** The export reads each lyric line's start time; a line that has no timing on it won't appear in the `.cho` file. Pasting words does not add timing. If lines are missing, run **Lyrics and Chords** with vocal-capable audio. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). - **Lyrics or chords are enough on their own.** You don't need both to export, but you need at least one. An arrangement with neither can't produce a chart. - **The chart is a snapshot.** Editing the arrangement afterwards doesn't update a `.cho` you already downloaded — re-export to pick the changes up. ## Frequently asked questions ### What file format does the Pliris ChordPro export use? It exports a plain-text `.cho` file in standard [ChordPro format](https://www.chordpro.org/chordpro/chordpro-cheat_sheet/), which any ChordPro-compatible chart app can open. The file is named `Song Title - Arrangement Name.cho`, so exports from two arrangements of the same song don't overwrite each other. ### Why is the ChordPro chart option greyed out in the download dialog? The option only becomes available once the arrangement has lyrics or chords on it. Check **Lyrics and Chords**, or add chords by hand on the arrangement page. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not show lyrics. You need at least one of lyrics or chords — an arrangement with neither can't produce a chart. ### Why are some lyric lines missing from my exported chart? The export reads each lyric line's start time, and a line with no timing on it is skipped. That's the usual cause of missing lines. Timing comes from **Lyrics and Chords**, not from pasting text and not from **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections**. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ### Do I need both lyrics and chords to export a ChordPro chart? No. Either one on its own is enough. A chords-only arrangement exports its chord markers, and a lyrics-only arrangement exports the words — you just need at least one of the two present. ### Does the exported chart update when I edit the arrangement? No. The `.cho` file is a snapshot taken at the moment you download it. Edit the arrangement afterwards and you need to re-export to pick the changes up. ## Related - [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset) — **Lyrics and Chords** is what fills lyrics and chords - [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems) — the two Analyze checkboxes and what each charges - [How to Use the Song Arrangement Page](/docs/using-the-song-arrangement-page) — editing lyrics and chords before you export - [What's in an Exported Ableton Project](/docs/what-is-in-an-exported-ableton-project) --- # Bulk Uploading a Folder of Songs > Put each song's stems in its own folder, then in Files choose Upload, Bulk import, Folder of songs. Pliris creates one song and arrangement per folder, with optional analysis. Keep the page open until it finishes. Category: Files App URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/bulk-uploading-a-folder-of-songs You don't have to upload a catalog one song at a time. Give Pliris a folder of song folders and it creates every song at once: each folder becomes a song, and its audio files become that song's stems. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Bulk upload a folder of songs](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/bulk-upload-a-folder-of-songs)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## Before you start - Put each song's stems in **its own folder**, all inside one parent folder. A ZIP of the parent folder works too. - **Name the folders the way you want the songs named.** You can rename during the import, but it's quicker beforehand. ![A parent folder with one folder per song.](/help-assets/bulk-upload-01-folder-per-song.png) ## Import the folder 1. Go to **Files** ([files.fromstudiotostage.com](https://files.fromstudiotostage.com)) and click **Upload**, then **Bulk import**, then **Folder of songs**. ![Bulk import: Folder of songs, Ableton Live set, or Paste a link.](/help-assets/bulk-upload-02-bulk-import-options.png) 2. Choose the band the songs belong to. ![Choosing the band.](/help-assets/bulk-upload-03-choose-band.png) 3. Click **Choose folder** (or **Choose ZIP**), pick the parent folder and click **Upload**. ![Choose a folder or a ZIP.](/help-assets/bulk-upload-04-choose-folder-or-zip.png) 4. Keep **a folder of songs** selected (choose **one song** only if everything belongs to a single song). 5. Check each song's **name** and **arrangement** name, and rename where needed. Untick any song you don't want to import. ![One row per song, with its arrangement and file count.](/help-assets/bulk-upload-05-name-songs.png) 6. Files that aren't audio (such as .DS_Store) are listed as **ignored** and won't upload. 7. Choose analysis. For stems we suggest **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** (about 20 credits), plus **Lyrics and Chords** (about 60 credits) if you want them. Each option is its own charge and runs once for every arrangement imported. See [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). ![Ignored files and the analysis options.](/help-assets/bulk-upload-06-ignored-files-and-analysis.png) 8. Click **Import** (for example **Import 10 songs**). ## While it imports A progress list shows each song uploading, waiting or done. **Keep the page open** until it finishes. Each song appears in the band as soon as it's done, so you can open finished songs in the Bands app while the rest upload. ![The import progress list.](/help-assets/bulk-upload-07-import-progress.png) ![A finished song already in the Bands app.](/help-assets/bulk-upload-08-first-song-ready.png) When it's done, a summary shows the songs, arrangements and files created. Processing finishes in the background, so you can click **Close**. ![The import summary.](/help-assets/bulk-upload-09-import-complete.png) ![An imported song in the Bands app.](/help-assets/bulk-upload-10-song-in-bands-app.png) Already have the songs in an Ableton Live set? See [Importing a Whole Ableton Live Set](/docs/importing-a-whole-ableton-live-set). Stems in Dropbox, Google Drive or another cloud? See [Importing Stems from Cloud Storage](/docs/importing-stems-from-cloud-storage). For other ways in, see [Ways to Get Songs into Pliris](/docs/ways-to-get-songs-into-pliris). Moving a very large catalog and need a hand? Contact support. We can help you plan the import. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I upload many songs to Pliris at once? Put each song's stems in its own folder, then in Files choose **Upload**, **Bulk import**, **Folder of songs**, and pick the parent folder. ### Can I bulk import a ZIP? Yes. Choose **Choose ZIP** instead of **Choose folder**. Each folder inside the ZIP becomes a song. ### Can I leave the page while a bulk import runs? Keep it open until the import finishes. Songs that are already done appear in the band straight away. ### Why were some files ignored? Only audio files upload. System and project files, such as .DS_Store, are skipped. ### Can I skip some songs in the folder? Yes. Untick them in the import list before you click Import. --- # Importing a Whole Ableton Live Set > Import a multi-song Ableton Live set in one go from Files: Upload, Bulk import, Ableton Live set. Each locator becomes a song, with its stems, tempo, sections, lyrics and MIDI cues, plus the key when it's in the song's name. Analysis is usually unnecessary. Category: Files App URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/importing-a-whole-ableton-live-set If your show already lives in one Ableton Live set, you can bring the whole thing into a band at once. Pliris makes **one song per locator** and reads each song's stems, tempo and sections from the set. The key comes across when it's in the song's name (for example *Give Up D 166*). > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Import a whole Ableton Live set](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/import-a-whole-ableton-live-set)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## Before you start - **A locator at the start of each song.** Plain names, Setlist, AbleSet, LIOBOX, Conductor and TAZ formats all work. - **Full-length rendered stems.** - **All samples in the project folder.** In Ableton, choose **File → Collect All and Save** first. ![The Live set in Ableton.](/help-assets/live-set-import-01-ableton-set.png) ![Ableton's Collect All and Save.](/help-assets/live-set-import-02-collect-all-and-save.png) ## Import the set 1. Go to **Files** ([files.fromstudiotostage.com](https://files.fromstudiotostage.com)), click **Upload**, then **Bulk import**, then **Ableton Live set**. ![Bulk import: Folder of songs, Ableton Live set, or Paste a link.](/help-assets/live-set-import-03-bulk-import-live-set.png) 2. Choose the band to import into. 3. Drop your project folder (the folder with your .als and its Samples folder), or click **Choose project folder**. A zipped project works too: click **Choose ZIP**. A folder import reads the set at the top of the folder, and Ableton's Backup copies are ignored. ![The import dialog: drop your Ableton project folder or choose a ZIP.](/help-assets/live-set-import-04-choose-project-folder.png) 4. If your browser asks to let the site view and copy files, click **Allow**. ![The browser's file access prompt.](/help-assets/live-set-import-05-allow-file-access.png) 5. Check the songs. Each locator is listed with its tempo, key and number of stems. Edit names or untick songs you don't want. Nothing is created until you import. 6. Leave analysis unticked unless you need it. Tempo and sections already come from the set, so **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is usually unnecessary. If the set has a lyrics track, you can skip **Lyrics and Chords** too. 7. Click **Import** (for example **Import 10 songs**). ![The detected songs, one per locator, with the analysis options unticked.](/help-assets/live-set-import-06-songs-per-locator.png) 8. Keep the tab open while it imports. Progress shows the song and stem it's working on. ![Import progress: Song 1 of 10, Stem 2 of 7.](/help-assets/live-set-import-07-importing.png) ## What comes across - **Songs:** one per locator, in the band you picked. - **Tempo and sections**, matching your Live set exactly, and the **key** when it's in the song's name. If it isn't, set the key on the song page or run **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections**. - **Lyrics** from a lyrics track, with their timing. - **MIDI cues**, with an output created for them if you don't have one. ![The imported songs in the band.](/help-assets/live-set-import-08-songs-in-band.png) ![A song whose sections match the Live set.](/help-assets/live-set-import-09-sections-match.png) ![Lyrics imported from the set.](/help-assets/live-set-import-10-lyrics-imported.png) For a single song, see [Importing a Song from Ableton Live](/docs/importing-a-song-from-ableton-live). For a folder of stems per song, see [Bulk Uploading a Folder of Songs](/docs/bulk-uploading-a-folder-of-songs). ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I import my whole Ableton Live set into Pliris at once? Yes. In Files, choose **Upload**, **Bulk import**, **Ableton Live set**, and pick your project folder or ZIP. Each locator becomes a song. ### How does Pliris know where each song starts? From your locators. Put a locator at the start of every song. Plain names, Setlist, AbleSet, LIOBOX, Conductor and TAZ formats all work. ### Do I need to run analysis on an imported Live set? Usually not. Tempo and sections come from the set, and lyrics come from a lyrics track if you have one. ### Some audio is missing after import. Why? The set probably referenced samples outside its project folder. Run **File → Collect All and Save** in Ableton and import again. --- # Importing Stems from Cloud Storage > Paste a Dropbox, Google Drive, OneDrive, SharePoint, or iCloud Drive share link into Files and Pliris pulls the stems in server-side. Nothing uploads over your internet. Then send the drop to a song with Add to arrangement. Category: Files App URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/importing-stems-from-cloud-storage If your stems are already in cloud storage, you don't have to download them and upload them again. Paste a share link into **Files** and Pliris fetches the files server-side, straight into your Inbox. Nothing goes over your internet connection, so a slow or capped connection doesn't matter. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Import stems from cloud storage](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/import-stems-from-cloud-storage)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. Supported: **Dropbox, Google Drive, OneDrive, SharePoint and iCloud Drive** share links. ## Before you start - The link has to be downloadable by **anyone who has it**. If you could send it to a friend and they could download the files without signing in, it will work. - **Password-protected links are fine.** Enter the password in the import dialog. - **Compressed and folder imports that unpack to more than about 4 GB** usually need splitting into smaller shares, or uploading from your computer instead. ## Import a share link 1. Go to **Files** ([files.fromstudiotostage.com](https://files.fromstudiotostage.com)) and click **Upload**, top right. Choose **Add files**. ![The Upload menu in Files, with Add files and Bulk import.](/help-assets/cloud-import-01-upload-menu.png) 2. Choose **Paste a link**. ![Add files: choose This computer or Paste a link.](/help-assets/cloud-import-02-add-files-paste-link.png) 3. Paste your link into **Share link**, add a **password** if the link has one, and click **Start import**. ![The Import from link dialog with a Dropbox share link pasted in.](/help-assets/cloud-import-03-import-from-link.png) 4. Open **Inbox**. The import shows as *Fetching*, then counts files as they're staged. You don't need to stay on the page. ![The Inbox while an import is fetching from Dropbox.](/help-assets/cloud-import-04-inbox-fetching.png) When it finishes, the files arrive as a **drop**: a folder named with the date and time. It also shows who imported it and where it came from (for example **DROPBOX**). ![A finished drop in the Inbox, showing the import date, who imported it, and the Dropbox source.](/help-assets/cloud-import-05-drop-details.png) ## Send the drop to a song Imported files wait in your Inbox until you send them to a song. They aren't in a band yet. 1. Tick the drop's checkbox to select all of its files, then click **Add to arrangement**. ![A drop selected in the Inbox, with the Add to arrangement button.](/help-assets/cloud-import-06-select-drop.png) 2. Choose the **Band**, then an **Existing song** or a **New song**, then an **Existing arrangement** or a **New arrangement** (for example *Default*). 3. Tick the analysis you want. Analysis is never run automatically: - **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** - **Lyrics and Chords** Each option you tick is its own credit charge. See [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). 4. Click **Create & add stems**. ![The Add to arrangement dialog: band, new song, new arrangement, and the two analysis options.](/help-assets/cloud-import-07-add-to-arrangement.png) The stems move from your Inbox into the song, and analysis starts. Key, tempo and time signature come first, then sections. Lyrics take a little longer. ![The new song page while analysis runs.](/help-assets/cloud-import-08-song-analyzing.png) ![The finished song with sections on the timeline.](/help-assets/cloud-import-09-song-sections.png) From here the song works like any other. To edit it, see [Drop Files, Analyze When Ready, Right-Click to Edit](/docs/drop-upload-and-right-click-editing). ## Frequently asked questions ### Does importing use my internet connection? No. Pliris downloads the files from your cloud provider directly. Your connection is only used to paste the link and watch the progress. ### My import fails straight away. Why? Almost always, the link isn't shared publicly. Change the share setting to **Anyone with the link can view** and paste the new link. ### My OneDrive or SharePoint folder link doesn't work. Folder links that open a Microsoft sign-in page won't import. Use **Share → "Anyone with the link can view"** instead. ### Can I import an iCloud Drive folder? Share it as a **.zip file link**. Apple requires an Apple ID to list a folder's contents, so plain folder links can't be read. ### My big .zip won't import. Imports that unpack to more than about 4 GB usually need splitting into smaller shares. You can also upload them from your computer. See [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). ### The files are in Files but not in my band. That's expected. Every import lands in your **Inbox** first. Select the drop and use **Add to arrangement**. ### Lyrics are missing after analysis. **Lyrics and Chords** is a separate option, and it finishes after sections. Check that you ticked it, and give it a few minutes. --- # Requesting Files with an Invite Link > Create an invite link in your Files Inbox and send it to a producer, engineer, or artist. They upload on their own connection, with no Pliris account, and the files land in your Inbox as a drop. Category: Files App URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/requesting-files-with-an-invite-link Need stems from a producer, engineer, or artist? Send them an **invite link** to your Files Inbox. They upload the files on their own internet connection, and the files land in your Inbox, ready to send to a song whenever you are. The person uploading doesn't need a Pliris account. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Request files from someone else](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/request-files-from-someone-else)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## Create an invite link 1. Go to **Files** ([files.fromstudiotostage.com](https://files.fromstudiotostage.com)) and click **Inbox** in the sidebar. 2. Under **Invite links**, click **New invite link**. ![The Inbox, with your invite links and the New invite link button.](/help-assets/requesting-files-01-inbox-invite-links.png) 3. Fill in the details. Everything except the switch is optional: - **Enabled**: turn it off later to revoke access without deleting the link. - **Name**, for example *New Stems for Live Show*. The **link** is built from the name, using lowercase letters, numbers and hyphens only. - **Message**, shown at the top of the upload page. - **What you need**, for example *Multitracks, stage plot, reference mix*. ![The New invite link dialog: name, link, message, and what you need.](/help-assets/requesting-files-02-new-invite-link.png) 4. Choose when it **expires**: **24 hours**, **7 days**, **30 days** or **Never**. Seven days is a good default. It gives them time, and the link doesn't stay open forever. 5. Choose **who can upload**: - **Anyone with the link**: no account needed to send you files. - **Only specific emails**: senders verify their email first. 6. Add a **password** if you want one. 7. Click **Create link**, then copy the link and send it. ![Expiry, who can upload, and an optional password.](/help-assets/requesting-files-03-link-settings.png) ## What the sender sees If the link has a password, they enter it first. ![A password-protected inbox link.](/help-assets/requesting-files-04-protected-inbox.png) Then they see your message, enter their **name** and **email**, and drop files or browse for them. Stems, .zip folders and session files all work. ![The upload page the sender sees.](/help-assets/requesting-files-05-file-request-page.png) They click **Send** and keep the page open while the files upload over their connection. When it finishes, they can send more files if they need to, and you get an email that the files landed. ![Files uploading from the sender's side.](/help-assets/requesting-files-06-sending-files.png) ![The confirmation after the files are sent.](/help-assets/requesting-files-07-files-sent.png) ## Send the drop to a song The files arrive in your Inbox as a **drop**, labelled with the date and time. **Imported by** shows the name the sender typed. Refresh the Inbox if you don't see it yet. ![A new drop in the Inbox, imported by the sender.](/help-assets/requesting-files-08-drop-in-inbox.png) 1. Tick the drop to select its files, then click **Add to arrangement**. 2. Choose the **Band**, then an **Existing song** (for example, to replace its stems) or a **New song**, then an **Existing arrangement** or a **New arrangement**. 3. Tick the analysis you want: **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** (about 20 credits) and **Lyrics and Chords** (about 60 credits). Each is its own charge. See [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). 4. Click **Create & add stems**. ![The Add to arrangement dialog.](/help-assets/requesting-files-09-add-to-arrangement.png) The stems move into your band and analysis starts. Sections, key, tempo and time signature arrive first, then lyrics. ![The finished song with sections, key and tempo.](/help-assets/requesting-files-10-song-analyzed.png) ## Frequently asked questions ### Does the person sending files need a Pliris account? No. With **Anyone with the link**, they only need the link (and the password, if you set one). They enter their name and email on the upload page. ### Whose internet does the upload use? The sender's. The files go from their computer straight to your Inbox. Your connection isn't used. ### How long does an invite link last? You choose: 24 hours, 7 days, 30 days, or never. You can also switch a link off at any time with **Enabled**, without deleting it. ### Can I limit who can upload? Yes. Choose **Only specific emails** so senders have to verify their email, or add a password to the link. ### Why aren't the files in my band yet? Requested files land in your **Inbox** first. Select the drop and use **Add to arrangement** to send them to a song. --- # The Files App > Files is cloud storage built into Pliris at files.fromstudiotostage.com. Upload stems, bulk import songs or a Live Set, request files with an invite link, and share songs for timecoded comments. Everything lands in your Inbox until you send it to a song with Add to arrangement. Category: Files App URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-files-app **Files** is cloud storage built into Pliris. It's where everything comes in: loose stems, folders of songs, an Ableton Live Set, a cloud storage link, or files someone else sends you. Everything lands in your **Inbox** first, and nothing appears in your bands until you send it to a song. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[The Files app: a walkthrough](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/the-files-app-a-walkthrough)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. Go to [files.fromstudiotostage.com](https://files.fromstudiotostage.com). If you're signed in to any Pliris app, you're already signed in to Files. ![All bands in Files, with Inbox, Shared with me and your bands in the sidebar.](/help-assets/files-01-all-bands.png) ## Storage - **Free:** one band, up to 15 songs and about 10 GB of storage. - **All-Access:** 1 TB of storage, unlimited bands and members, and 1,000 credits a month. Your storage used shows at the bottom of the sidebar. ## Upload files Click **Upload** (top right). You get two choices: ![The Upload menu: Add files and Bulk import.](/help-assets/files-02-upload-menu.png) - **Add files:** from **This computer** or **Paste a link**. From your computer you can **Choose files** (loose files, no file limit), **Choose folder** (an Ableton project that isn't zipped) or **Choose ZIP** (a zipped Ableton project). - **Bulk import:** a **Folder of songs** (each folder becomes a song), an **Ableton Live set** (each locator becomes a song) or **Paste a link** (up to 4 GB; the files land in your inbox, and a link doesn't create songs). ![Add files from this computer: Choose files, Choose folder, Choose ZIP.](/help-assets/files-03-this-computer.png) ![Bulk import: Folder of songs, Ableton Live set, Paste a link.](/help-assets/files-04-bulk-import.png) For link imports, see [Importing Stems from Cloud Storage](/docs/importing-stems-from-cloud-storage). For whole catalogs, see [Bulk Uploading a Folder of Songs](/docs/bulk-uploading-a-folder-of-songs) and [Importing a Whole Ableton Live Set](/docs/importing-a-whole-ableton-live-set). ## Your Inbox and drops Every upload, import and request lands in **Inbox** as a **drop**: a group of files labelled with the date and time and who imported it. Files in the Inbox don't appear in Bands or the other Pliris apps until you send them to a song. ![The Inbox, with invite links at the top and drops below.](/help-assets/files-05-inbox.png) ## Request files from someone 1. In **Inbox**, click **New invite link**. 2. Add a name and a message (it's shown at the top of the upload page), and say **what you need**, for example *Stems*. 3. Choose when it **expires**: **24 hours**, **7 days**, **30 days** or **Never**. 4. Choose **who can upload**: **Anyone with the link** (no account needed) or **Only specific emails** (senders verify their email first). 5. Add a **password** if you want one, click **Create link**, and send it. ![The New invite link dialog: expiry, who can upload and password.](/help-assets/files-06-new-invite-link.png) The other person opens the link, enters the password if there is one, adds their name and email, and drops their files. The upload uses **their** internet connection, and the files land in your Inbox. ![The upload page someone sees when they open your invite link.](/help-assets/files-07-request-page.png) ## Browse and share your songs Click a band in the sidebar, then a song, to see its reference mix and stems. Click a file to share only that file, or click **Share song** to share the whole song. ![A song in Files, with the reference mix and its stems.](/help-assets/files-08-song-page.png) In **Share song**, choose: - **Anyone with the link** or **Only people you choose** - When the link **expires** - **Allow download** (when it's off, visitors can stream only) and **Allow comments** (visitors can leave timecoded notes) - An optional **password** and **download limit** Then click **Copy link**. ![The Share song dialog.](/help-assets/files-09-share-song.png) People who open the link can play each file and leave comments tied to a timestamp. Comments land on the song in Files, where you can mark them resolved. ![The shared song page a visitor sees.](/help-assets/files-10-shared-song-page.png) ## Send a drop to a song 1. In **Inbox**, tick the drop to select all of its files, then click **Add to arrangement**. ![A drop selected in the Inbox, with Add to arrangement.](/help-assets/files-11-drop-selected.png) 2. Choose the **Band**, then **Existing song** or **New song**, then **Existing arrangement** or **New arrangement** (for example *Default*). 3. Tick the analysis you want. Each option is its own credit charge: **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** (about 20 credits) and **Lyrics and Chords** (about 60 credits) for a typical 4-minute song. See [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). 4. Click **Create & add stems**. ![The Add to arrangement dialog.](/help-assets/files-12-add-to-arrangement.png) The stems move on the server. Nothing is downloaded to your computer or uploaded again. The song appears in that band in the Bands app, and analysis runs. ## Frequently asked questions ### Where do I find the Pliris Files app? Go to files.fromstudiotostage.com. If you're signed in to any Pliris app, you're already signed in. ### Why aren't my uploaded files showing up in my band? Everything you upload lands in your **Inbox** first. Select the drop and click **Add to arrangement** to send it to a song. ### How do I get stems from a bandmate or producer? Create an **invite link** in your Inbox and send it. They upload with their own internet connection, and the files land in your Inbox. No account is needed if you choose **Anyone with the link**. ### Can people comment on my songs without a Pliris account? Yes. Share the song with **Allow comments** on. Anyone with the link can play the files and leave timecoded comments. ### How much storage do I get in Files? Free accounts get about 10 GB with one band and up to 15 songs. All-Access includes 1 TB. --- # Finding Your Way Around Settings > The Settings rail is split by how far a change reaches: Band, Account, You, and Labs. Here is what lives where, who can change it, and which pages to open for routing, exports, timing, and your own profile. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/finding-your-way-around-settings Settings is one page with a rail down the left. Every row on that rail is a page, and the rail is grouped by **how far a change reaches**, not by feature. Read the uppercase headers first and you will always know what a switch is about to affect. ![The Settings rail, grouped into Global routing, Template routing, Exports, Click & timing, App, Account, You and Labs.](/help-assets/settings-rail.png) ## Opening Settings Open a band, click your avatar in the top right, and choose **Band settings**. (**Profile**, **Members** and **Plan & billing** in the same menu open straight to those pages.) Settings is for admins: you need to be an admin on the band, or an admin on the account that owns it. Everyone else sees the player and the songs, but not this menu entry. Two kinds of admin reach Settings, and they do not have the same reach inside it: - **Band admins** can change everything that is scoped to their band: routing, exports, timing, and the app view. - **Account admins** can do all of that on every band, plus the things that are account-wide: creating custom stem groups and changing their colors, managing members, and billing. Where a control is account-admin only, the page says so instead of showing a control that will not save. ## The four scopes ### Band The band switcher sits at the top of the rail. Everything under **Band** applies to the band shown there, and only to it. An account with several bands can route, export, and count in differently for each one. | Group on the rail | Pages | What they decide | | --- | --- | --- | | **Global routing** | [Stems](/docs/the-stems-page), [Stem groups](/docs/the-stem-groups-page) | Which stem group each stem name belongs to, and which return each group lands on. Saved per band. | | **Template routing** | [Template](/docs/the-template-page), [Returns](/docs/the-returns-page), [Global tracks](/docs/the-global-tracks-page) | The Ableton Live Set shape you export into, and what its return and header tracks are called, where they output, and what feeds them. Saved per band **and** per template. | | **Exports** | [Set options](/docs/the-set-options-page), [Setlist management](/docs/the-setlist-management-page) | The gap and colors between songs in a built set, and which setlist system your locators are written for. | | **Click & timing** | [Song defaults](/docs/the-song-defaults-page), [LTC](/docs/the-ltc-page) | Auto-align, auto-generated click and cues, count-in length, and how LTC values are assigned. | | **App** | [App view](/docs/the-app-view-page) | Which features show on arrangement pages for this band. | The split between **Global routing** and **Template routing** matters when you change templates. A guitar is a guitar whatever you export into, so "this stem name is a Guitar" travels with the band. "Guitars land on return C" cannot mean the same thing in a 4-return template and a 12-return one, so destinations are stored against the template. [Settings and Routing](/docs/settings-and-routing) walks the whole model. ### Account **Members** and **Plan & billing** apply to the whole account and every band in it. The band switcher is disabled here so switching bands cannot look like it changed something. Plan & billing is shown to account admins only. See [Account, You and Labs](/docs/account-you-and-labs-settings). ### You **Profile** is yours: your name, avatar, and login email. It follows you into every band and every account you belong to. ### Labs **Beta features** are early-access features you can opt into per band on a paid plan or an active Guest Pass. They stay off until you turn them on. ## Which page do I want? | You want to… | Open | | --- | --- | | Fix a stem that landed on the wrong return | **Stems**, then **Stem groups**, then **Returns**, in that order. The first page that surprises you is the answer. | | Make a group for one player's parts | **Stem groups** → [Creating Custom Stem Groups](/docs/creating-custom-stem-groups) | | Set routing up before any audio arrives | **Stems** → **Add stem name** → [Pre-Routing Stems to Groups](/docs/pre-routing-stems-to-groups) | | Send one part to a second return, like a monitor mix | **Returns** → [Routing One Stem to Multiple Return Tracks](/docs/routing-one-stem-to-multiple-return-tracks) | | Rename a return, change its output, or take it out of the export | **Returns** → [Routing Return Tracks](/docs/routing-return-tracks) | | Change which template you export into | **Template** | | Change the count-in, or turn auto click and cues off | **Song defaults** | | Switch to AbleSet, LIOBOX, Conductor, or TAZ locators | **Setlist management** | | Hide Lyrics or MIDI cues from the song page | **App view** | | Invite someone or change what they can see | **Members** | ## Frequently asked questions ### Where is Settings in Pliris? Open a band, click your avatar in the top right, and choose **Band settings**. The page has a rail down the left with one row per settings page, grouped into Band, Account, You, and Labs. ### Why can't I see Settings? Settings is for admins. You need to be a band admin on the band you are viewing, or an admin on the account that owns it. Ask an account admin to change your role from **Settings → Members**. ### Do band settings apply to all my bands? No. Everything under the **Band** header applies to the band shown in the band switcher at the top of the rail. Switch bands to change another one. Members, billing, and your profile apply everywhere. ### Why is the band switcher grayed out on some pages? Members, Plan & billing, and Profile are not band-scoped, so switching bands would change nothing there. The switcher is disabled on those pages so a switch cannot look like a no-op. ### What is the difference between Global routing and Template routing? Global routing is which stem group each stem name belongs to, and it is saved per band. Template routing is where those groups land, what the returns and header tracks are called, and where they output, and it is saved per band and per template. Change templates and your groups stay put while the destinations switch to that template's own set. --- # Organizing Stems with Custom Stem Groups > Split a crowded group (like nine guitar parts in Guitar) into custom stem groups: rename stems everywhere, pre-route names before they're uploaded, create and hide groups, and route each stem to its group. Future uploads sort themselves. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/organizing-guitars-with-custom-stem-groups Stem groups decide how stems are organized on the song page, and they're what you later route to return tracks in your Ableton export. When one group gets crowded, for example an acoustic guitar and nine electric parts all in **Guitar**, split it into custom groups. A stem can only be in one group at a time. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Organize stems with stem groups](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/organize-stems-with-stem-groups)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ![A crowded Guitar group on the song page.](/help-assets/stem-groups-01-guitar-group-on-song-page.png) ## Move a single stem on one song On the song page, right-click a stem and choose **Move to group**. If a group ends up empty on that song, it disappears. ![Right-click menu with Move to group.](/help-assets/stem-groups-02-move-to-group.png) ## Rename a stem everywhere 1. Click your icon (top right), then **Band settings**, then **Stems** under *Global routing*. 2. Click a stem name and type a new one, then press **Enter**. Every stem with that name is renamed at once (for example **AG** becomes **Acoustic Guitar**). ![Settings → Band settings.](/help-assets/stem-groups-03-band-settings.png) ![Renaming a stem on Settings → Stems.](/help-assets/stem-groups-04-rename-stem.png) ## Pre-route stems before they're uploaded On **Stems**, click **Add stem name**, type the name (for example *Will's Guitar*), choose a stem group and click **Add stem name**. Any future upload with that name goes straight to that group. ![The Add a stem name form.](/help-assets/stem-groups-05-add-stem-name.png) ## Create custom stem groups 1. Open **Settings → Stem groups**. 2. Under **Create custom stem group**, type a name (for example *Acoustic Guitars*) and click **Create**. Repeat for *Electric Guitars*. Built-in groups can't be deleted. Custom groups have three icons: the **eye** hides the group from song pages, the **pencil** renames it and the **trash** deletes it. Custom groups belong to one band. ![Creating a custom stem group.](/help-assets/stem-groups-06-create-custom-group.png) ### Hide a group Click the eye icon to hide a group, for example a 911 (emergency) vocal. It's marked **Hidden**: it doesn't show on song pages, but it's still in your Ableton exports. ![Custom groups, with 911 Vocal hidden.](/help-assets/stem-groups-07-hidden-group.png) ## Route stems into your groups Back on **Stems**, open each stem's **Stem group** picker and choose the new group. There's no batch edit yet, so set each stem individually. ![Choosing a stem group for a stem.](/help-assets/stem-groups-08-route-stems.png) Open the song again: the new groups replace the old one, and future uploads sort the same way. ![Acoustic Guitars and Electric Guitars on the song page.](/help-assets/stem-groups-09-new-groups-on-song-page.png) Related: [How to Create Custom Stem Groups](/docs/creating-custom-stem-groups), [How to Pre-Route Stems to Groups](/docs/pre-routing-stems-to-groups), [Settings → Stems](/docs/the-stems-page), [How to Route Return Tracks](/docs/routing-return-tracks). ## Frequently asked questions ### Can a stem be in more than one stem group? No. Each stem is in one stem group at a time. Route groups to returns if you need a stem in more than one place in Ableton. ### How do I rename a stem on every song at once? Open Settings → Stems, click the stem's name, type the new name and press Enter. ### How do I send future uploads to the right group automatically? Set the stem's group on Settings → Stems, or use Add stem name to pre-route a name before it's uploaded. ### What does hiding a stem group do? It hides the group from song pages. The stems are still in your Ableton exports. ### Why can't I delete the Guitar group? Built-in groups can't be deleted. Only custom groups have a delete icon. --- # Routing Global Tracks in Your Ableton Export > Global tracks are the header tracks at the top of every exported song and set. Choose each one's output, whether it loads on or muted, set its color or a shared color, use Sends only, and feed global tracks into return tracks. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/routing-global-tracks-in-your-ableton-export Global tracks (also called header tracks) are the tracks at the top of every song and the full set in your Ableton export: song, tempo, click, cues, markers and, on bigger templates, LTC and reference tracks. **Settings → Global tracks** controls where each one outputs, whether it loads on or muted, and its color. Changes apply to every future export for that band. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Route your global tracks](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/route-your-global-tracks)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## Which global tracks you get The list comes from your band's template: - **Standard:** Songs, Click, Tempo, Cues, Markers. - **Pro:** Song, Sections, Tempo, Click, Cues, Song Title Slate, LTC, LTC Render, Ref Track, Ref Vox, 911 Vox. To change it, pick another template under **Settings → Template**. See [Switching Your Ableton Export Template](/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template). ![The header tracks at the top of a song in Ableton Live.](/help-assets/global-tracks-01-header-tracks-in-ableton.png) ![Settings → Global tracks on the Standard template.](/help-assets/global-tracks-02-global-tracks-page.png) ## Change a global track 1. Open your band's **Settings** and click **Global tracks**, under *Template routing*. 2. For each track you can: - **Set its color:** click the color dot. It's the Ableton track color. - **Turn it on or mute it:** the switch shows whether the track sounds when the set opens. On means the track is on; turn it off and the label reads **Muted**, so the track loads muted. - **Change its output:** open the picker on the right and choose **Main**, a stereo pair (1/2, 3/4…) or a single channel. Routing shown in gray is what the template uses. A value you pick overrides it for this band. ![Choosing a color for one header track.](/help-assets/global-tracks-03-track-color.png) ![The on/muted switch on Pro: LTC and REF TRACK read Muted, the other header tracks read On.](/help-assets/global-tracks-04-on-muted-switch.png) ![The output picker for a header track.](/help-assets/global-tracks-05-output-picker.png) ## Use a shared color **Shared color** is the default Ableton color for every header track that doesn't have its own color. Changing it updates those tracks only. Tracks with their own color stay put until you open their color dot and click **Reset**. ![The shared color palette under the header tracks.](/help-assets/global-tracks-06-shared-color-reset.png) ## Sends only, No output and Reset to template The output picker has four options above the outputs list: - **Reset to template:** go back to the template's routing (shown in brackets). - **Sends only:** no main output. The track is heard only through a send to a return track; if nothing sends it anywhere, it's effectively silent. Pro's LTC Render bus works this way. - **No output:** the track doesn't output at all. - **Internal routing…:** route the track to another track in the set. ![The output picker for LTC Render, set to Sends only.](/help-assets/global-tracks-08-sends-only.png) ![Global tracks on the Pro template.](/help-assets/global-tracks-07-pro-template-tracks.png) ## Send global tracks to a return track A global track can have its own output **and** feed a return track through a send. On **Settings → Returns**, global tracks are the pink pills. Click **+** on a return to add one. For example, a Monitor Mix return can take Click, Cues, Slate, Ref Track, Ref Vocals and Songs (each song's master volume). ![The Monitor Mix return fed by global tracks. On Pro it ships muted, so its switch reads Muted.](/help-assets/global-tracks-09-monitor-mix-return.png) Related: [Settings → Global tracks](/docs/the-global-tracks-page), [How to Route Return Tracks](/docs/routing-return-tracks), [Settings → Returns](/docs/the-returns-page). ## Frequently asked questions ### What are global tracks in a Pliris Ableton export? They're the header tracks at the top of every song and the full set, such as song, tempo, click, cues and markers. Pro adds LTC, reference tracks and a song title slate. ### How do I send my click to its own outputs? Open Settings → Global tracks and pick an output for Click, for example 1/2. Every future export uses it. ### Why is a global track silent in Ableton? Check its output. **Sends only** is silent unless the track is sent to a return, and **No output** never plays. ### Can a global track feed a monitor mix? Yes. On Settings → Returns, add the global track (a pink pill) to your monitor-mix return. It keeps its own output too. ### How do I undo my routing changes? Choose **Reset to template** in the track's output picker. To clear every override at once, use Reset to defaults on the Template page. --- # Setting Up Return Tracks for Your Ableton Export > Stems go into stem groups and stem groups go into return tracks. On Settings → Returns, color and rename each return, route unrouted groups, add global tracks or single stems, set outputs, turn returns on or mute them, and check the result in Ableton Live. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/setting-up-return-tracks-for-your-ableton-export Return tracks are where your stems land in the Ableton Live set Pliris exports. The signal flow is simple: **stems go into stem groups, and stem groups go into return tracks**. A stem is in one stem group at a time, but several stem groups can share one return, for example an *Acoustic Guitars* group and an *Electric Guitars* group both on a single Guitars return. Set this up once per band and every export follows it. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Route stem groups to return tracks](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/route-stem-groups-to-return-tracks)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## Open the Returns page 1. Click your icon (top right), then **Band settings**. 2. Under *Template routing*, click **Returns**. Each row is one return: its letter (A, B, C…), color dot, name, what lands on it, whether it is on or muted, and its output. Blue pills are stem groups, gray pills are individual stems, and pink pills are global tracks. ![The Returns page, with the Not routed list at the top.](/help-assets/return-tracks-01-returns-page.png) The returns you see depend on the band's template. Switch to **Pro** on the Template page and the list changes (for example to MONITOR MIX, TONE and LTC RENDER returns). Your changes are saved per band, on the template you're on. See [Switching Your Ableton Export Template](/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template). ![Returns on the Pro template.](/help-assets/return-tracks-02-pro-template-returns.png) ## Color-code and rename returns - **Color:** click the color dot and pick an Ableton color. For example, make drums and percussion pink and guitars brown. The color carries into Live. - **Name:** click the name (*Click to rename*) and type a new one, such as *Electrics* or *Acoustics*. The new name is what you'll see in Live. ![Picking a return color.](/help-assets/return-tracks-03-color-picker.png) ![Renaming a return.](/help-assets/return-tracks-04-rename-return.png) ## Route the Not routed groups **Not routed** at the top lists stem groups that aren't on any return. Stems in those groups get no return track routing when you export. New custom groups always start here, because Pliris doesn't guess where you want them. Drag each group onto a return, or click **+** on the return and add it. For example, drag *Acoustic Guitars* onto Acoustics and *Electric Guitars* onto Electrics. Do this before you export. ![Groups dragged from Not routed onto returns.](/help-assets/return-tracks-06-drag-not-routed.png) ## Add stem groups, global tracks or single stems Click **+** on a return. Under *From* there are three lists: | Choose | What lands on the return | | --- | --- | | **Stem group** | Every stem in that group. | | **Tracks** | A global track from your template, such as Click, Cues, Ref Track or Ref vocals. | | **Specific stem** | Every stem with that name, whatever group it's in (for example *EG 3* if that's always one player's guitar). | ![The + menu: Stem group, Tracks and Specific stem.](/help-assets/return-tracks-05-add-source-menu.png) A global track you add is sent to the return as well. It still plays out of its own output. To take something off a return, click the × on its pill. > **Pro tip:** Build a reference return. Rename a spare return to *Reference*, add the Reference, Lead Vocals, 911 Vocal and Cues groups, then add **Click**, **Ref Track** and **Ref vocals** from **Tracks**. ## Set each return's output Click the output on the right of a row (*1/2* by default). The picker offers **Sends only**, **No output**, **Internal routing…**, **Main** and stereo pairs (1/2, 3/4, 5/6…). For example, keep click and cues on 1/2, send every other return to 3/4, and send Reference to **Main**. There's no bulk edit for outputs yet, so set each row. ![The output picker for a return.](/help-assets/return-tracks-07-output-picker.png) ## Turn a return on or mute it The switch beside each return's output shows whether the return sounds when the exported set opens. **On** means the return is on. Turn the switch off and the label reads **Muted**, so the return loads muted in Live. Every return starts at whatever your template does. On Pro, every return is on except **I (MONITOR MIX)**, which ships muted. If you have turned return I into your own bus, for example renamed it and routed a stem group to it, turn its switch on. Every export from then on loads it unmuted. ![Return I (MONITOR MIX) muted on the Pro template, with the returns around it on.](/help-assets/return-tracks-10-on-muted-switch.png) ## Remove a return or bring it back - Click the **trash** icon to remove a return you don't need. Route its groups to another return first (for example, move BGVs to Aux). - Click **Add return** under the list to bring it back. A return you add back comes with the template's default output, so set its output again. ![Add return under the list.](/help-assets/return-tracks-08-add-return.png) ## Check the result in Ableton Live Export a song and open the set. Check that each stem sends to the returns you chose, that the returns have your colors and names, and that the **I/O** outputs match the Returns page. ![Return tracks and outputs in the exported Live set.](/help-assets/return-tracks-09-ableton-return-outputs.png) Related: [How to Route Return Tracks](/docs/routing-return-tracks), [Settings → Returns](/docs/the-returns-page), [How to Route One Stem to Multiple Return Tracks](/docs/routing-one-stem-to-multiple-return-tracks), [Organizing Stems with Custom Stem Groups](/docs/organizing-guitars-with-custom-stem-groups), [Settings → Stem groups](/docs/the-stem-groups-page). ## Frequently asked questions ### Why don't some stems have a return track in my Ableton export? Their stem group is in the **Not routed** list on Settings → Returns. Drag the group onto a return, or add it with **+**, then export again. ### Can two stem groups go to the same return track? Yes. A stem is in one stem group at a time, but any number of stem groups can land on one return, for example acoustic and electric guitar groups on one Guitars return. ### How do I send the click to a return track? On Settings → Returns, click **+** on the return, choose **Tracks**, then **Click**. The click still plays out of its own output as well. ### Why did my return tracks change when I switched templates? Returns depend on the band's template, and your routing is saved per template. Each template shows its own set of returns. ### I added a return back. Why is it outputting to 1/2? **Add return** restores the template's default output. Click the output on that row and set it again. --- # Switching Your Ableton Export Template > Pick Intro, Standard, Pro or Custom as the Ableton template for a band, check what it ships on Returns and Global tracks, and use Reset to defaults to clear your routing overrides. Your songs and stems don't change when you switch. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template Every Ableton Live set Pliris exports for a band is built on that band's **template**. The template decides how many global (header) tracks and return tracks ship with each export. Your songs, stems and stem groups are separate from it, so you can switch templates at any time and every song comes down in the new shape. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Choose your Ableton export template](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/choose-your-ableton-export-template)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ## Choose a template 1. Open your band's **Settings** and click **Template**, under *Template routing*. 2. Pick one of the cards: | Template | Plan | What ships | | --- | --- | --- | | **Intro** | Free | Simple stem player · 5 global tracks · 4 returns | | **Standard** | All-Access | Most common · 5 global tracks · 12 returns | | **Pro** | All-Access | Full template · 11 global tracks · 12 returns | | **Custom** | | Your own Ableton project | ![The Template page with the Intro, Standard, Pro and Custom cards.](/help-assets/template-settings-01-choose-template.png) A *Template updated* message confirms the change. The template applies to **single-song exports and full-set exports**, and it is set **per band**, so each band can use a different one. Exporting never asks which template to use. It uses the one set here, so check it before a big export. You need to be an admin on the band to change it. Anyone who can export still gets the band's template. A paid plan adds templates; it doesn't take Intro away. You can still pick Intro for a stripped-back show. Cloud builds from the Pliris CLI or API are the exception. Each build takes its own template and uses **Playback Pro** if you don't pass one. ## Check what a template includes Open **Returns** and **Global tracks** after you switch. They show exactly what the current template ships with. ![The Returns page, showing which stem groups land on each return.](/help-assets/template-settings-02-returns.png) ![Global tracks on the Standard template: Songs, Click, Tempo, Cues and Markers.](/help-assets/template-settings-03-global-tracks-standard.png) For example, Standard has no LTC track. If you need timecode, choose **Pro**. Its Global tracks page adds **LTC**, **LTC Render**, reference tracks, a song title slate and more. ![Pro selected on the Template page.](/help-assets/template-settings-04-pro-selected.png) ![Global tracks on the Pro template, with the LTC track.](/help-assets/template-settings-05-pro-global-tracks-ltc.png) ## Use your own template Choose **Custom** to add your own Ableton template. You can: - **Upload a compressed template**: a .zip. In Live, use *File → Collect All and Save*, then zip the project folder so your samples come along. - **Choose a plain Ableton project**: the project folder on your computer, no zip needed. You can also drop a .zip or a project folder onto the page. ![The Custom template option with the two ways to add your Ableton template.](/help-assets/template-settings-06-custom-template.png) ## Reset to defaults If you've changed a lot of routing and want to start over, click **Reset to defaults** on the Template page and confirm. ![The Reset routing to defaults? confirmation.](/help-assets/template-settings-07-reset-dialog.png) This clears every stem-group destination, return feed, return rename or color, deleted return and output-routing override saved for the current template (everything you changed on Stems, Returns and Global tracks). Routing pickers go back to gray (inherited from the template) instead of solid (overridden). It does **not** change: - which stem belongs to which stem group, or your custom stem groups. Those are band-wide. - anything else in Settings, such as song options, click sound or muted tracks. ![The Stems page, where stem-to-group assignments live.](/help-assets/template-settings-08-stems-page.png) Related: [Settings → Template](/docs/the-template-page), [Settings → Global tracks](/docs/the-global-tracks-page), [How to Route Return Tracks](/docs/routing-return-tracks), [How to Pre-Route Stems to Groups](/docs/pre-routing-stems-to-groups). ## Frequently asked questions ### Which Ableton template can I use on a free account? Free accounts export with **Intro**, a simple stem player with 5 global tracks and 4 returns. Standard and Pro need All-Access. ### How do I get an LTC timecode track in my Ableton export? Switch the band's template to **Pro**. Its Global tracks include LTC; the Standard template doesn't have one. ### Does changing the template change my songs or stems? No. Your songs, stems and stem groups are separate from the template. Every export simply comes down in the template you've selected. ### Can two of my bands use different templates? Yes. The template is set per band, and it applies to both single-song and full-set exports for that band. ### What does Reset to defaults clear? Every routing override saved for the current template on Stems, Returns and Global tracks. It leaves stem-to-group assignments, custom stem groups and your other settings alone. --- # Uploading a Custom Ableton Template > Use your own Ableton Live set as a band's export template: Collect All and Save, upload it under Settings → Template → Custom, confirm track roles, map stem groups to returns, and every export comes out in your template. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/uploading-a-custom-ableton-template A custom template is your own Ableton Live set, used as the shape of every export for a band: your tracks, your returns, your routing. Upload it once and every song and set export comes out in it. Your songs don't change; only the template they're poured into. > **Watch the lesson:** this article goes with *[Use your own Ableton template](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform/use-your-own-ableton-template)*, part of the [Using Pliris to Program, Practice, and Perform](/courses/using-pliris-to-program-practice-and-perform) course. ![A custom template in Ableton Live.](/help-assets/custom-template-01-template-in-ableton.png) ## Before you start - In Ableton, run **File → Collect All and Save**, including files from elsewhere and other projects, so the template's samples are inside the project folder. - Custom templates are **per band**. ## Upload the template 1. Click your profile icon, then **Band settings**, then **Template**. 2. Choose **Custom**. Under **Add your Ableton template**, choose: - **Upload a compressed template**: a .zip of the project folder, or - **Choose a plain Ableton project**: the project folder on your computer, no zip. You can also drop a .zip or a project folder onto the page. ![Settings → Template with Custom selected.](/help-assets/custom-template-02-choose-custom.png) 3. Pliris reads the project. If samples are missing, it asks you to point it at a folder before uploading. ![Pliris reading the project.](/help-assets/custom-template-03-reading-project.png) ## Set it up ### Basics Name the template and check **What we found** (tracks, return buses, MIDI ports and locators). Then choose: - **Layout:** **Per-Song** (one arrangement per song, the usual choice) or **Per-Part** (each song split into its sections). - **Sections:** **From locators** (Live locators mark the sections), **From clip names** (sections come from arrangement clip names) or **No sections**. ![The Basics step.](/help-assets/custom-template-04-basics.png) ### Tracks Confirm each track's role so exports know where to put the click, cues, LTC and so on. Roles are filled in from track names. If your click track has another name, choose **Click** from the dropdown. ![Confirming track roles.](/help-assets/custom-template-05-track-roles.png) ### Routing Map each of the band's stem groups to one of the template's return tracks. Pliris guesses from names; anything it can't match shows **Choose later**. You can change these later on **Settings → Returns**. ![Mapping stem groups to the template's returns.](/help-assets/custom-template-06-map-returns.png) ### Save Click **Save template**. Pliris uploads the template's samples to your account. When it's finished, the template shows as **In use**. If you have more than one, choose between them on the same page. ![The custom template in use.](/help-assets/custom-template-07-template-in-use.png) ## Export in your template Download any song as an Ableton project. The song's sections, locators, stems and routing come out in your template. ![A song exported into the custom template.](/help-assets/custom-template-08-song-in-custom-template.png) Related: [Settings → Template](/docs/the-template-page), [Switching Your Ableton Export Template](/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template), [How to Route Return Tracks](/docs/routing-return-tracks), [Cloud Builds, Custom Templates & Analysis via the API](/docs/cloud-builds-custom-templates-and-analysis). ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I use my own Ableton template with Pliris? Yes. Upload it under Settings → Template → Custom, confirm the track roles and return routing, and save. Every export for that band uses it. ### Why does Pliris say samples are missing from my template? The project references samples outside its folder. Point Pliris at the folder, or run Collect All and Save in Ableton and upload again. ### Can each band have a different template? Yes. Custom templates are per band. ### What's the difference between Per-Song and Per-Part? Per-Song gives one arrangement per song. Per-Part splits each song into its sections. ### Can I change the return routing after uploading? Yes. Change it on Settings → Returns. --- # Settings and Routing > How stems become stem groups, how stem groups land on return tracks, and how to set the whole thing up before you upload a single file. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/settings-and-routing Settings decides what your Ableton export looks like: which return track each stem lands on, what those returns are called, what the header tracks do, and how a set is assembled. This walks the whole thing. Everything here is **per band** — two bands in the same account can route completely differently, right down to a custom group's own name and color. Renaming or recoloring a group while viewing one band only changes that band's copy; every other band keeps seeing what it saw before. ## How to think about it One sentence covers most of it: > **A stem belongs to a stem group. A stem group lands on a return track. The template decides which return tracks exist.** ![The Settings rail, grouped into Global routing, Template routing, Exports, Click & timing, App, Account, You and Labs.](/help-assets/settings-rail.png) That is three screens, in that order: - **Settings → Stems** — which group each stem name belongs to. - **Settings → Stem groups** — which return each group lands on. - **Settings → Returns** — what each return is called, where it outputs, and what feeds it. When a stem lands somewhere odd, walk those three in order. The first screen that surprises you is your answer. ## Template **Settings → Template** picks the Ableton Live Set your songs are exported into. The template decides how many header tracks and return tracks every export ships with — Intro has 4 returns, Standard 8, Pro 12 — and you can upload your own as a Custom template. ![The Template page with Intro, Standard, Pro and Custom, and the Reset to defaults control.](/help-assets/settings-template.png) **Some of your routing is saved per template and some is not**, and the rail says which is which. **Global routing** — Stems and Stem groups — saves which group each stem name belongs to **per band**, so `GTR` stays a guitar whatever you export into. **Template routing** — Template, Returns and Global tracks — saves where each group *lands*, plus return names, colors, deleted returns and output routing, **against the template you are on**. That split is deliberate: "Guitars is return C" cannot mean the same thing in a 4-return template and a 12-return one, but a guitar is a guitar either way. So after changing a band's template, check your **destinations** — Stem groups, Returns, Global tracks. Nothing is lost; switch back and your old routing is exactly where you left it. Your Stems assignments do not need re-checking, because they never moved. **Reset to defaults** clears every routing override for that template: stem group destinations, return feeds, return names, colors, return on/muted choices, deleted returns, and output routing. It does not touch song options, click sound, or muted tracks. The dialog says so before you confirm. ## Stems **Settings → Stems** lists every stem name found across your uploads, how many files use it, and the stem group it routes by. Change the group in the right-hand column and every file with that name follows. ![The Stems page listing every stem name, how many files use it, and the stem group that claims it.](/help-assets/settings-stems.png) This page runs the same classifier your export does. For any name you have assigned or pre-defined, what you see here is exactly what the export uses. Where the group was guessed from the name alone, the export also considers the stem's original filename, so an auto-tidied name can occasionally resolve differently — assigning the row explicitly settles it. ### Pre-defining a name **Add stem name** lets you claim a name that does not exist yet. Type the name your stems arrive with, pick its group, and the next upload that matches lands routed. This is how you set a band up before any audio arrives. A sensible order for a new band: 1. Create your groups on **Stem groups**. 2. Set up your returns on **Returns** — names, colors, outputs; remove the ones you do not use. 3. Pre-define your stem names, each pointed at a group. 4. Upload. The first export is right, with no cleanup. Already have a catalog? Work down the Stems list and let the **Files** column choose your order — a name used by 40 files is worth pinning before one used by a single file. The list itself is sorted alphabetically, not by file count, so the names worth your time are scattered through it rather than gathered at the top. ### Routing by naming convention A pre-defined name is matched as a **keyword**, not an exact filename, and matching is case-insensitive. When several names match, **the longest one wins** — with one precedence rule on top: a keyword pointed at a **custom group** is checked before any pointed at a built-in group, however short it is. In practice that is the arrangement you want anyway — put your specific rules on custom groups and leave the broad fallbacks built-in. The trap is the inverse: a short custom-group keyword will swallow a longer built-in one. That turns your naming convention into a routing engine. Say your team exports guitars as `GTR W L`, `GTR W R`, `GTR J`, and sometimes just `GTR`: | Pre-define | Group | | --- | --- | | `gtr w` | Will's Guitar | | `gtr j` | Jason's Guitar | | `gtr` | Guitar | `GTR W L` matches both `gtr` and `gtr w`. The longer keyword wins, so it lands in Will's Guitar. `GTR J` goes to Jason's. A plain `GTR` falls through to the generic group. Every future upload sorts itself. Patterns worth stealing: - **Player initials.** `kick`, `snare`, `oh` for the kit; `gtr w`, `gtr j` for the players. One rule per person, one fallback per instrument. - **Variants of the same instrument.** If your team delivers both a programmed and a played version, `live gtr` to Live Guitars and `gtr` to Guitar sends them to different returns automatically. (Routing is per band, so this is about telling two kinds of stem apart, not about switching a band between rigs.) - **Programmed vs. played.** `prog drums` to its own return with its own fader for FOH, `drums` to Drums. - **A short generic keyword per instrument family as your safety net.** It is what stops an odd name landing on a bus nobody is listening to. Keep long keywords specific and short keywords generic — the short ones are the net. And a pre-define is band-scoped, so each band can use its own engineer's convention. ## Stem groups **Settings → Stem groups** does two things. **Custom groups** — an account admin names a group (`Will's Guitar`, `Programmed Drums`), then you assign matching stems to it on the Stems page. An account admin can click a custom group's color dot to change it; built-in groups keep their color. Custom groups are per band, name and color included — renaming or recoloring one while viewing a band never touches what another band sees. Which stems are in a group is per band. Where the group lands is per band *and* per template. ![Stem groups: output routing, with each group and the return track it lands on.](/help-assets/settings-stem-groups.png) **Output routing** — the primary return (or global track) for each group. This is the "stem group lands on a return track" step. A group can be routed to a **global track** instead of a return, which puts the audio into that header track rather than sending it to a bus. Two cautions. It takes those stems out of the song's group bus, so anything applied at the group fader will not reach them. And it does not apply on every export path: a single-song export routes the group to the track as expected, but a built set can leave those stems on the song group instead — including on a custom template, where stems matched to an authored slot keep the template's own routing. Check a built set before relying on it for a show. ## Returns **Settings → Returns** is one row per return track: its letter, color, name, what feeds it, and its output. ![The Returns page: return names, color dots, source pills and output routing.](/help-assets/settings-returns.png) - **Click a name to rename it.** The name reaches the exported Live Set. - **Click the color dot** to set the Ableton return-track color. - **Pills are what feeds the return.** Dashed pills are inherited — stem-group primaries and template header sends. Solid pills are extras you added with **+**. Any pill can be removed. - **The on/muted switch** sets whether the return sounds when the exported set opens. On means the return is on; off means it loads muted. It starts at whatever the template does. Pro ships return I (MONITOR MIX) muted, so turn it on if you have repurposed that return. - **Output** is where the return goes in Live. - **Remove** (the trash icon) takes a return off this band's export **on this template**. Like the rest of this page it is stored per band *and* per template, so switching templates shows that template's returns with its own removals — the one you took out here is still there. The stock template is untouched either way. **Add** brings a removed one back. Every return the template ships is listed, including ones nothing currently lands on. A return you have not removed is still in your export — which is why an empty one stays on screen rather than disappearing. A return can be fed by several groups, and a group can feed several returns. A guitarist's monitor fed by `Will's Guitar`, `Click` and `Cues` is three pills on one return; nothing about your song groups changes, the stem just gets another send. ## Global tracks **Settings → Global tracks** covers the header tracks at the top of every song and the full set — SONG, SECTIONS, TEMPO, CLICK, CUES, LTC, REF TRACK and the rest. ![Global tracks with output, on/muted and color for each header track.](/help-assets/settings-global-tracks.png) Per track you can set the **output**, whether it loads **on or muted**, and its **color**. Routing shown in gray is what the template itself uses; pick a value to override it for this band. The switch shows the track's state: on means the track is on, off means it loads muted. On the built-in templates it is honored in both directions — including LTC and REF TRACK, which ship muted, so turning their switch on means the track arrives unmuted. On a custom template it can only mute: a track you authored muted stays muted even if you turn the switch on. ## Set options and Setlist management **Set options** covers the gap between songs and the color sequence assigned when building a set. **Setlist management** covers how setlists are organized when exported. ## When something lands in the wrong place Work in this order — the first screen that surprises you is the one to fix: 1. **Stems.** Is the stem in the group you expect? If not, change its group, or pre-define a longer keyword that beats the one currently winning. 2. **Stem groups.** Is that group routed to the return you expect? 3. **Returns.** Is that return named, fed and output the way you expect? Is it still in your export? 4. **Template.** Are you on the template you exported with? Destinations, return names and removals are saved per template, so the wrong template shows a different set of answers. (Your Stems assignments are per band, so they read the same either way.) If all four screens look right and the export still disagrees, click the support bubble on any page — a real person reads every one, and you will hear back within 24 hours. ## Frequently asked questions ### Why is my stem landing on the wrong return track? Walk the three screens in order: on **Stems**, check the stem is in the group you expect; on **Stem groups**, check that group is pointed at the return you expect; on **Returns**, check that return is still in your export with the right source pill. Nine times out of ten the first screen that surprises you is the answer. ### Do I have to set up routing for every song? No. Routing is per band, not per song. Set it once and every song you upload afterwards follows it — including songs you have already uploaded, since changing a stem name's group moves every file with that name. ### Can I set up routing before I upload any stems? Yes, and it is the fastest way to onboard a band. On **Settings → Stems**, use **Add stem name** to claim the names your stems arrive with and point each at a group. The first upload that matches lands routed, with no cleanup. ### What happens to my routing if I change templates? Your stem-to-group assignments stay exactly as they are — those are saved per band. What changes are the destinations: which return each group lands on, return names and colors, and any returns you removed are all saved per template. Switch back and the old template's routing is exactly where you left it. ### How do I get a stem out of the mix entirely? Route its group to a global track instead of a return. The audio goes into that header track rather than being sent to a bus. Useful for reference material and talkback — but note it leaves the song's group bus, so anything applied at the group fader will not reach it. ## Where to go next This article is the big picture. Each Settings page has its own walkthrough, and the most common routing jobs have step-by-step guides: - [Finding Your Way Around Settings](/docs/finding-your-way-around-settings) — the rail, the scopes, and who can change what. - Page by page: [Template](/docs/the-template-page), [Stems](/docs/the-stems-page), [Stem groups](/docs/the-stem-groups-page), [Returns](/docs/the-returns-page), [Global tracks](/docs/the-global-tracks-page), [Set options](/docs/the-set-options-page), [Setlist management](/docs/the-setlist-management-page), [Song defaults](/docs/the-song-defaults-page), [LTC](/docs/the-ltc-page), [App view](/docs/the-app-view-page), and [Account, You and Labs](/docs/account-you-and-labs-settings). - How-tos: [Organizing Stems with Custom Stem Groups](/docs/organizing-guitars-with-custom-stem-groups), [Switching Your Ableton Export Template](/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template), [Routing Global Tracks in Your Ableton Export](/docs/routing-global-tracks-in-your-ableton-export), [Uploading a Custom Ableton Template](/docs/uploading-a-custom-ableton-template), [Exporting Your Songs for AbleSet, LIOBOX and TAZ](/docs/exporting-your-songs-for-ableset-liobox-and-taz), [Creating Custom Stem Groups](/docs/creating-custom-stem-groups), [Changing a Stem's Group on a Song](/docs/changing-a-stems-group-on-a-song), [Pre-Routing Stems to Groups](/docs/pre-routing-stems-to-groups), [Routing One Stem to Multiple Return Tracks](/docs/routing-one-stem-to-multiple-return-tracks), and [Routing Return Tracks](/docs/routing-return-tracks). --- # Settings → Template > Pick the Ableton Live Set your songs are exported into (Intro, Standard, Pro, or your own Custom template), understand which routing is saved per template, and reset a template's routing to its defaults. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-template-page **Settings → Template** picks the Ableton Live Set shape your songs are poured into. The template decides how many header tracks and return tracks every export ships with, so it is the first thing to set on a new band. Everything on the Returns and Global tracks pages is drawn from it. ![The Template page with Intro, Standard, Pro and Custom, and the Reset to defaults control.](/help-assets/settings-template.png) ## Choose template | Template | Plan | What ships | | --- | --- | --- | | **Intro** | Free | A simple stem player. 5 header tracks, 4 returns. | | **Standard** | All-Access | The most common choice. 5 header tracks, 12 returns. | | **Pro** | All-Access | The full rig. 11 header tracks, 12 returns. | | **Custom** | All-Access | Your own Ableton Live Project, uploaded as a zip or a plain project folder. | Click a tile to switch. The change saves immediately and a *Template updated* message confirms it. The template is set per band and applies to single-song and full-set exports. On the free plan, Standard and Pro show **Paid plan required** and cannot be selected. For a walkthrough of switching and what each one ships, see [Switching Your Ableton Export Template](/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template). For what ends up inside the file, see [What's in an Exported Ableton Project?](/docs/what-is-in-an-exported-ableton-project). ## Custom templates Selecting **Custom** on a paid plan opens a **Custom templates** section underneath. In Live, run **File → Collect All and Save** first. Then, under **Add your Ableton template**, choose **Upload a compressed template** (a .zip of the project folder) or **Choose a plain Ableton project** (the folder itself, no zip). You can also drop either onto the page. The wizard then walks you through the layout, which of your tracks play which role, and which return each stem group lands on. The step-by-step version is [Uploading a Custom Ableton Template](/docs/uploading-a-custom-ableton-template). Once you have more than one custom template, the list above the wizard lets you pick which one this band exports into, and **Edit** reopens the wizard for a template you already saved. A template saved without its samples is kept but not selected, because it cannot export yet. Upload it again with its samples (Collect All and Save first) to use it. ## What is saved per template The rail splits your routing into two kinds, and this page is where the split matters: - **Global routing** (Stems and Stem groups) is saved **per band**. Which stem group a stem name belongs to does not change when you switch templates. - **Template routing** (Returns and Global tracks, plus each group's destination on Stem groups) is saved **per band and per template**. Return names, colors, output routing, removed returns, extra sends, and header-track settings all belong to the template you set them on. So after switching a band's template, open **Stem groups**, **Returns**, and **Global tracks** and check the destinations. Nothing is lost by switching. Switch back and the previous template's routing is exactly as you left it. ## Reset to defaults The **Routing** section at the bottom has one button: **Reset to defaults**. It clears every routing override for the template you are on: - each stem group's destination on Stem groups - what feeds each return, including extras you added and inherited pills you removed - return names and colors - returns you removed from the export - output routing for returns and header tracks It does **not** touch your Stems assignments, song options, click sound, muted tracks, or set options. A confirmation dialog lists what is about to be cleared before anything happens, and the toast confirms when it is done. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I change the Ableton template in Pliris? Open **Settings → Template** and click **Intro**, **Standard**, **Pro**, or **Custom**. The change saves immediately. Standard, Pro, and Custom need an All-Access plan. ### What happens to my routing when I change templates? Your stem-to-group assignments stay exactly where they are. The destinations switch to the new template's own set: which return each group lands on, return names and colors, removed returns, and output routing are all saved per template. Switch back and the old template's routing is still there. ### How do I reset my routing to the template defaults? On **Settings → Template**, scroll to **Routing** and click **Reset to defaults**. It clears every override on Stem groups, Returns, and Global tracks for the template you are on. Your Stems assignments are left alone. ### Can I use my own Ableton project as a template? Yes, on an All-Access plan. Choose **Custom**, then upload a zipped Live Project or choose the plain project folder. The wizard asks you to label which tracks play which role. Collect All and Save in Live first so the samples travel with it. See [Uploading a Custom Ableton Template](/docs/uploading-a-custom-ableton-template). ### Why can't I select Standard or Pro? They need an All-Access subscription. On the free plan the tiles show **Paid plan required**. See [Plans, Credits, and Billing](/docs/plans-credits-and-billing). --- # Settings → Stems > Every stem name across your band's uploads, how many files use it, and the stem group it routes by. Change a name's group for every song at once, pre-define names before you upload, and rename a stem across the whole band. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-stems-page **Settings → Stems** is the band-wide view of your stems. Instead of one song at a time, it lists every distinct stem **name** across all of the band's uploads, how many files carry that name, and the stem group each name is routed by. Change the group here and every file with that name follows, in every song. ![The Stems page listing every stem name, how many files use it, and the stem group that claims it.](/help-assets/settings-stems.png) ## Reading the list Each row is one stem name: - **Name.** The name your stems arrive with, tidied where Pliris can safely strip a song title out of it (`Campfire_97_Gtrs 1` shows as the part, not the file). Click a name to rename every stem in the band that carries it. The underlying files are not changed, and any pre-define on the old name moves with it. - **Files.** How many stems across the band use this name. The list is alphabetical, so use this column to spot the names that genuinely repeat. A name used by 40 files is worth pinning before one used by a single file. - **Stem group.** The group this name routes by. The dropdown lists every built-in group and every custom group your band can see, with **Create group…** at the bottom for account admins. - **×.** Shown on names you assigned or pre-defined. Removes that pin, clears the assignment from every existing file with that name, and lets the name fall back to automatic matching on the next upload. Names Pliris classified on its own have nothing to clear, so they have no ×. The **Search stem names…** box filters the list live. Long lists show the first batch with a **Show all** link underneath. ## Changing a name's group Pick a different group in the **Stem group** column. Two things happen at once: 1. Every existing stem in the band with that name moves to the new group. 2. The name is **pinned** to that group as a pre-define, so the next upload with a matching name lands there too. The toast reads ` → ` when it saves. If the write is denied, the files are put back where they were so the page never reports a move that did not stick. This is different from moving a stem on a song page, which changes that one stem only. See [Changing a Stem's Group on a Song](/docs/changing-a-stems-group-on-a-song) for when to use which. ## Add stem name **Add stem name** lets you claim a name that does not exist yet. Type the name or pattern your stems will arrive with, pick a group (or create one on the spot), and click **Add stem name**. Any future upload matching it routes to that group before you have touched the song. A pre-define is matched as a keyword, not an exact filename, and matching is case-insensitive. When several keywords match one file, the longest wins, and a keyword pointed at a custom group is checked before any pointed at a built-in group. The full recipe is in [Pre-Routing Stems to Groups](/docs/pre-routing-stems-to-groups). ## What this page runs on The page runs the same classifier your export does, so for any name you have assigned or pre-defined, what you see here is exactly what the export uses. Where a group was guessed from the name alone, the export also considers the stem's original filename, so an auto-tidied name can occasionally resolve differently. Assigning the row explicitly settles it. Pre-defines and assignments are **per band**. Pinning `gtr w` on one band never changes another band's classification. > **See also:** [Organizing Stems with Custom Stem Groups](/docs/organizing-guitars-with-custom-stem-groups) uses this page to rename stems, pre-route names and move stems into new groups, step by step. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I change the stem group for every song at once? Open **Settings → Stems**, find the stem name, and pick a new group in the **Stem group** column. Every file in the band with that name moves, and the name is pinned so future uploads land there too. ### How do I rename a stem across all my songs? On **Settings → Stems**, click the name and type the new one. Every stem in the band with that name is renamed. The files themselves are not touched, and any pre-define follows the new name. ### What does the × next to a stem name do? It removes your pin on that name. Existing files with the name are cleared back to automatic matching, and the next upload uses Pliris's guess instead of your assignment. Names Pliris guessed on its own have no × because there is nothing to remove. ### Can I set up stem routing before I upload anything? Yes. Use **Add stem name** to claim the names your stems will arrive with and point each at a group. See [Pre-Routing Stems to Groups](/docs/pre-routing-stems-to-groups). ### Why does the Stems page say a stem is in one group but my export put it somewhere else? For a name Pliris guessed on its own, the export also looks at the stem's original filename, which can resolve differently from the tidied name shown here. Assign the row explicitly and both agree. --- # Settings → Stem groups > Create custom stem groups, change their colors, and set Routes to for the primary return track (or global track) each group lands on. Multi-return sends are set on the Returns page. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-stem-groups-page **Settings → Stem groups** is the middle layer of routing. Stems belong to groups, and groups land on return tracks. This page is where you make the groups your band thinks in and decide where each one goes with **Routes to**. Stem groups are **how stems are grouped** (flexible naming). Returns are the **output destination**. Matching a custom group's name to a return does not set the destination — you set **Routes to** explicitly. ## Custom groups At the top, account admins see **Create custom stem group** with a name field and a **Create** button. Type a name and press Enter or click **Create**. The group appears in the list below with a gray color dot and a `CUSTOM` tag. Click the dot to pick a color from the Ableton palette. That color is used on the song page and in the exported set. After you create a stem group, set **Routes to** for where it lands in Ableton. Creating the group alone does not finish routing. Two names are refused: one that matches a built-in group (`Drums`, `Guitar`, `Keys`…), and one that already exists on this band. Assign stems to the built-in group on the Stems page instead. Band admins who are not account admins see a note here instead of the field: only account admins can create custom groups or change their colors. Everything else on the page is theirs to change. Custom groups are **per band**. Name, color, which stems belong to a group, and where it lands are all independent per band. A group inherited from the account starts out with the same name and color on every band until a band renames or recolors its own copy. Each custom group has three icons: the **eye** hides it, the **pencil** renames it and the **trash** deletes it. Built-in groups cannot be deleted. A hidden group is marked **Hidden**. It doesn't show on song pages, but its stems are still in your Ableton exports. That suits something like a 911 (emergency) vocal. The step-by-step version, with the reasons you would want one, is [Creating Custom Stem Groups](/docs/creating-custom-stem-groups). For a full example, splitting a crowded Guitar group, see [Organizing Stems with Custom Stem Groups](/docs/organizing-guitars-with-custom-stem-groups). ## Output routing ![Stem groups: output routing, with each group and the return track it lands on.](/help-assets/settings-stem-groups.png) One row per group, built-in groups first in the same order the song page uses (Reference, LTC, Click, Cues, Lead Vocals, BGVs, Vocal FX, Drums, Percussion, Loops/FX, Bass, Guitar, Keys, Brass, Other) and then your custom groups. The **Routes to** column is the group's **primary** destination: - Shown in **gray** when it is what the template does on its own. - Shown **solid** once you have overridden it. The line under the list counts how many groups are routed explicitly. - **No send** means the group is not sent to any return. Click and LTC are deliberately unrouted by default. Click the value to change it. The picker offers every return the template ships and this band has not removed, listed by letter and name, and then the template's **Global tracks**. Once a group has been overridden, **Reset to default** appears at the top of the picker as an undo. Changing a primary return does two things: the group's dashed pill moves from the old return to the new one on the Returns page, and any **extra** send you gave the group on Returns stays where it is. The primary is one destination. Extras are the Returns page's job. ### Routing a group to a global track Choosing a global track instead of a return puts the group's audio into that header track rather than sending it to a bus. Two things to know first: - It takes those stems out of the song's group bus, so anything applied at the group fader will not reach them. - It does not apply on every export path. A single-song export routes the group to the track as expected, but a built set can leave those stems on the song group instead, including on a custom template where stems matched to an authored slot keep the template's own routing. Check a built set before relying on it for a show. ## Where the rest lives - **Which stems are in a group** is set on [Stems](/docs/the-stems-page) for a whole name at once, or by right-clicking a stem on a song page. - **A group feeding more than one return**, and what each return is called, is set on [Returns](/docs/the-returns-page). ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I create a custom stem group in Pliris? Open **Settings → Stem groups**, type a name under **Create custom stem group**, and click **Create**. You need to be an account admin. Then assign stems to it on **Settings → Stems** or by right-clicking stems on a song page. After you create the group, set **Routes to** for where it lands in Ableton. ### I named my custom group the same as a return. Does that set Routes to? No. Matching a return's name when you create a custom group does **not** set **Routes to**. Click the value in the **Routes to** column and pick the return explicitly. ### How do I change which return track a stem group goes to? On **Settings → Stem groups**, click the value in the **Routes to** column for that group and pick a return. Gray means the template's default; solid means you have overridden it. **Reset to default** in the picker undoes an override. ### Why is the Create button missing on the Stem groups page? Creating groups and changing their colors is account-admin only. A band admin sees a note instead. Ask an account admin to create the group, or to make you an account admin from **Settings → Members**. ### Can a stem group go to two return tracks? The Stem groups page sets one primary return per group. To send the same group to a second return, open **Settings → Returns**, click **+** on the other return, and choose the group under **Stem group**. See [Routing One Stem to Multiple Return Tracks](/docs/routing-one-stem-to-multiple-return-tracks). ### Are custom groups shared between my bands? Each band has its own set. A group created while viewing one band belongs to that band, and renaming or recoloring a group on one band never changes what another band sees. Which stems are in a group, and where it lands, are per band too. ### Can I rename or delete a custom stem group? Yes. Use the pencil or trash icon on a **custom** group on **Settings → Stem groups**. The eye icon hides it from song pages instead. Built-in groups cannot be deleted. --- # Settings → Returns > One row per return track in your export: its letter, color, name, the stem groups, stems and tracks that feed it, whether it loads on or muted, and where it outputs. Rename, recolor, add and remove sources, turn returns on or mute them, change outputs, and remove or restore returns. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-returns-page **Settings → Returns** is the last of the three routing screens. Stems belong to stem groups, stem groups land on returns, and this page is the returns: what each one is called, what feeds it, and where it goes in Live. It shows every return your template ships, including the ones nothing lands on yet. Returns are the **output destination**. Stem groups are separate — renaming a return does not rematch groups by name, and a custom group whose name matches a return still needs **Routes to** set on **Settings → Stem groups**. ![The Returns page: return names, color dots, source pills and output routing.](/help-assets/settings-returns.png) ## One row per return Left to right, each row gives you: - **The letter.** A through L, matching the return's position in the exported Live Set. - **The color dot.** Click it to pick the Ableton return-track color from the palette. - **The name.** Click it to rename. The new name is what appears in the exported `.als`. The toast confirms `A → New name`. - **Source pills.** What lands on this return. **Dashed** pills are inherited: a stem group whose primary return is this one, or a header-track send the template itself makes. **Filled** pills are extras you added with **+**. Every pill has an × and every pill can be removed. - **+.** Adds a source. The menu has three lists: **Stem group**, **Tracks** (the template's header tracks, plus Songs), and **Specific stem** (every stem name in the band). Anything already on the return is left out of the list. - **The on/muted switch.** Whether the return sounds when the exported set opens. On means the return is on; off means it loads muted, and the label reads **Muted**. It starts at whatever your template does, and changing it applies to this band's exports from then on. - **The output.** Where the return goes in Live. Gray means it is what the template does; solid means you have overridden it. - **The trash icon.** Removes the return from this band's export. A return with nothing on it reads *"Nothing lands here yet — use + to add a stem, group, or track."* It is still in your export. Only the trash icon takes a return out. ## Not routed At the top of the page, **Not routed** lists stem groups that aren't on any return yet. Stems in those groups get no return routing when you export. Custom stem groups start here, because Pliris doesn't guess where you want them. Drag each group onto a return, or add it to a return with **+**. Check this list is empty before you export. ## Sources: what can feed a return Three kinds of thing, and a return can carry any mix of them: | Source | What it means in the export | | --- | --- | | **Stem group** | Every stem in that group gets a send to this return, in every song. | | **Tracks** | A header track (Click, Cues, Slate, Ref Track, Songs and the rest) sends to this return. | | **Specific stem** | Every stem with that exact name, in every song, gets a send to this return, whatever group it is in. | Removing an inherited group pill stops that group sending here. If this was the group's primary return, its **Routes to** on Stem groups is cleared too, so give it a new home there. Adding a source back with **+** lifts the removal. This is what makes multi-return routing possible: one stem is in exactly one group, but it can land on as many returns as you like. The walkthrough is [Routing One Stem to Multiple Return Tracks](/docs/routing-one-stem-to-multiple-return-tracks). ## On or muted Every return starts at the state your template gives it. On Playback Pro that means every return is on except **I (MONITOR MIX)**, which ships muted. If you have repurposed return I for your own bus, for example renamed it and routed a stem group to it, turn its switch on so it sounds in the exported set. ![Return I (MONITOR MIX) muted on the Pro template, with the returns around it on.](/help-assets/return-tracks-10-on-muted-switch.png) Removing the **Songs** pill from a return also stops each song's folder sending to it. On Pro, every song folder sends to return I by default. If you have taken return I for your own bus, remove Songs from it so the stems you route there are not doubled by the folder send. ## Output Click the output value to change where the return goes. The picker offers: - **Sends only** and **No output**. - **Internal routing…**, which reveals a second picker of the template's own tracks so a return can feed a track inside the set. - **Main** (Live 12's name for the Master track), the stereo pairs **1/2** through **31/32**, and the mono external outs **1** through **32**. Once overridden, **Reset to template** appears at the top of the picker and names the value it goes back to. ## Remove and Add return The trash icon removes a return from **this band's export, on this template**. Its sends, routing overrides and any group primaries pointing at it are cleared, but its name and color are kept so it comes back as it was. The stock template is untouched, and every other band still has it. **Add return** (under the list, shown while at least one return is removed) lists the removed returns by letter and stock name. Pick one and it is restored to the same slot with the template's default output. Everything on this page is saved per band **and** per template. Switch the band to a different template and you see that template's returns, with its own names, removals and sends. For a job-by-job walkthrough, see [Routing Return Tracks](/docs/routing-return-tracks). ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I rename a return track in Pliris? Open **Settings → Returns** and click the return's name. Type the new one and press Enter. That name is used in the exported Live Set. Renaming a return does **not** rematch stem groups by name — groups keep their existing **Routes to** until you change it on **Settings → Stem groups**. ### What can I route to a return track? Three kinds of source: a **stem group** (every stem in it), a **track** (a header track like Click, Cues or Slate), or a **specific stem** by name. Click **+** on the return and pick from the three lists. A return can carry any mix of them. ### Why is a return with nothing on it still showing? Because it is still in your export. The page lists every return the template ships so that "empty" and "removed" never look the same. Use the trash icon if you want it gone. ### How do I change where a return track outputs? Click the output value on the return's row and pick Main, a stereo pair, a mono external out, Sends only, No output, or Internal routing to one of the template's tracks. Gray means the template's own value; solid means yours. **Reset to template** undoes it. ### Why is my return track muted in the exported Ableton set? Your template ships it muted. On Playback Pro, return I (MONITOR MIX) loads muted. Open **Settings → Returns** and turn that return's switch on. The label changes from **Muted** to **On**, and every export from then on loads it unmuted. ### I repurposed return I and my stems are doubled. Why? Every song folder on Pro sends to return I by default, so a stem group routed there arrives twice: once from its own send and once through the folder. On **Settings → Returns**, remove the **Songs** pill from return I. The folder send then stays off and only your routed stems land there. ### I removed a return. How do I get it back? Click **Add return** under the list and pick the return by its letter. It comes back with its original name and color and the template's default output. --- # Settings → Global tracks > The header tracks at the top of every song and every set (SONG, SECTIONS, TEMPO, CLICK, CUES, LTC, REF TRACK and the rest): where each one outputs, whether it loads on or muted, and its Ableton color. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-global-tracks-page **Settings → Global tracks** covers the header tracks the template puts at the top of every song and every built set: SONG, SECTIONS, TEMPO, CLICK, CUES, SONG TITLE SLATE, LTC, REF TRACK and so on. Which tracks appear depends on the template you are on. Intro ships 5, Standard 8, Pro 11, and a custom template ships whatever you authored. ![Global tracks with output, on/muted and color for each header track.](/help-assets/settings-global-tracks.png) ## Header tracks One row per track, with three controls: - **Color dot.** Click it to give this track its own Ableton color. A track with its own color shows as an override; use **Reset** in the picker to send it back to the shared color. - **On / Muted.** Whether the track sounds when the exported set opens. The switch shows the track's state: **on** means the track is on, **off** means it loads muted, and the label beside the switch reads **On** or **Muted** to match. On the built-in templates both directions work. On a custom template this switch can only mute. A track you authored muted stays muted even with the switch on. - **Output.** Where the track goes in Live. Gray is what the template itself does; pick a value to override it for this band. The picker is the same one the Returns page uses: Sends only, No output, Internal routing to one of the template's tracks, Main, stereo pairs 1/2 to 31/32, and mono external outs 1 to 32. **Sends only** means no main output: the track is heard only through a send to a return track, so it is silent if nothing sends it anywhere. Pro's LTC Render works this way. **No output** never plays. **Reset to template** in the picker undoes an override. A global track can also feed a return track while keeping its own output. On **Settings → Returns**, global tracks are the pink pills; click **+** on a return to add one, for example Click and Cues on a monitor-mix return. **LTC and REF TRACK ship muted by default.** Their switches show **Muted**. If you want timecode audible on its output, turn LTC's switch on, and check where LTC is routed before you do, because it will then be heard on whatever it feeds. See [Sending LTC / SMPTE Timecode to External Gear](/docs/sending-ltc-smpte-timecode). ![LTC and REF TRACK read Muted on the Pro template; the other header tracks read On.](/help-assets/global-tracks-04-on-muted-switch.png) ## Shared color The default Ableton color for every header track that does not have its own override. Changing it updates those tracks only. Tracks you gave their own color stay put until you reset them. Like Returns, this page is saved per band **and** per template. Switch templates and you see that template's header tracks with their own settings. For a step-by-step walkthrough, see [Routing Global Tracks in Your Ableton Export](/docs/routing-global-tracks-in-your-ableton-export). ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I make the click go to its own output in Ableton? Open **Settings → Global tracks**, find CLICK, and click its output value. Pick the stereo pair or mono out your interface uses. The exported set routes CLICK there. ### Why is LTC muted in my exported set? LTC and REF TRACK ship muted by default so timecode and a reference mix are never heard by accident. Turn LTC's switch on (it then reads **On**) on **Settings → Global tracks** to have it sound, and check its output first. ### Why can't I unmute a track on my custom template? On a custom template, the switch can only mute. A track you authored muted in your own Live Project stays muted even with the switch on. Unmute it in Live and re-upload the template. ### What does the switch next to each header track mean? It is the track's on/off state when the exported set opens. On (the label reads **On**) means the track sounds. Off (the label reads **Muted**) means it loads muted in Live. ### How do I change the color of the header tracks? Pick a **Shared color** to change every header track at once, or click a track's own color dot to override just that one. **Reset** in the picker returns a track to the shared color. --- # Settings → Set options > How songs are laid out when a whole set is built: the gap left between them, and the color sequence songs cycle through. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-set-options-page **Settings → Set options** decides how songs sit next to each other when you build a whole set. It has no effect on a single-song export. ![The Set options page: the song gap in measures, and the twelve-color song sequence with its theme picker.](/help-assets/settings-set-options.png) ## Song gap The number of empty measures left between songs when a set is built, from 1 to 16. Type a number and click away or press Enter. The toast confirms the new gap. The gap is measured on a 4/4 grid, so one measure is four beats regardless of a song's own time signature. A longer gap gives your player more room between tunes without touching either song. Changes affect sets built from now on. Locators for your setlist system are a separate setting; see [Settings → Setlist management](/docs/the-setlist-management-page). ## Song colors Songs are colored in this order as a set is built, then the sequence repeats. The color reaches the song's group track, its marker clip, its sections and its click clips in the exported Live Set, so the color you see in Pliris is the color you see in Live. - **Click a swatch** to change that position's color from the Ableton palette. - **Add a color** extends the sequence, up to 24 positions. The **×** on a swatch removes it. - The scheme picker underneath regenerates the sequence from your first color: **Single color** (every song the same), **Complementary** (alternates between two hues), **Even spread** (hues spaced evenly so the whole set is distinct), or **Golden angle** (rotates 137.5° each step so neighbors contrast and colors rarely repeat). The scheme is read from your sequence rather than stored separately, so the picker always tells the truth about what the sequence currently is. Set options are saved per band and per template, like the rest of the export settings. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I change the gap between songs in an exported set? Open **Settings → Set options** and set **Song gap** to the number of empty measures you want between songs, from 1 to 16. It applies when you build a set, not to single-song exports. ### How do I change the song colors in my Ableton set? On **Settings → Set options**, click any swatch under **Song colors** to change it, or pick a scheme (Single color, Complementary, Even spread, Golden angle) to regenerate the whole sequence from your first color. Songs cycle through the sequence in order. ### Does the song gap affect single-song exports? No. The gap is only used when a whole set is built. A single-song export starts at bar 1 with the song's own count-in. ### Why does my set repeat colors? The sequence repeats once a set has more songs than the sequence has positions. Add more colors, up to 24, or pick **Even spread** or **Golden angle** to keep neighbors distinct. --- # Settings → Setlist management > Pick the setlist system your exports are written for (None, Setlist, AbleSet, LIOBOX, Conductor or TAZ) and switch its stop locators, section locators, song metadata, guide cues and lyrics track on or off. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-setlist-management-page **Settings → Setlist management** decides how your exported set is organized for the setlist app you run the show from. Each system reads locators differently, so Pliris writes them in the format that system expects and gives you that system's own options. ![Setlist management with AbleSet selected and its options underneath.](/help-assets/settings-setlist-management.png) ## Management Pick one: | Choice | What it does | | --- | --- | | **None** | Nothing extra is written. | | **Setlist** | Locators in the Setlist app's format. | | **AbleSet** | Locators in AbleSet's format, plus an optional lyrics track. | | **LIOBOX** | Locators in LIOBOX's format. | | **Conductor** | Locators in Conductor's format. | | **TAZ** | STOPALL and section locators for TAZ. | The change saves immediately and the section underneath changes to that system's options. For the walkthrough, from choosing a tool to checking the export in AbleSet, see [Exporting Your Songs for AbleSet, LIOBOX and TAZ](/docs/exporting-your-songs-for-ableset-liobox-and-taz). ## Options per system The options are on by default when you pick a system, because the locators are what "pick this integration" means. Turn any of them off if your rig does not want them. - **Auto-generate stop locators.** Adds the system's stop marker at the end of every song: `(STOP)` for LIOBOX, `STOP` for AbleSet, `AUTO STOP` for Setlist, `*stop` for Conductor, `STOPALL` for TAZ. - **Add section locators.** Adds a locator at each section start, in the system's own format (AbleSet and LIOBOX use hidden locators; Setlist uses `_Verse 1`, `_Chorus` and so on). - **Add song metadata to locators.** Formats the start locator with the song's details: `Title {Key, Tempo}` for AbleSet, BPM/key/duration for LIOBOX, title/duration/key for Setlist, duration in parentheses for Conductor. TAZ does not use it. - **Add lyrics track** (AbleSet only, off by default). Adds a `Vocals +LYRICS` MIDI track so AbleSet shows each song's lyrics in time. Songs without timed lyrics are skipped. This does not work on custom templates yet, and the page says so when you are on one. - **Add Chords to Lyrics Track** (AbleSet only). Writes your chords into the lyrics track. Leave it off for lyrics only. - **Use AbleSet guide cues** (AbleSet only). Marks the cues track `+GUIDE` so AbleSet can mute upcoming-section cues when you loop or jump. - **Add loop guide cues** (AbleSet only). Adds a `+LOOPGUIDE` track, muted by default. AbleSet swaps in the current section's cue while looping. Setlist management is saved per band. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I export a set for AbleSet from Pliris? Open **Settings → Setlist management** and pick **AbleSet**. Leave stop locators, section locators and song metadata on, and turn on **Add lyrics track** if you want lyrics in AbleSet. Then build your set as usual. ### How do I turn off the STOP locators? On **Settings → Setlist management**, turn off **Auto-generate stop locators** under your system's options. The other options stay as they are. ### Why is the lyrics track option grayed out? The AbleSet lyrics track does not work on custom templates yet. Switch to the Standard or Pro template, or wait for custom-template support. ### AbleSet skipped my song’s lyrics. Why? The AbleSet lyrics track only includes songs that already have **timed** lyrics. Pasting or editing lyric text fixes words only. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not time lyrics. Check **Lyrics and Chords**, with a lead vocal in the stems or a time-aligned reference that includes vocals. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ### Which setlist system should I pick? Pick the app you actually run the show from. If you do not use one, choose **None** and nothing extra is written. You can switch later and export again; see [Exporting Your Songs for AbleSet, LIOBOX and TAZ](/docs/exporting-your-songs-for-ableset-liobox-and-taz). --- # Settings → Song defaults > Band-level defaults for how Pliris prepares every song: auto-aligning stems to Live's grid, generating click, cues and slate automatically, and how many bars of count-in roll before the downbeat. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-song-defaults-page **Settings → Song defaults** sets how Pliris prepares every song in this band. All of it is on by default, for free and paid bands alike, and each setting works on its own. Changes apply to the band shown in the switcher. ![Song defaults: Auto-align stems, Auto-generated click, cues, and slate, and the Count-in length choice.](/help-assets/settings-song-defaults.png) ## Song defaults - **Auto-align stems.** Automatically aligns stems on Live's grid, so bar 1 in Pliris is bar 1 in the export. Leave it on unless you have a reason to place stems by hand. - **Auto-generated click, cues, and slate.** Generates click, cues, and song slates automatically that follow your song's tempo, sections, and name. This is also what provides the audible count-in click in the player. Turn it off if you bring your own click and cue tracks; see [Custom Click and Cue Sounds](/docs/custom-click-and-cue-sounds). ## Count-in length How much click rolls in before each song's downbeat: - **Off.** No count-in. Songs start right at bar 1. - **1 bar.** One bar of click before the first downbeat. This is the default. - **2 bars.** Two bars of click before the first downbeat. This is the band's default. Any arrangement can override it from its own page, so one song can count in for two bars while the rest use one. See [How to Change Count-In](/docs/changing-count-in). ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I change the count-in for my whole band? Open **Settings → Song defaults** and pick **Off**, **1 bar**, or **2 bars** under **Count-in length**. Every song in the band uses it unless that song has its own override on its arrangement page. ### How do I turn off the automatic click and cues? On **Settings → Song defaults**, turn off **Auto-generated click, cues, and slate**. The player's audible count-in click goes with it, so use this only when you supply your own click. ### What does Auto-align stems do? It lines each song's stems up on Live's grid so the downbeat lands on bar 1 in the export. It is on by default and applies to every song in the band. ### Can one song have a different count-in from the rest? Yes. The Song defaults count-in is the band default. Open the song's arrangement page to set a per-song override. --- # Settings → LTC > How LTC timecode values are assigned to your songs: automatically per arrangement, automatically per setlist, or by hand. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-ltc-page **Settings → LTC** decides who assigns the LTC start time each song carries: Pliris or you. Every song needs a distinct timecode range so lighting, video and other gear can tell songs apart, and this setting is how those ranges are handed out. ![The LTC page with Auto and Manual modes.](/help-assets/settings-ltc.png) ## LTC mode - **Auto.** Pliris assigns LTC values to each arrangement on your account. Two flavors: - **Per arrangement.** Each arrangement always uses its own auto-assigned LTC, no matter which setlist it is in. Pick this when the same song must carry the same timecode in every show. - **Per setlist.** Each setlist gets its own LTC layout. Songs that already have an LTC in another active setlist keep that exact value, so a song shared between two shows does not change timecode between them. - **Manual.** You assign your own LTC values to each arrangement, from the song's arrangement page. The change saves immediately and setlist pages pick it up the next time you open them. The generator itself, and how to get timecode out to gear, is covered in [Sending LTC / SMPTE Timecode to External Gear](/docs/sending-ltc-smpte-timecode). Per-song editing of the value is on the arrangement page; see [How to Edit Songs in Pliris](/docs/editing-songs-in-pliris). ## Frequently asked questions ### How does Pliris assign LTC timecode to songs? By default automatically, per arrangement, so every song gets its own range and keeps it in every setlist. Switch to **Per setlist** to lay timecode out per show, or **Manual** to type your own values on each song. ### What is the difference between per arrangement and per setlist LTC? Per arrangement gives each song one timecode it carries everywhere. Per setlist lays timecode out for each setlist, while a song already assigned in another active setlist keeps that value so it never changes between shows. ### How do I set my own LTC values? Open **Settings → LTC** and choose **Manual**. Then set each song's LTC on its arrangement page. ### Does changing LTC mode change songs I have already exported? No. Exported Live Sets keep the timecode they were built with. Re-export after changing the mode to pick up the new values. --- # Settings → App view > Show or hide Lyrics, MIDI cues, Chord charts and Timecode on this band's arrangement pages, so the song page only shows what your band uses. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/the-app-view-page **Settings → App view** trims the song page down to what your band actually uses. Everything here is visible by default; turn a feature off and it disappears from every arrangement page in this band. Nothing is deleted, and turning it back on brings it straight back. ![App view: Lyrics, MIDI cues, Chord charts and Timecode switches for the Bands app.](/help-assets/settings-app-view.png) ## View Under the **Bands** tab: - **Lyrics.** The lyrics display on arrangement pages. - **MIDI cues.** The MIDI cue manager on arrangement pages. Hide it for a band that never sends cues. - **Chord charts.** The chord chart display on arrangement pages. - **Timecode.** The LTC and sync timecode fields in a song's metadata. Each switch saves immediately. The toast reads **Feature hidden** or **Feature enabled**, and the change applies to the band shown in the switcher. Hiding a feature only changes what the page shows. Lyrics, cues and chords still export with the song, and the data is still there when you show the feature again. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I hide lyrics on the song page in Pliris? Open **Settings → App view** and turn **Lyrics** off. The lyrics display disappears from every arrangement page in that band. Turn it back on any time. ### Does hiding MIDI cues delete them? No. App view only changes what the page shows. Cues stay on the song and still export. Show the feature again and they are back. ### Do App view settings apply to all my bands? No. They are per band. Switch bands in the rail and set each one separately. ### Why can't I see the LTC field on a song? Timecode may be hidden for that band. Open **Settings → App view** and turn **Timecode** on. --- # Settings → Account, You and Labs > The settings that reach beyond one band: Members and Plan & billing for the whole account, your own Profile, and the Beta features you can opt a band into. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/account-you-and-labs-settings The bottom of the Settings rail is the part that is not about one band. **Account** applies to every band the account owns. **You** follows your login everywhere. **Labs** is early access, opted into per band but kept apart so it is never mistaken for a normal setting. ## Account ### Members Who can reach this account, and which bands they can see. Invite someone by email, pick their role, and choose the bands they get. The band switcher is disabled on this page because a member change is account-wide. Roles and what each one can do are in [Band Access Levels](/docs/managing-members-and-access). The invite flow is in [Inviting Band Members](/docs/managing-members-and-access). ### Plan & billing Your plan, payment method, invoices, storage, and analyze credits. Only account admins see this page. Band admins do not manage billing, so the row is hidden for them rather than shown and dead. What each plan includes and how credits work is in [Plans, Credits, and Billing](/docs/plans-credits-and-billing) and [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). ## You ### Profile Your name and avatar, edited here, and your login email, shown here. Your email is the login for every Pliris app. To change it, or to reset your password, contact support from the bubble on any page and your account is moved across without losing any bands. See [Signing In to Pliris](/docs/signing-in-to-pliris) and [The Pliris Account Menu](/docs/the-pliris-account-menu). ## Labs ### Beta features Early-access features you can turn on per band. They need a paid Pliris plan or an active Guest Pass, and they stay off until you switch them on. Right now: ![Beta features under Labs, with the Chart files switch.](/help-assets/settings-beta-features.png) - **Chart files.** Adds a Charts tab to the song page for dropping a PDF or PNG chart, ForScore-style. Band members with download access can view and download it. - **Pliris Bot.** Text, WhatsApp, Slack, or Telegram Pliris to ask about your songs and setlists and build Ableton sets. Turning it on adds **Settings → Pliris Bot**, where you connect each channel. Needs an active Pliris subscription, and only an account admin can switch it on. See [Pliris Bot](/docs/pliris-chat). Each switch saves for the band in the switcher. Features graduate out of this page as they ship, so the list changes over time. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I add someone to my Pliris account? Open **Settings → Members**, invite them by email, pick a role, and choose which bands they can see. See [Inviting Band Members](/docs/managing-members-and-access). ### Where do I change my Pliris email address? Your email is shown on **Settings → Profile** but is changed by support, so nothing about your login breaks. Click the support bubble on any page and ask; your bands come with you. ### Why can't I see Plan & billing? Only account admins manage billing. If you are a band admin the row is hidden. Ask the account owner to change your role or to make the billing change. ### How do I turn on a beta feature? Open **Settings → Beta features** under Labs and switch it on for the band in the switcher. You need a paid plan or an active Guest Pass. --- # How to Create Custom Stem Groups > Make a stem group of your own (Tim's Guitar, Programmed Drums, Tracks), give it a color, put stems in it, and set Routes to for where it lands. Groups are per band, and a stem is in exactly one group at a time. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/creating-custom-stem-groups Built-in groups (Drums, Bass, Guitar, Keys, Lead Vocals, BGVs…) are how Pliris sorts stems on its own. Custom groups are how **you** sort them: by player, by rig, by anything your band actually talks about. **Tim's Guitar**, **Live Guitars** and **Programmed Drums** can each land on their own return, or share one, without touching each other. Stem groups are the **bucket**. Where that bucket lands in Ableton is separate — after you create a stem group, set **Routes to** on **Settings → Stem groups**. ## Before you start - You need to be an **account admin**. Band admins can use groups but not create them or change their colors; the Stem groups page says so in place of the Create field. - A group name cannot match a built-in group. `Guitar` is refused; `Tim's Guitar` is fine. - Groups are **per band**. Create the group while viewing the band that needs it. ## Create the group ![The Stem groups page, where custom groups are created and each group's primary return is set.](/help-assets/settings-stem-groups.png) 1. Open **Settings → Stem groups**. 2. Under **Create custom stem group**, type the name and click **Create** (or press Enter). 3. The group appears in the list with a `CUSTOM` tag. Click its color dot and pick a color from the Ableton palette. That color follows the group onto the song page and into the exported set. You can also create a group from wherever you are assigning stems: - On **Settings → Stems**, open a name's **Stem group** dropdown and choose **Create group…** at the bottom. The name is assigned to the new group in one move. - In **Add stem name** on the same page, the group picker has the same **Create group…** entry, so a pre-define and its group can be made together. ## Put stems in it A stem is in exactly one group at a time, so moving a stem into your custom group takes it out of whichever group it was in. Three ways, from widest to narrowest: 1. **Every file with a name, in every song.** On **Settings → Stems**, pick the group in that name's **Stem group** column. The name is also pinned, so future uploads with that name land there. See [Settings → Stems](/docs/the-stems-page). 2. **Before the files exist.** On **Settings → Stems**, use **Add stem name** to point a name or keyword at the group. See [Pre-Routing Stems to Groups](/docs/pre-routing-stems-to-groups). 3. **One stem, on one song.** Open the song, right-click the stem, choose **Move to group**, and pick your group. See [Changing a Stem's Group on a Song](/docs/changing-a-stems-group-on-a-song). ## Decide where it lands After you create a stem group, set **Routes to** for where it lands in Ableton. A new group inherits a destination from the template's own routing, which is usually not where you want a custom group. On **Settings → Stem groups**, under **Output routing**, click the value in the **Routes to** column for your group and pick a return. Matching your custom group's name to a renamed return does **not** set **Routes to**. Choose the return in the **Routes to** column explicitly. That is the group's **primary** return: one destination per group. If the group should also reach a second return, a monitor mix for instance, add it there with **+** on **Settings → Returns**. See [Routing One Stem to Multiple Return Tracks](/docs/routing-one-stem-to-multiple-return-tracks). ## Recolor, rename, delete - **Recolor** a custom group from **Settings → Stem groups** by clicking its dot. The change applies to this band's copy of the group only. - **Hide**, **rename** or **delete** a custom group from **Settings → Stem groups** with its **eye**, **pencil** and **trash** icons. A hidden group is marked **Hidden**: it doesn't show on song pages, but its stems are still in your Ableton exports. Built-in groups cannot be deleted. - **Retire** stems from a group you no longer want by moving them elsewhere, on **Settings → Stems** or by right-click on a song page, before you delete the empty custom group. ## Why bother - **One fader per player at FOH.** `Will's Guitar` and `Tim's Guitar` on separate returns, or both on GUITARS, your call, and changeable in one click via **Routes to**. - **Played versus programmed.** `Programmed Drums` on its own return with its own fader, `Drums` on DRUMS. - **A naming convention that routes itself.** Pin `gtr t` to `Tim's Guitar` and every future upload sorts itself into the group. See [Pre-Routing Stems to Groups](/docs/pre-routing-stems-to-groups). Still set **Routes to** so the group lands where you expect in Ableton. > **See also:** [Organizing Stems with Custom Stem Groups](/docs/organizing-guitars-with-custom-stem-groups) walks through splitting a crowded Guitar group from start to finish, with the course lesson. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I create a custom stem group in Pliris? Open **Settings → Stem groups**, type a name under **Create custom stem group**, and click **Create**. You need to be an account admin. Then assign stems on **Settings → Stems**, or right-click a stem on a song page and choose **Move to group**. After you create the group, set **Routes to** for where it lands in Ableton. ### I named my custom group the same as a return. Does that route it? No. Matching a return's name when you create a custom group does **not** set **Routes to**. Open **Settings → Stem groups** and choose the return in the **Routes to** column explicitly. ### Can a stem be in two stem groups? No. A stem is in exactly one stem group at a time. It can still land on several return tracks; that is set on **Settings → Returns**. See [Routing One Stem to Multiple Return Tracks](/docs/routing-one-stem-to-multiple-return-tracks). ### Why can't I create a group called Guitar? Names that match a built-in group are refused. Assign the stem to the built-in **Guitar** group on the Stems page instead, or pick a more specific name like **Tim's Guitar**. ### Do custom groups apply to all my bands? No. Groups are per band: their name, color, which stems are in them, and where they land. Create the group while viewing the band that needs it. ### How do I rename or delete a custom stem group? Rename or delete custom groups from **Settings → Stem groups**. Built-in groups cannot be deleted. --- # How to Change a Stem's Group on a Song > Right-click a stem on the song page and choose Move to group to change which bucket that one stem sits in. Where the group lands in Ableton is Routes to on Settings → Stem groups. Use Settings → Stems when every song with that stem name should change. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/changing-a-stems-group-on-a-song A stem's group is the **bucket** it sits in on the song page. **Move to group** changes that bucket for one stem on one song. Where the group lands in Ableton is a second hop: the group's **Routes to** on **Settings → Stem groups**. When automatic matching gets one wrong — a pad lands under Guitars, a harmony lands under Lead Vocals — fix the bucket on the song page. If the export still goes to the wrong return, fix **Routes to**, not the stem. ## Move one stem, on one song 1. Open the song's arrangement page. 2. Find the stem in the stem list and **right-click** it. 3. Choose **Move to group** and pick the group. The list shows every group the band can see: the built-in ones and your custom groups. The stem moves immediately. Only **this stem on this song** changes. Other songs with a stem of the same name stay where they were, and the next upload with that name is still matched automatically. The change is captured in [Snapshot History](/docs/snapshot-history), so you can roll it back. Right-click also offers **Rename stem**, which changes how the stem is labeled without touching the file. See [Moving and Renaming Stems on the Song Page](/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page), which also shows how to open every group at once with a Shift-click. ### Several stems at once Open the song's **Assets** panel (the **Upload** button on the song page). Every stem has a **Group** dropdown on its row, and ticking several rows shows a **Move to group…** action that moves them together. Reference and LTC files have no group, so their dropdown is disabled. ## Change every song at once If the same stem name is wrong in every song, do not fix it song by song. Open **Settings → Stems**, find the name, and pick the right group in its **Stem group** column. Every file in the band with that name moves, and the name is pinned so the next upload lands there too. See [Settings → Stems](/docs/the-stems-page). | Situation | Where to fix it | | --- | --- | | One stem, one song | Right-click the stem → **Move to group** | | Several stems on one song | Assets panel → **Group** column or **Move to group…** | | Same name wrong in every song | **Settings → Stems** → Stem group column | | Name that has not been uploaded yet | **Settings → Stems** → **Add stem name** | | Group is right but Ableton destination is wrong | **Settings → Stem groups** → **Routes to** | ## One group at a time A stem belongs to exactly one stem group. Moving it to **Tim's Guitar** takes it out of **Guitar**. If what you actually want is the stem on a second return, leave its group alone and add a send on **Settings → Returns** instead: [Routing One Stem to Multiple Return Tracks](/docs/routing-one-stem-to-multiple-return-tracks). ## The group is right but the export is wrong Then the group's destination is what needs changing, not the stem. Open **Settings → Stem groups** and check the group's **Routes to** value, then **Settings → Returns** to check the return is still in the export. [Settings and Routing](/docs/settings-and-routing) walks the three screens in order. After you create a custom stem group, you must set **Routes to** for where it lands in Ableton — matching names alone does not do it. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I move a stem to a different group in Pliris? On the song page, right-click the stem and choose **Move to group**, then pick the group. Only that stem on that song changes. That sets the bucket; landing in Ableton is still **Routes to** on **Settings → Stem groups**. ### Does moving a stem on one song change the other songs? No. Right-click on a song page changes that stem only. To change every song with the same stem name, use **Settings → Stems** and pick the group in the name's **Stem group** column. ### Why did my stem go back to the wrong group after I re-uploaded it? A song-page move applies to that stem. A new upload is matched fresh. Pin the name on **Settings → Stems**, or pre-define it with **Add stem name**, and every future upload lands in the right group. ### Can I drag a stem into another group? No. Groups change through the right-click menu, or the Group column in the Assets panel. ### Can a stem be in two groups? No. A stem is in one group at a time. To have it land on more than one return, add a send on **Settings → Returns**. --- # How to Pre-Route Stems to Groups > Add your stem names to Settings → Stems before you upload, each pointed at a group, so every matching file lands routed the moment it arrives. Names match as keywords, longest wins, custom groups first. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/pre-routing-stems-to-groups The fastest way to set up a band is to do the routing **before** the audio arrives. Tell Pliris what your stems will be called and which group each name belongs to, and the first upload lands routed with nothing to clean up. ## Add a stem name ![The Add stem name popover open on the Stems page: a Name or pattern field, a Stem group picker, and the Add button.](/help-assets/settings-stems-add-stem-name.png) 1. Open **Settings → Stems**. 2. Click **Add stem name** (top right of the list). 3. Under **Name or pattern**, type the name your stems will arrive with: `Tim's Guitar`, `gtr t`, `prog drums`. 4. Under **Stem group**, pick the group. Choose **Create group…** if it does not exist yet; the group is made and selected in one step. 5. Click **Add stem name**. The toast reads ` → `. The name now appears in the list with **0** in the Files column and an × beside it. When a stem matching it is uploaded, it lands in that group, and the Files count goes up. Repeat for every name your team uses. If you already have a catalog, work down the list and let the **Files** column pick your order: a name used by 40 files is worth pinning before one used by a single file. ## How matching works A pre-defined name is matched as a **keyword**, not an exact filename, and matching is case-insensitive. `gtr t` matches `GTR T L`, `Gtr T R` and `gtr t`. When several keywords match one file: 1. **Custom-group keywords are checked first.** A keyword pointed at a custom group beats one pointed at a built-in group, however short it is. 2. **Then the longest keyword wins.** That order is what you want: put your specific rules on custom groups and leave the broad fallbacks on built-in groups. The trap is the inverse. A short keyword on a custom group swallows a longer one on a built-in group, so keep custom-group keywords specific. ## Turn your naming convention into a routing engine Say your team exports guitars as `GTR T L`, `GTR T R`, `GTR J`, and sometimes just `GTR`: | Pre-define | Group | | --- | --- | | `gtr t` | Tim's Guitar | | `gtr j` | Jason's Guitar | | `gtr` | Guitar | `GTR T L` matches both `gtr` and `gtr t`. The custom one is checked first, so it lands in Tim's Guitar. `GTR J` goes to Jason's. A plain `GTR` matches no custom keyword and falls through to the built-in Guitar group. Every future upload sorts itself. Patterns worth stealing: - **Player initials.** One keyword per person, one fallback per instrument. - **Played versus programmed.** `prog drums` to Programmed Drums, `drums` to Drums. - **A short generic keyword per instrument family as the safety net.** It is what stops an odd name landing on a bus nobody is listening to. ## The full pre-routing order 1. **Settings → Stem groups.** Create the groups your band thinks in and set each group's return. See [Creating Custom Stem Groups](/docs/creating-custom-stem-groups). 2. **Settings → Returns.** Name and color the returns, set their outputs, remove the ones you do not use. See [Routing Return Tracks](/docs/routing-return-tracks). 3. **Settings → Stems → Add stem name.** Pre-define the names, each pointed at a group. 4. **Upload.** Every matching file lands routed, and your first export is right without touching a single stem. ## Undo a pre-define Click the × on the name's row. The pin is removed, any existing files with that name are cleared back to automatic matching, and the next upload uses Pliris's guess. Pre-defines are **per band**. Each band can use its own engineer's convention. > **See also:** [Organizing Stems with Custom Stem Groups](/docs/organizing-guitars-with-custom-stem-groups) shows pre-routing as part of splitting a crowded group, with the course lesson. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I set up stem routing before I upload any stems? Yes. On **Settings → Stems**, click **Add stem name**, type the name your stems will arrive with, pick a group, and click **Add stem name**. The first upload that matches lands in that group. ### Does the stem name have to match exactly? No. A pre-defined name is matched as a keyword inside the filename, case-insensitively. `gtr t` matches `GTR T L` and `Gtr T R`. ### What happens when two pre-defined names both match a file? A keyword pointed at a custom group is checked before any pointed at a built-in group. Among those, the longest keyword wins. Keep custom-group keywords specific so a short one does not swallow everything. ### Do pre-defined names apply to all my bands? No. Pre-defines are per band, so each band can use its own naming convention. ### How do I remove a pre-defined stem name? Click the × beside the name on **Settings → Stems**. Existing files with that name go back to automatic matching, and so does the next upload. --- # How to Route One Stem to Multiple Return Tracks > A stem is in exactly one stem group, but it can land on as many return tracks as you like. Add the group, or the stem by name, as a source on a second return in Settings → Returns. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/routing-one-stem-to-multiple-return-tracks Two rules, and the whole page follows from them: > **A stem is in exactly one stem group at a time.** > **A stem can land on as many return tracks as you like.** So **Tim's Guitar** can be in the built-in **Guitar** group *or* in a custom **Tim's Guitar** group, never both. But whichever group it is in, it can feed the **GUITARS** return *and* a **LIVE GUITARS** return *and* Tim's monitor mix, all at once. Groups are for sorting. Returns are for sending. ## Option 1: send the whole group to a second return Use this when everything in the group should reach the extra return. ![A return's + menu open, offering Stem group, Tracks and Specific stem.](/help-assets/settings-returns-add-source.png) 1. Open **Settings → Returns**. 2. On the return that should also receive the group, click **+**. 3. Choose **Stem group**, then the group. Groups already on this return are left out of the list. 4. A filled pill appears on the return. Every stem in that group now sends to it, in every song, on top of the group's primary return. The group's primary return, set on Stem groups, is unchanged. Changing the primary later moves only the dashed pill; extras you added here stay put. ## Option 2: send one stem by name Use this when only one part should reach the extra return, or when the parts you want come from different groups. 1. Open **Settings → Returns**. 2. On the return, click **+** and choose **Specific stem**. 3. Pick the stem name. The list is every stem name in the band. Every stem with that exact name, in every song, now sends to this return, whatever group it is in. `Tim's Guitar` on a monitor return reaches every song where a stem is named `Tim's Guitar`, and nothing about its group changes. ## Worked example: a guitarist's monitor mix Tim wants his own guitar, the click, and the cues in his ears, and nothing else. On the Pro template: 1. On **Settings → Returns**, rename an unused return to **TIM MON** and set its **output** to the pair his in-ear pack is fed from. See [Routing Return Tracks](/docs/routing-return-tracks). 2. Click **+** → **Specific stem** → `Tim's Guitar`. 3. Click **+** → **Tracks** → **Click**. 4. Click **+** → **Tracks** → **Cues**. Three pills on one return. Tim's guitar still sits in its stem group and still lands on GUITARS for front of house. TIM MON is an extra send, not a move. ## Taking a send away Every pill has an ×. Remove a filled pill and that extra send is gone. Remove a dashed (inherited) pill and the group stops going to that return; if it was the group's primary, its **Routes to** on Stem groups is cleared, so give it a new home there. **+** brings anything back. ## What this is not - **Not a way to put a stem in two groups.** If the song page should show the stem under a different heading, move it: [Changing a Stem's Group on a Song](/docs/changing-a-stems-group-on-a-song). - **Not per song.** Sends are per band, on the template you are on. Add a send once and every song follows. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can one stem go to two return tracks in Pliris? Yes. A stem is in one stem group, but it can land on any number of returns. On **Settings → Returns**, click **+** on the second return and add the stem's group, or the stem by name under **Specific stem**. ### Can a stem be in two stem groups? No. A stem is in exactly one group at a time. Use return sends, not groups, to get one part into several places. ### How do I set up a monitor mix return for one player? On **Settings → Returns**, rename a return, set its output to the player's feed, then click **+** and add their stem under **Specific stem**, plus **Click** and **Cues** under **Tracks**. Their stem stays in its group and still reaches front of house. ### Does adding a second return change where the stem group goes? No. The group's primary return, set on **Settings → Stem groups**, is untouched. A send you add on Returns is an extra, and it stays even if you change the primary later. ### Do I have to add the send on every song? No. Sends are set once per band on **Settings → Returns** and apply to every song exported on that template. --- # How to Route Return Tracks > Return tracks can receive stem groups, individual stems, and header tracks. Here is how to change what feeds a return, send one thing to several returns, change a return's output, and remove or restore returns. Category: Settings URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/routing-return-tracks Return tracks are where your stems end up in the exported Live Set, and where front of house and monitors take their feeds from. **Settings → Returns** is one row per return: its name and color, what feeds it, and where it outputs. Everything here is saved per band, on the template you are on. ![The Returns page: return names, color dots, source pills and output routing.](/help-assets/settings-returns.png) ## Clear the Not routed list At the top of the page, **Not routed** lists stem groups that aren't on any return yet. Stems in those groups get no return routing when you export. Custom stem groups start here, because Pliris doesn't guess where you want them. Drag each group onto a return, or add it to a return with **+**. Check this list is empty before you export. ## What a return can receive Click **+** on any return. Three lists: ![A return's + menu open, offering Stem group, Tracks and Specific stem.](/help-assets/settings-returns-add-source.png) | Source | What lands on the return | | --- | --- | | **Stem group** | Every stem in that group, in every song. | | **Tracks** | A header track: Click, Cues, Slate, Ref Track, Songs and the rest of what your template ships. | | **Specific stem** | Every stem with that exact name, in every song, whatever group it is in. | A return can carry any mix of the three. Anything already on the return is left out of the **+** menu. Each source shows as a pill. **Dashed** pills are inherited: a stem group whose primary return this is, or a header-track send the template itself makes. **Filled** pills are extras you added. A return with no pills reads *"Nothing lands here yet"* and is still in the export. ## Adjust what feeds a return - **Add a source.** Click **+**, pick the list, pick the item. - **Remove a source.** Click the × on its pill. A removed inherited pill stays gone until you add it back with **+**. If the pill was a group's primary return, that group's **Routes to** on Stem groups is cleared, so set a new primary there. - **Move a group's primary return.** That is the Stem groups page: **Settings → Stem groups** → **Routes to**. The dashed pill moves from the old return to the new one, and any extra send you gave the group on Returns stays where it is. See [Settings → Stem groups](/docs/the-stem-groups-page). ## Send one thing to many returns Add the same source on each return that should receive it. A group can be an extra on any number of returns on top of its primary. A specific stem or a header track can be on as many returns as you like. Nothing about the stem's group changes; a send is a send. The full walkthrough, with a monitor-mix example, is [Routing One Stem to Multiple Return Tracks](/docs/routing-one-stem-to-multiple-return-tracks). ## Rename and recolor - **Click the name** to rename it. The name is what appears in the exported Live Set. - **Click the color dot** to pick the Ableton return-track color. ## Change a return's output Click the output value on the right of the row. The picker offers: - **Sends only**, **No output**. - **Internal routing…**, which reveals a second picker of the template's own tracks so the return can feed a track inside the set. - **Main** (Live 12's name for the Master track), stereo pairs **1/2** to **31/32**, and mono external outs **1** to **32**. Gray means the value is what the template does. Solid means you have overridden it, and **Reset to template** appears at the top of the picker naming the value it goes back to. Set the output to the pair your interface actually feeds; a return routed to 7/8 on a 2-output interface is silent. Header tracks (Click, Cues, LTC and so on) have their own output on **Settings → Global tracks**. See [Settings → Global tracks](/docs/the-global-tracks-page). ## Remove and restore a return The trash icon takes the return off this band's export on this template. Its sends and routing are cleared and any group that had it as primary is unrouted, but its name and color are kept. The stock template is untouched and every other band still has it. **Add return** appears under the list while any return is removed. Pick the return by letter and it comes back to the same slot with its original name and the template's default output. ## Checking the result Export a song and open it in Live. Each return's name, color and output should match the page, and each stem's send should light up on the returns you gave it. If a stem lands somewhere else, walk the three screens in order: [Stems](/docs/the-stems-page), [Stem groups](/docs/the-stem-groups-page), then back here. The first one that surprises you is the answer. ## Frequently asked questions ### What can I route to a return track in Pliris? A stem group, a header track (Click, Cues, Slate, Ref Track, Songs), or a specific stem by name. Click **+** on the return in **Settings → Returns** and pick from the three lists. ### How do I send the click to a return track? On **Settings → Returns**, click **+** on the return, choose **Tracks**, then **Click**. Do the same on any other return that should carry it. ### How do I change a return track's output? Click the output value on the return's row and pick Main, a stereo pair, a mono out, Sends only, No output, or Internal routing to one of the template's tracks. **Reset to template** undoes an override. ### How do I send the same thing to several returns? Add it as a source on each return with **+**. A group, a stem, or a track can be on as many returns as you like. ### How do I remove a return I don't use? Click the trash icon on its row. It leaves this band's export on this template. **Add return** under the list brings it back with its original name. ### Why is an empty return still in my export? Because only the trash icon removes a return. An empty return is listed so that "empty" and "removed" never look the same. Remove it if you do not want it exported. --- # Sending LTC / SMPTE Timecode to External Gear > Generate SMPTE LTC audio to sync lighting consoles, DAWs, and timecode readers — from the free generator or straight from an arrangement. Category: Hardware & Setup URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/sending-ltc-smpte-timecode ## What LTC actually does for you LTC (Linear Timecode) is SMPTE timecode encoded as audio. You play it out of a dedicated output, feed it to anything that reads timecode — a lighting console, a media server, a second DAW, a hardware timecode reader — and that gear chases your position frame-accurately. No MIDI, no network, just a clean audio signal that says exactly where you are in the show. Pliris™ gives you two ways to get an LTC file: a free standalone generator, and a one-click download straight from an arrangement you've already timed. ## Option 1: The free LTC Generator The generator lives at **[ltc.fromstudiotostage.com](https://ltc.fromstudiotostage.com)** and needs **no login**. Use it any time you need a timecode stripe at a specific start and length. 1. Go to **[ltc.fromstudiotostage.com](https://ltc.fromstudiotostage.com)**. 2. Set your **start timecode** — hours, minutes, seconds, frames. 3. Set the **duration** in seconds — long enough to cover the whole song or the whole show. 4. Pick a **frame rate**: 24, 25, 29.97 drop, or 30 fps. 5. Pick a **bit depth**: 16-bit, 24-bit, or 32-bit float. 6. Click **Generate & Download** to save the WAV. That WAV is a standard SMPTE stripe. Drop it into your DAW, load it onto a playback rig, or burn it to a dedicated track — anything that reads LTC will follow it. ## Option 2: LTC straight from an arrangement If you've already assigned sync timecodes to your arrangements, you don't need to type any numbers. Log in, and the **Arrangement Browser** tab on the generator hands you a file that's already configured to match. 1. Go to **[ltc.fromstudiotostage.com](https://ltc.fromstudiotostage.com)** and log in. 2. Switch to the **Arrangement Browser** tab. 3. Search for an arrangement by name. 4. Click the **download** icon next to it. 5. The LTC file comes out pre-configured with that arrangement's sync start time, duration, and frame rate. This is the fastest way to stripe a whole setlist — search each song, download, done. Every file lines up with the timecode you already set on the arrangement, so front-of-house and lighting are working off the same clock you are. ## Choosing a frame rate Match whatever your gear and your production are already running on. Get this wrong and everything drifts. - **24 fps** — film and a lot of theatrical rigs. - **25 fps** — standard in PAL regions and much of Europe. - **29.97 drop** — NTSC broadcast and video-locked shows. "Drop" keeps clock-time honest over long runs. - **30 fps** — common for straightforward audio-only playback. > **Pro tip:** Every device in your timecode chain has to agree on frame rate. If your lighting console is set to 25 and you send it 30 fps LTC, it will chase — badly. Confirm the rate on the reader before you trust it. ## Choosing a bit depth - **16-bit** — universally compatible, plenty for a decoder that just needs to read a stripe. - **24-bit** — more headroom; a safe default for most rigs. - **32-bit float** — maximum headroom for finicky signal chains. LTC is decoded, not listened to, so cleaner is always better than louder. Which brings us to routing. ## Routing the WAV to a dedicated output Treat LTC like a signal, not like music. - **Give it its own output.** Put the LTC WAV on a dedicated channel or interface output that feeds only your timecode reader — never mixed into the FOH or in-ear feed. - **Run it near unity, uncompressed.** No EQ, no compression, no limiting, no effects. Timecode is a square-ish waveform; processing corrupts it and the reader starts dropping frames. - **Keep the level sane.** Too hot clips the edges; too quiet and the decoder loses lock. Around -6 dBFS to unity is a good starting point — adjust to what your reader wants to see. - **Start it with the song.** The stripe has to be sample-locked to your playback so the position it reports actually matches where the music is. Once your reader shows steady, incrementing timecode that matches your playback position, you're locked. Every timecode-aware device downstream will follow. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I send SMPTE timecode from Pliris? Pliris generates LTC — SMPTE timecode encoded as audio — as a standard WAV file. You can create one at the free generator at [ltc.fromstudiotostage.com](https://ltc.fromstudiotostage.com), or log in there and download a file pre-configured from an arrangement's sync start time, duration, and frame rate, then play it out a dedicated output to your timecode reader. ### Do I need a Pliris account to use the LTC generator? No — the standalone generator at [ltc.fromstudiotostage.com](https://ltc.fromstudiotostage.com) needs no login. You only need to log in to use the Arrangement Browser tab, which pre-configures LTC files from your own arrangements. ### What frame rates and bit depths does the Pliris LTC generator support? Frame rates: 24, 25, 29.97 drop, and 30 fps. Bit depths: 16-bit, 24-bit, and 32-bit float. Match the frame rate your gear and production are already running on — every device in the timecode chain has to agree, or everything drifts. ### Why won't my lighting console lock to the LTC signal? The usual culprits are a frame-rate mismatch (e.g. sending 30 fps to a console set to 25), processing on the signal, or level problems. Run the LTC uncompressed with no EQ or effects on a dedicated output, keep the level around -6 dBFS to unity, and confirm the frame rate on the reader. ### Can I mix the LTC audio into my main mix? No — give the LTC WAV its own dedicated channel or interface output that feeds only your timecode reader, never mixed into the FOH or in-ear feed. Timecode is decoded, not listened to, and processing or mixing corrupts it. ### If I reorder my setlist, does each song's LTC start time change? Depends on your band's LTC mode, set under **Settings → LTC**: - **Auto, per arrangement** (the default) — no. Each arrangement keeps its own timecode no matter which setlist it's in or where it sits in the running order, so reordering doesn't change anything and there's nothing to re-export. - **Auto, per setlist** — yes, automatically. Timecode is assigned to each song's slot in that specific setlist, so Pliris recalculates it as soon as you reorder — no manual step. **The Arrangement Browser above won't reflect this, though** — it only ever downloads an arrangement's own start time, not a per-setlist slot. Read the updated value off the setlist itself, and if you need a WAV, enter it manually with Option 1 rather than pulling it from the Arrangement Browser. - **Manual** — no, not on its own. LTC values are whatever you (or the **Smart LTC** bulk-assign tool) typed in. Re-run Smart LTC after reordering to get new sequential start times for the current order. See [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist) for assigning LTC on a setlist. ## Where to go next - Firing events at exact moments? See [Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear](/docs/programming-midi-cues). - New to the whole model? Start with [What Is Pliris?](/docs/what-is-pliris). - Timing a whole show? See [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). Stuck getting a reader to lock? Click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear > Fire MIDI at external gear at exact timecodes — add cues with C, set channel and command, route to a WebMIDI output, or record them live. Category: Hardware & Setup URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/programming-midi-cues ## What MIDI cues are for A MIDI cue is a MIDI event that fires at a precise moment in your song. Use them to trigger the gear around you without touching it mid-performance: change a patch on a synth, kick a scene on a lighting console, punch an effects pedal, or start a click. You program the moment once, and during playback the cue fires on time, every time. Cues live inside an arrangement, right alongside its stems, sections, and lyrics. Program them where the music already is. ## Add your first cue 1. Open an arrangement. 2. Go to the **MIDI Cues** section — or just press **C** to drop a new cue instantly. 3. Click **Add Cue** to create a new event. 4. Set the **timecode** where it should fire. 5. Pick the **MIDI channel** (1–16). 6. Choose the **command**: **Note On**, **CC** (Control Change), or **Program Change**. That's a complete cue — a moment, a channel, and a message. Playback does the rest. ### Picking the right command - **Program Change** — switch a patch or preset on a synth, module, or multi-effects unit. - **CC (Control Change)** — move a continuous parameter: a fader, an expression value, a mod amount, or a mapped console control. - **Note On** — trigger anything that responds to notes — a sampler, a scene mapped to a note, a drum machine. ## Route cues to a WebMIDI output A cue has to go somewhere. Pliris™ sends MIDI through **WebMIDI**, your browser's connection to the MIDI devices on your machine. 1. Connect your MIDI interface or device before you open the arrangement. 2. When the browser asks permission to use MIDI devices, **allow it**. 3. Assign your cue to a **MIDI output** — that's the interface or virtual port your gear is listening on. If nothing fires, the output assignment or the browser permission is almost always the culprit. Confirm the device is connected, the browser has MIDI access, and the cue points at the right output. > **Pro tip:** Use a browser that supports WebMIDI (Chrome and Edge are the safe bets) and plug your interface in before loading the page, so it shows up in the output list. ## Record cues live Programming every event by hand is slow. If you'd rather play them in, capture them live instead. 1. Arm the **Record** button in the MIDI Cues section. 2. Start playback. 3. Perform your MIDI moves — program changes, notes, controller moves — on your controller in real time. 4. Pliris captures each incoming message as a cue at the timecode it landed. Record a rough pass, then clean up the timing afterward. It's the fastest way to build a dense cue list. ## Fine-tune in Pro view Switch the arrangement to **Pro view** to see your cues as diamond markers inline on the waveform. **Drag a marker** to nudge its timing visually against the audio — no retyping timecodes. Pro view is built for exactly this kind of programming pass, with section lanes and cue markers on one DAW-style layout. ## Cues are yours MIDI cues are **per user**. Everyone on the band can see every cue, but **you can only edit your own** — unless you're a **band admin**, who can edit or delete anyone's cues. So the MD's program changes and the lighting tech's scene triggers live side by side without stepping on each other, and an admin can still fix a stuck cue when the owner isn't around. ## Test before the show Never trust a cue you haven't heard fire. Play the arrangement start to finish with your gear connected and watch each cue land at its timecode. Fix any that are early, late, or pointed at the wrong output — then run it again clean. ## Frequently asked questions ### Can I trigger lighting cues with MIDI from Pliris? Yes — a MIDI cue in Pliris fires a MIDI event (Note On, CC, or Program Change) at an exact timecode in your arrangement, so you can kick a scene on a lighting console, change a synth patch, or punch an effects pedal without touching the gear mid-performance. ### Why aren't my MIDI cues firing? The output assignment or the browser permission is almost always the culprit. Confirm your MIDI interface was connected before you opened the arrangement, that the browser has permission to use MIDI devices, and that the cue is assigned to the right MIDI output. ### Which browsers work with Pliris MIDI cues? Pliris sends MIDI through WebMIDI, so you need a browser that supports it — Chrome and Edge are the safe bets. Plug your interface in before loading the page so it shows up in the output list. ### Can I record MIDI cues in real time instead of typing them in? Yes — arm the Record button in the MIDI Cues section, start playback, and perform your program changes, notes, and controller moves on your controller. Pliris captures each incoming message as a cue at the timecode it landed, and you can clean up the timing afterward (Pro view lets you drag cue markers on the waveform). ### Can my bandmates edit my MIDI cues? No — MIDI cues are per user. Everyone in the band can see every cue, but each person can only edit their own (or a band admin can), so the MD's program changes and the lighting tech's scene triggers can live side by side in the same arrangement. More detail: [Who Can Edit MIDI Cues](/docs/who-can-edit-midi-cues). ## Where to go next - Shorter arrangement-page cue how-to (MIDI + section Ableton cues) → [Changing Cues in Pliris](/docs/changing-cues-in-pliris). - Syncing gear by timecode instead? See [Sending LTC / SMPTE Timecode to External Gear](/docs/sending-ltc-smpte-timecode). - Getting oriented? Start with [What Is Pliris?](/docs/what-is-pliris). - Building the show? See [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). Cues not firing and you've checked the output? Click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Who Can Edit MIDI Cues > MIDI cues are owned by the person who created them — only that owner or a band admin can edit or delete someone else's cue. Category: Hardware & Setup URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/who-can-edit-midi-cues Can't edit a MIDI cue your bandmate dropped in? That's intentional. Cues are **owned by the user who created them**. Only: - the **cue owner**, or - a **band admin** …can edit or delete that cue. ## Why it works that way During a service or rehearsal, you don't want one person accidentally rewriting someone else's lighting or patch changes. Ownership keeps show MIDI stable when several people touch the same arrangement. ## What to do instead - Ask the person who created the cue to change it. - Or have a band **Admin** update it. - For how to add and route cues, see [Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear](/docs/programming-midi-cues). ## Frequently asked questions ### Why can't I edit my bandmate's MIDI cue? Cues are owned by the person who created them — only that owner or a band admin can edit or delete someone else's cue. ### Can a band admin edit anyone's MIDI cues? Yes. Band admins can edit or delete cues owned by other members so a stuck show cue can be fixed when the owner isn't available. ### Can everyone on the band see each other's MIDI cues? Yes — cues are visible to the band, but editing is limited to the owner (or a band admin) so people don't overwrite each other's lighting or patch changes mid-service. --- # Pliris Bot (Beta) — Ask by SMS, WhatsApp, Slack & Telegram > Message your catalog from SMS, WhatsApp, Slack, or Telegram — check keys and tempos, edit setlists, invite members, and build Ableton sets, all with your own permissions. Category: Hardware & Setup URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/pliris-chat The fastest way to check a key or a tempo, tweak a setlist, or build an Ableton set: **message it.** No app to open, no login, no AI tool to set up — just a question sent from your phone or a chat app you already use. Pliris Bot is the **same assistant** on every channel — **SMS, WhatsApp, Slack, and Telegram** — with the same questions, the same **YES**/**PIN** confirmations, and the same per-band permissions. Set it up once and use whichever channel is closest to hand. It's perfect for a band leader between sets, or anyone who'd rather not dig through screens to remember what key you're in. It only ever acts as **you**. Every answer and action runs under your own permissions, role, and subscription — it can't see or change anything you couldn't already in the web app. ![The Pliris Bot section on the Settings index, with rows for SMS, WhatsApp, Slack, Telegram, and MCP access.](/help-assets/pliris-chat-settings-index.png) ## Turn it on Pliris Bot is **in beta** and works for anyone with an active Pliris™ subscription (Guest Passes aren't included). It works end to end, but details may change while it's being refined. ### 1. Switch on the beta for your band An **account admin** turns Pliris Bot on once per band: 1. In the web app, go to **Settings → Beta features** (under **Labs**). 2. Toggle on **Pliris Bot** for the band in the switcher. 3. A new **Settings → Pliris Bot** page appears for everyone on that band with a subscription. Open it to finish setup. Not an account admin? Ask yours to switch it on for your band. Once it's on, skip to step 2. ### 2. Enable it and add your number The master switch and your mobile number live on the **SMS** page — SMS is the baseline phone channel. WhatsApp shares that same on/off switch and recognizes you by the same saved mobile number, but you message it at its **own dedicated WhatsApp number** (not the SMS number). 1. Go to **Settings → Pliris Bot → SMS**. 2. Toggle **Enable Pliris Bot** on. This turns the assistant on for **all** channels — SMS, WhatsApp, Slack, and Telegram. 3. Enter **your own mobile number** — the number you'll be messaging *from*. US numbers can skip the country code. This is how Pliris recognizes you on both SMS and WhatsApp; it's the number you send from, not a number you send to. 4. **Save.** The page then shows you the number to message. Each of the other channels has its own page under **Settings → Pliris Bot** — set up only the ones you want. ![The SMS settings page: the Enable Pliris Bot toggle, your mobile-number field, and the number to text.](/help-assets/pliris-chat-sms.png) > **Pro tip:** How does it know it's you? SMS and WhatsApp recognize you by the mobile number you saved, Slack by your Slack email, and Telegram by a one-time link. In every case the assistant runs strictly under *your* permissions and role. ### 3. Set an admin PIN (recommended) Reading your catalog never needs a PIN. But actions that could be triggered from a lost phone — **member changes** and **builds** — are protected by a short admin PIN. - Set one anytime by messaging the assistant: **`SET PIN 1234`** (any 4–6 digits). - When an action needs it, you reply with the PIN instead of **YES**. - Setlist edits use a plain **YES** confirmation, not the PIN. You can set the PIN from any channel; it applies everywhere. ## Set up each channel ### SMS Text your questions to the From Studio to Stage number shown on the SMS settings page: ``` +1 844 419 0521 ``` Message it from the mobile number you saved above and you're recognized automatically — nothing else to set up. Standard carrier message rates may apply. ### WhatsApp Message Pliris on WhatsApp at its own dedicated number — this is **not** the SMS number: ``` +1 615 527 4838 ``` WhatsApp shares SMS's on/off switch and recognizes you by the same saved mobile number, so there's nothing extra to set up: 1. Make sure Pliris Bot is enabled and your mobile number is saved (see *Turn it on* above). 2. Message **+1 615 527 4838** on WhatsApp **from the mobile number you saved**. You're recognized automatically. (You'll also find this number on **Settings → Pliris Bot → WhatsApp**.) ![The WhatsApp settings page showing the Pliris WhatsApp number to message.](/help-assets/pliris-chat-whatsapp.png) ### Slack Bring Pliris into a workspace so you and your bandmates can ask right where you already talk. 1. Go to **Settings → Pliris Bot → Slack**. 2. Click **Add to Slack** and approve the install for your workspace. 3. Back in Slack, **DM the Pliris app** or **@mention `@Pliris`** in any channel. It knows it's you by your **Slack email**, so use the same email as your Pliris account. If your Slack email is different, message the bot `link ` using a code from the Slack settings page. ![The Slack settings page with the Add to Slack button.](/help-assets/pliris-chat-slack.png) ### Telegram 1. Go to **Settings → Pliris Bot → Telegram**. 2. Click **Connect Telegram** and either follow the link into Telegram or send the one-time `link ` to the Pliris bot. (The code expires in 15 minutes.) 3. After that, just chat with the bot like any other conversation. ![The Telegram settings page with the Connect Telegram button.](/help-assets/pliris-chat-telegram.png) ## What you can say Everything below works the **same on every channel**. Just type a normal message — you don't need exact wording or commands; the assistant reads plain English. Each example shows a realistic question and the kind of reply you'll get back. (The band, songs, and setlists here are made up — you'll see your own catalog.) Anything that **reads** your catalog happens instantly. Anything that **changes** it asks you to confirm first (**YES** for setlist edits, your **PIN** for member changes and builds), so a stray message never takes effect. ### Ask about songs — keys, tempos, lengths, time signatures Ask anything about your songs, arrangements, and setlists in plain English. Answers are drawn only from the bands you can access. > **You:** What key is Ghost Signal in? > **Pliris:** Ghost Signal is in E minor, 84 BPM, 4/4. It runs about 4:12. > **You:** What songs do we have around 120 bpm? > **Pliris:** Around 120 BPM you have: Paper Cities (118), Hollow Coast (122), and Midnight Static (120). > **You:** Anything in C minor? > **Pliris:** In C minor: Crooked Halo and Slow Weather. You can also ask a song's length or time signature, "what's the fastest song in the set", "which songs are in E", and so on. ### List your bands > **You:** What bands do I have? > **Pliris:** Your bands: Neon Harbor, The Lastlight. ### List your setlists Name a band to scope it, or leave the band out to see setlists across **all** your bands. The number in parentheses is how many songs are in each. > **You:** What setlists do I have? > **Pliris:** Setlists — Neon Harbor: Friday Headline (7), Acoustic Set (9). The Lastlight: Summer Tour (5). > **You:** What setlists are in Neon Harbor? > **Pliris:** Setlists: Friday Headline (7 songs), Acoustic Set (9 songs). ### Show a setlist Pull up a setlist in order, with each song's length and a running total. > **You:** What's in the Friday Headline set? > **Pliris:** > Friday Headline: > 1. Ghost Signal — 4:12 > 2. Paper Cities (Extended) — 8:53 > 3. Hollow Coast — 5:41 > 4. Midnight Static — 6:02 > Total: 42:19 If some songs don't have a length set, the total notes how many were skipped. ### See who's in a band > **You:** Who's in Neon Harbor? > **Pliris:** Members: Mara Quinn — admin; Devon Reyes — member; Sam Okafor — member. ### Preview a change — before you make it Want to know how a change would affect your set **without actually changing anything**? Ask a "what if" question. The assistant works out the new total and confirms that nothing was changed. > **You:** If I added Crooked Halo to Friday Headline, how long would the set be? > **Pliris:** Friday Headline is 42:19 now (7 songs). Adding "Crooked Halo" (4:12) → 46:31 (8 songs). Not added — say "add it" to actually add. > **You:** What would Friday Headline be without Paper Cities? > **Pliris:** Friday Headline is 42:19 now (7 songs). Removing "Paper Cities (Extended)" (8:53) → 33:26 (6 songs). Not removed — say "remove it" to actually remove. > **You:** If I swapped Paper Cities to the shorter version, how long? > **Pliris:** Friday Headline is 42:19 now. Swapping Paper Cities: Extended (8:53) → Radio (4:30) makes it 37:56. Not changed. For a swap you can say "shorter"/"longer" or name the arrangement (e.g. "the Radio version"). If more than one fits, the assistant lists the options. ### Add or remove a song — reply YES Editing a setlist takes one confirmation, so a stray message can't reshuffle your set. > **You:** Add Crooked Halo to the Friday Headline set. > **Pliris:** Add "Crooked Halo" to Friday Headline? Reply YES to confirm. > **You:** YES > **Pliris:** Added "Crooked Halo" to Friday Headline (#8). > **You:** Remove Paper Cities from Friday Headline. > **Pliris:** Remove "Paper Cities (Extended)" from Friday Headline? Reply YES to confirm. > **You:** YES > **Pliris:** Removed "Paper Cities (Extended)" from Friday Headline. Reply **CANCEL** (or **NO**) instead of YES to drop it. A pending confirmation lasts about **10 minutes**. ### Invite or remove a member — reply with your PIN Member changes are protected by your admin PIN. The assistant confirms the exact role and access before it does anything. > **You:** Invite devon@neonharbor.com as a member of Neon Harbor with manage access. > **Pliris:** Invite devon@neonharbor.com as a member of Neon Harbor with manage access? Reply with your admin PIN to confirm. > **You:** 1234 > **Pliris:** Invited devon@neonharbor.com as a member of Neon Harbor with manage access. They'll get an email to accept. The assistant never guesses the role or access. If you don't specify, it asks: - **Account admin** — full access to every band, now and in the future, **or** - **Band member** — scoped to a specific band, with an **access level**: - **view** — browse only - **download** — view + download files - **manage** — edit songs, setlists, and members Removing someone works the same way: > **You:** Remove sam@neonharbor.com from Neon Harbor. > **Pliris:** Remove sam@neonharbor.com from Neon Harbor? Reply with your admin PIN to confirm. If you haven't set a PIN yet, the assistant tells you to send **`SET PIN 1234`** first. ### Build an Ableton set — reply with your PIN Ask, and Pliris builds a fully-formatted Ableton Live set **in the cloud** — a whole setlist or a single song — on a Playback template, then messages you back the download link on the same channel when it's ready (usually a few minutes). > **You:** Build my Friday Headline set. > **Pliris:** Build "Friday Headline" on pro? Reply with your admin PIN to confirm. > **You:** 1234 > **Pliris:** Building "Friday Headline" (playback_pro). I'll send you the download link when it's ready (usually a few minutes). …and a few minutes later, a message with the download link. Choose a template by naming it — **Playback Pro** (default), **Playback Standard**, or **Playback Intro** — e.g. *"Build the Playback Standard set for our acoustic set."* You can also build a single song: *"Build Ghost Signal."* On **SMS or WhatsApp** you can add *"and send it to the band"* to also text the download link to bandmates who have a mobile number on file. For the full build, custom-template, and analysis options, see [Cloud Builds, Custom Templates & Analysis](/docs/cloud-builds-custom-templates-and-analysis). ### Built-in commands A few short commands work as exact words on any channel: | Send | What it does | | --- | --- | | **HELP** | Lists what the assistant can do. | | **SET PIN 1234** | Sets (or changes) your admin PIN — any 4–6 digits. | | **STOP** | Turns the assistant off for you. On Slack/Telegram it unlinks you; on SMS/WhatsApp it disables texting. Re-enable anytime in Settings. | | **YES** / **CANCEL** | Confirms or cancels a pending setlist change. | ## Good to know - **It's always you.** Every answer and action runs under your own permissions, role, and subscription — the same checks as everywhere else in Pliris™. - **It remembers the last few messages.** You can answer a "Which band?" or "Which one?" follow-up with just the name, or say "add it" after a preview. Short conversation memory lasts about 20 minutes. - **Confirmations expire.** A pending **YES**/**PIN** confirmation is good for about **10 minutes**, then you'll need to ask again. - **PINs aren't stored in the conversation.** Your PIN digits are never saved to message history. Three wrong PIN attempts cancel the pending action. - **One number per person.** A mobile number can be linked to a single Pliris account. - **Standard message rates** from your carrier may apply on SMS. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I turn on Pliris Bot? Pliris Bot is a beta feature for active Pliris subscribers. First, an account admin turns it on once for your band under **Settings → Beta features** (if you're not an account admin, ask yours). Then open **Settings → Pliris Bot**, switch on **Enable Pliris Bot**, add your mobile number, and **Save**. ### Is Pliris Bot the same as Pliris Chat? Yes. Pliris Chat was the earlier name. Same assistant, same numbers, same settings page. ### What number do I text to use Pliris over SMS? Text **+1 844 419 0521** from the mobile number you saved under **Settings → Pliris Bot → SMS** (with Enable Pliris Bot toggled on) — Pliris recognizes you by the number you send from. Standard carrier message rates may apply. ### Is the Pliris WhatsApp number the same as the SMS number? No — WhatsApp has its own dedicated number, **+1 615 527 4838**. It shares the SMS page's on/off switch and recognizes you by the same saved mobile number, so once SMS is set up there's nothing extra to configure for WhatsApp. ### Can a stray text message accidentally change my setlist? No — anything that changes your catalog asks you to confirm first: setlist edits need a **YES** reply, and member changes and builds need your admin PIN. A pending confirmation expires after about 10 minutes, and reading your catalog never changes anything. ### Do I need a PIN to ask Pliris Bot questions? No — reading your catalog (keys, tempos, setlists, members) never needs a PIN. The admin PIN only protects member changes and Ableton builds; set one from any channel by messaging **SET PIN 1234** (any 4–6 digits). ### Can I build an Ableton set by text message? Yes — ask something like "Build my Friday Headline set", confirm with your admin PIN, and Pliris builds the set in the cloud on a Playback template and messages you the download link on the same channel, usually within a few minutes. On SMS or WhatsApp you can add "and send it to the band" to text the link to bandmates too. ### How do I turn Pliris Bot off? Send **STOP** on any channel — on Slack and Telegram it unlinks you, and on SMS and WhatsApp it disables texting. You can re-enable it anytime under **Settings → Pliris Bot**. ## Where to go next - Prefer an AI assistant or the API? See [Connecting AI Assistants & the Pliris API (MCP)](/docs/connecting-ai-assistants-and-the-api). - Live in a terminal? Set up [The Pliris CLI](/docs/the-pliris-cli). - New to setlists? See [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). Stuck at any point, click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. You'll hear back within 24 hours. --- # Stems Won't Play or Are Silent > A practical checklist for when audio won't start, a stem is silent, or your stems never uploaded — upload, analysis, browser, and output. Category: Troubleshooting URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/stems-wont-play ## Start here When audio won't play, the cause is almost always one of a few practical things: your stems never finished uploading, analysis hasn't finished, or your browser is sending audio somewhere you can't hear. Work down this list in order — it's roughly most-common first. ## 1. Confirm your stems actually uploaded Stem uploads work on every plan, including Free — there's no subscription wall on playback. But if an upload was interrupted, you may have only a reference track and no stems to play. - Open the arrangement and check whether individual stems actually exist, or whether you only have a reference track. - If a large multitrack upload was interrupted, re-drop the stems and let it finish. - Free accounts are capped at 15 songs across the account and 10 GB of storage. If you're near those limits, an upload can be refused — see [Plans, Credits, and Billing](/docs/plans-credits-and-billing) for what's included on each tier. ## 2. Make sure analysis finished When you upload, Pliris™ processes each stem and generates its waveform. Until that's done, playback can be silent or incomplete. - Look for processing or analysis still running on the arrangement. - Give a large multitrack upload a little time to finish. - If a stem shows no waveform, it likely didn't finish processing — try re-uploading that one. ## 3. Check your browser audio and output This is the most common silent-playback cause, and it has nothing to do with Pliris. - Confirm the tab isn't **muted** (browsers put a small mute icon on the tab) and system volume is up. - Check your **system output device** — a Bluetooth headset, an interface, or an HDMI display can quietly grab your audio. Send it back to the output you're actually listening on. - If you're on a multi-output audio interface, make sure playback is routed to a channel you can hear. - Try **pressing Space** or the play button again — playback may simply be paused. > **Pro tip:** Reload the tab after changing your output device. Browsers sometimes hold onto the old device until the page refreshes. ## 4. Rule out a single silent stem If most of the song plays but one part is missing, it's probably that stem, not playback. - Check whether the stem is **muted**, or whether another stem is **soloed** (solo drops everything else). - Clear any solo and un-mute, then play again. - If it's still silent with a flat or missing waveform, re-upload that stem. ## 5. WebMIDI and permissions (only if you use cues) If your audio plays fine but your **MIDI cues** aren't firing, that's a separate issue from silent stems. Use a WebMIDI-capable browser (Chrome or Edge), plug your device in before loading the page, and allow the browser's MIDI permission prompt. Full detail lives in [Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear](/docs/programming-midi-cues). ## 6. Re-upload as a last resort If a specific stem is corrupt or never finished, the cleanest fix is to delete and re-upload it. Use raw individual stems and let Pliris handle grouping — see [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). ## Frequently asked questions ### Why won't my stems play in Pliris? The cause is almost always one of a few practical things: the stems never finished uploading, Pliris hasn't finished processing them and generating waveforms, or your browser is sending audio to an output you can't hear (a Bluetooth headset, interface, or HDMI display). Work through the checklist above in order — it's roughly most-common first. ### Why is one stem silent while the rest of the song plays? That's usually the stem itself, not playback: check whether the stem is muted or another stem is soloed, since solo drops everything else. If it's still silent with a flat or missing waveform, that stem likely never finished processing — delete and re-upload it. ### Do I need a paid plan to upload and play stems? No — stem uploads and playback work on every Pliris plan, including Free. Free accounts are capped at 15 songs and 10 GB of storage though, and an upload can be refused near those limits — see [Plans, Credits, and Billing](/docs/plans-credits-and-billing). ### Why is there no sound even though playback is running? The most common cause has nothing to do with Pliris: the browser tab is muted, system volume is down, or your audio is routed to a device you're not listening on. Fix your output device, then reload the tab — browsers sometimes hold onto the old device until the page refreshes. ### My audio plays fine but my MIDI cues aren't firing — what's wrong? That's a separate issue from silent stems: use a WebMIDI-capable browser (Chrome or Edge), plug your device in before loading the page, and allow the browser's MIDI permission prompt. Full detail is in [Programming MIDI Cues for External Gear](/docs/programming-midi-cues). ## Still stuck? If you've checked your plan, confirmed analysis finished, and ruled out browser output and muted stems, we want to see it. Click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. Tell us the band, song, and arrangement, and what you hear (or don't) — that gets us to the cause fastest. --- # My song didn't analyze right > Key, tempo, and sections from Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections are a best guess — fix them on the page. Lyrics and chords come from Lyrics and Chords. You usually do not need to re-run either option. Category: Troubleshooting URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/my-song-didnt-analyze-right You do **not** need to re-run Analyze for a wrong guess. Pliris™ has two Analyze checkboxes, and they guess different things: 1. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** — key, tempo, time signature, and song sections. It does **not** show lyrics. A wrong section, tempo, or meter from this option is an edit on the page, not a lyrics problem. 2. **Lyrics and Chords** — lyrics and chords, shown together after it runs. Wrong words with good timing are a text edit. Missing timing is this option (plus vocal audio), not the first checkbox. When a result is wrong, **correct it on the arrangement page**, then **refresh and re-export**. Re-running the same option throws away edits you already made and usually returns the same guess. Everything below is an edit you make on the page, except the lyrics-timing case, which needs **Lyrics and Chords**. Find the one that matches what's wrong. Which option times lyrics: [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). You'll need **Manage arrangements** access on the band to make these edits. If you only see playback or Download, ask a band admin to raise your permissions — see [Band Access Levels](/docs/managing-members-and-access) and [Editing Songs in Pliris](/docs/editing-songs-in-pliris). ## Edit song section names The most common miss: the shape is right, but the labels aren't — a Chorus is called Verse 2, or a Bridge came through as Section 4. 1. Open the song's [arrangement page](/docs/using-the-song-arrangement-page). 2. **Right-click** the section on the timeline. 3. Choose **Rename** (or double-click the section label), type the correct name, and press Enter. Full walkthrough: [How to Rename Song Sections](/docs/renaming-song-sections) and [Adding and Changing Song Sections](/docs/adding-and-changing-song-sections). ## Edit the key The most common key miss is the relative minor or major, such as A minor for a song in C major. Those keys share the same notes. 1. **Right-click** the **Key** in the arrangement header. 2. Type the right key (for example **C** or **C major**) and click **Save**. The key is stored per arrangement, so fix each arrangement that needs it. Full walkthrough: [Changing a Song's Key](/docs/changing-a-songs-key). ## Change song section lengths If a boundary landed in the wrong place — the Chorus starts two bars late, the Intro runs long — that's a **length** change, and it's a drag, not a right-click. 1. Switch the arrangement to **Pro** mode. 2. Grab the **section boundary** on the timeline. 3. **Drag** it to the correct bar and release. 4. Repeat for any other boundary that's off, then refresh. Right-click renames a section; it does not resize one — length is a drag. Full walkthrough: [How to Change the Length of a Song Section](/docs/resizing-song-sections). Pro boundary drag is the primary path there, with an **optional fallback** for anyone who'd rather work in the Live Set: move the section's locator in Ableton and drop the updated `.als` back on the arrangement. For the Pro lanes themselves, see [Editing the Tempo and Meter Grid](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid) — the Pro walkthrough for tempo, meter, and section boundaries. ## Change variable tempo to straight tempo If **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** thought your song speeds up and slows down when it actually doesn't, you'll see a **Variable tempo** box on the arrangement. 1. Open the **Variable tempo** box. 2. Choose **Default** for a straight, steady tempo. 3. Save, then refresh the page. **Default** is what you want for the vast majority of songs. **Raw** keeps the detected tempo map exactly as analyzed — including drift and false detections — so leave it on Raw only when the song genuinely has a moving tempo you want preserved. More: [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song) and [Editing the Tempo and Meter Grid](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid). ## Edit time signature If the grid is in 4/4 and the song is in 3/4 or 6/8, fix the meter — don't re-analyze. 1. **Right-click** the **Time** chip in the arrangement header. 2. Enter the correct time signature and confirm. 3. If the meter **changes** partway through the song, switch to **Pro** mode (press **Tab**), right-click the block in the **Meter** lane, and pick the right meter. A common case: a single **6/4** bar that is really a bar of 4/4 and a bar of 2/4. A small **!** next to **Time** in the header marks a song with a meter change. More: [Fixing a Wrong Time Signature](/docs/fixing-a-wrong-time-signature), [Editing the Tempo and Meter Grid](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid) and [Editing Songs in Pliris](/docs/editing-songs-in-pliris). ## Edit tempo A half-time or double-time detection (60 instead of 120) is a metadata fix, not a re-analysis. 1. **Right-click** the **Tempo** chip in the arrangement header. 2. Type the correct BPM and click **Save**, or click **÷2** / **×2** for a half-time or double-time result. 3. For tempo that moves through the song, use the **tempo lane** in **Pro** mode. Changing the tempo is **metadata only**. Your stems are **not** time-stretched — they keep playing at their recorded speed. What changes is the click, count-in, beat grid, section math, and Ableton export. Full detail: [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song). > **Pro tip:** Left-click on a chip often **copies** the value rather than editing it. Right-click is the edit. ## Remove tempo changes / time signature change points **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** sometimes invents change points that aren't in the music — a stray tempo bump in a quiet section, or a meter change on a fill. 1. Switch the arrangement to **Pro** mode. 2. Open the **tempo lane** or **meter lane**. 3. Delete the change points that shouldn't be there. 4. **Refresh the page before you press Play.** That refresh matters right now: until issue #1929 ships, the player can keep using the old grid in the current session, so a deleted change point can still sound like it's there until you reload. Refresh, then play. More: [Editing the Tempo and Meter Grid](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid). ## Edit lyrics Transcribed words are a guess too, and they're editable in place. 1. Open the **Lyrics** tab at the bottom of the arrangement page. 2. Click into the line you want to change (or paste corrected text where you edit lyrics). 3. Correct the text and save. Editing or pasting lyrics fixes the **words** only — it does **not** add timing. Timing comes from **Lyrics and Chords**, not from **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections**. An empty Lyrics tab after only **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is expected. If stems have no lead vocal and **Lyrics and Chords** returns large gaps, upload a time-aligned **reference** with lead vocals, then check **Lyrics and Chords** again. **Lyrics and Chords** does not replace key, tempo, time signature, or sections. Full write-up: [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). See [Editing Songs in Pliris](/docs/editing-songs-in-pliris) for the rest of the on-page editing surface. ## Re-group stems If Analyze put your stems in the wrong groups — keys landed under Guitars, or your drum mics got split apart — regroup them instead of re-uploading. For **one** stem: 1. **Right-click** the stem in the stem list. 2. Choose **Move to group** and pick the correct group. For **several** stems at once (for example a drum kit that got split), open the song's **Assets** panel (the **Upload** button), tick the rows, and use **Move to group…** — or set each row's **Group** dropdown. Right-click in the stem list is one-stem-at-a-time. Full walkthrough: [Moving and Renaming Stems on the Song Page](/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page) and [Changing a Stem's Group on a Song](/docs/changing-a-stems-group-on-a-song). ## Re-name stems Same menu, different item — for when `Audio 07` should say `Lead Vox`. 1. **Right-click** the stem in the stem list. 2. Choose **Rename stem**. 3. Type the correct name and click **Save**. The underlying file is not changed. Full walkthrough: [Moving and Renaming Stems on the Song Page](/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page). ## When to actually re-analyze Re-analyze only when the **audio itself** is wrong — not when the analysis result is wrong. That means: 1. The wrong file got uploaded (the wrong song, the wrong mix, the wrong take). 2. A stem is truncated — it cuts off early or starts late compared to the rest of the song. 3. A stem is corrupt and never produced a usable waveform. In those cases, replace the audio and run the option you still need: **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** for key, tempo, time signature, and sections; **Lyrics and Chords** for lyrics and chords. Each is its own credit charge. See [Replacing Stems and Re-analyzing](/docs/replacing-stems-and-re-analyzing) and [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). If the audio is right and only the sections, tempo, meter, words, or stem grouping are wrong, edit them on the page. Re-running an option discards corrections you've already made on that result. Do not re-run **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** to fill an empty Lyrics tab. ## After you fix it: refresh, then re-export 1. **Refresh the arrangement page** so the player picks up the new grid. 2. Play through the changed part and confirm it lines up. 3. **Re-export** to Ableton so your session gets the corrected sections, tempo, and meter — see [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton). An export made before your edits still carries the old guess. Re-export is what pushes the fix downstream. ## Frequently asked questions ### Should I just re-analyze the song to fix this? No — not for wrong sections, tempo, meter, words, or stem grouping. Each option is a best guess and will usually return the same guess, and re-running it discards corrections you've already made. Edit on the arrangement page, refresh, and re-export. ### Does Analyze give me lyrics? Only if you check **Lyrics and Chords**. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not show lyrics. An empty Lyrics tab after that option alone is expected. ### Where do chords come from? They show after **Lyrics and Chords**, or you type them on the Chords tab. ### AbleSet is missing timed lyrics after I analyzed. Why? **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not time lyrics. Paste does not add timing. Check **Lyrics and Chords** with vocal-capable audio (a lead in the stems, or a time-aligned reference), then re-export. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ### Do I spend credits twice if I run both options? Yes. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is 5 credits per minute of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** is 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. Both together is two runs. A 4-minute song with both is about 80 credits. Free and All-Access offer the same two options; plans differ on credits and caps. ### Analyze got my tempo half of what it should be. Do I need to re-upload? No. Right-click the **Tempo** chip and type the correct BPM, or click **×2**. This is metadata only — your stems are not time-stretched, so nothing about how the audio sounds changes. ### Why can't I right-click to make a section longer? Right-click renames a section; it doesn't resize one. Length changes are a **drag**: switch to **Pro** mode and drag the section boundary to the right bar. Full detail: [How to Change the Length of a Song Section](/docs/resizing-song-sections), which also covers the optional Ableton-locator fallback. The Pro lanes in depth: [Editing the Tempo and Meter Grid](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid). ### The song doesn't actually change tempo, but Pliris says it does. What do I pick? Open the **Variable tempo** box and choose **Default** — that gives you a straight, steady tempo. **Raw** keeps the analyzed tempo map as-is, including drift and false detections, which is what's making it wander. ### I deleted a tempo change but it still sounds wrong on playback. Refresh the page before you press Play. Until issue #1929 ships, the player can hold onto the old grid for the rest of the session, so the deleted change point can still be audible until you reload. ## Where to go next - [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset) — paste fixes words only; timing needs **Lyrics and Chords** and vocal-capable audio. - [Editing Songs in Pliris](/docs/editing-songs-in-pliris) — everything you can change on the arrangement page. - [Editing the Tempo and Meter Grid](/docs/editing-the-tempo-and-meter-grid) — the Pro walkthrough for tempo, meter, and section boundaries. - [Adding and Changing Song Sections](/docs/adding-and-changing-song-sections) — add, remove, and re-label sections. - [How to Change the Length of a Song Section](/docs/resizing-song-sections) — Pro boundary drag, plus the optional Ableton locator fallback. - [Setting the Tempo of a Song](/docs/setting-the-tempo-of-a-song) — what tempo does and doesn't affect. - [Moving and Renaming Stems on the Song Page](/docs/moving-and-renaming-stems-on-the-song-page) — stem names and groups. - [Changing a Song's Key](/docs/changing-a-songs-key) — fix a relative minor/major mix-up. - [Fixing a Wrong Time Signature](/docs/fixing-a-wrong-time-signature) — fix a 6/4 bar that isn't really there. - [Replacing Stems and Re-analyzing](/docs/replacing-stems-and-re-analyzing) — the one case where re-analyzing is right. ## Still stuck? If you've corrected the arrangement, refreshed, and it still doesn't match the music, we want to see it. Click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. Tell us the band, song, and arrangement, and what Analyze got wrong — that gets us to the cause fastest. --- # Supported Browsers for Pliris > Use Chrome or Edge for Pliris — especially for large Ableton set exports. Safari works for day-to-day use but cannot complete large set exports with samples. Category: Troubleshooting URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/supported-browsers-for-pliris Pliris™ runs in your browser. For day-to-day work — browsing songs, editing arrangements, building setlists — most modern browsers are fine. For **large Ableton set exports** (especially **Export Ableton → With samples**), use **Google Chrome** or **Microsoft Edge**. That is the supported path. ## Recommended: Chrome or Edge Use the latest **Google Chrome** or **Microsoft Edge** on desktop when you: - Export a full setlist **With samples** (folder picker + large zip writes) - Work with multi-GB show exports - Use WebMIDI cues (Chrome and Edge support WebMIDI) Chrome and Edge can complete the folder picker and write large project bundles that Safari cannot. ## Safari Safari is fine for signing in, listening, editing, and lighter exports. It is **not** reliable for **large Ableton set exports with samples**. Safari hits a **memory / folder-write limit** on big set builds. Exports can fail or stop with a size / memory error. That is a browser limit, not a bad setlist. **What to do instead:** open the same band in **Chrome** or **Edge**, then run **Export Ableton → With samples** there. Do not treat a thinner export preset or a server build as the Safari answer — for large full-sample set exports, switch browsers. ## Quick check | Task | Chrome / Edge | Safari | | --- | --- | --- | | Sign in, play, edit arrangements | Yes | Yes | | Build setlists | Yes | Yes | | Export Ableton — Project file only | Yes | Usually OK | | Export Ableton — With samples (large sets) | **Yes — use this** | **No — switch to Chrome or Edge** | | WebMIDI cues | Yes | Limited / not recommended | ## Frequently asked questions ### Which browser should I use for Pliris? Use **Chrome** or **Edge** as your everyday Pliris browser if you export Ableton sets with samples. Safari can work for listening and editing, but it cannot complete large set exports with samples because of memory and folder-write limits. ### Why does my Ableton export fail in Safari? Large **With samples** exports need the browser to pick a folder and write a big zip. Safari often cannot finish that for large shows. Open Pliris in Chrome or Edge and export there instead. ### Can I keep using Safari and just export a smaller Ableton file? For a full show with stems, the supported fix is **Chrome or Edge**, not a thinner Safari workaround. Use Chrome or Edge for **Export Ableton → With samples** when the set is large. ### Does Edge count the same as Chrome for exports? Yes. Microsoft Edge on desktop uses the same kind of folder-write path Chrome does for large **With samples** exports. Either is recommended. ## Where to go next - Exporting a setlist: [Exporting Your Show Back to Ableton](/docs/exporting-your-show-back-to-ableton) - Short note on large exports: [Large Ableton Exports and Browsers](/docs/large-ableton-exports-and-browsers) Stuck on an export, click the support bubble in the bottom-right of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. Tell us the browser and roughly how large the set is. --- # Plans, Credits, and Billing > What the free tier includes, what a Pliris subscription unlocks, how credits work, and where to manage your plan. Category: Account & Billing URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/plans-credits-and-billing Pliris™ has two plans: a **free tier** that's genuinely useful, and a **Pliris subscription** that removes the caps and unlocks the pro tools. There's no trial to run out — the free tier is yours to keep for as long as you want it. ## What the free tier includes Sign up and you're on the free tier right away — no credit card. It's built to let you learn the workflow and run a small library end to end: - **1 band**, up to **10 members** - **15 songs** total - **240 credits per month** - **The same two Analyze options** as All-Access: **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** (key, tempo, time signature, and song sections) and **Lyrics and Chords** (lyrics and chords, shown together) - **Manual mode, always available** — type your own BPM, add sections from Ableton, and upload your own stems - **10 GB** of storage - Export songs and full sets on the **FS2S Intro template** Everything you need to build and run a real show. Uploading your own stems and the standalone LTC generator both work on the free tier — there's no subscription wall on core playback. ## What Pliris All-Access unlocks A **Pliris subscription (All-Access)** lifts every free-tier cap and turns on the full toolkit: - **Unlimited bands, members, and songs** - **1,000 credits per month** - **More credits per month** for whichever Analyze options you check, and everything else your crew processes - **1 TB** of storage - **All Set Builder templates** — Intro, Standard, Pro, and Custom - **Upload your own custom Ableton template** - **Full access to Playback Academy** — masterclasses, guides, Coach, Ask, and member discounts ## Credits Credits are one balance for everything your Pliris crew processes. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** costs **5 credits per minute of audio**, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** costs **15 credits per minute**, rounded up, minimum 15. **Both together is two runs.** Shorter songs take fewer credits and longer songs take more. Catalog re-encoding draws from the same balance, and the new features on the way will too — that's why credits are counted this way. **Free and All-Access get the same two options:** 1. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** — key, tempo, time signature, and song sections. It does not show lyrics. 2. **Lyrics and Chords** — lyrics and chords, shown together after this runs. The difference between plans is how many credits you get each month, and the caps — not which option exists: - **Free:** 240 credits per month. - **All-Access:** 1,000 credits per month. **Manual mode is always available on any plan** — type a BPM, add sections imported from Ableton, and upload your own stems, no credits required. A few more things worth knowing: - You'll see the cost of a job **before** it's charged, and your balance in the account menu. - **Failed jobs refund automatically** — you only pay for processing that completes. - **Re-importing a `.als`** to sync section edits back from Ableton is an *import*, not an analysis, so it costs **nothing**. Ignore any out-of-credits warning on that step. - Your balance refills to the full monthly amount at the start of each period. > **Pro tip:** Check only the option you need. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** and **Lyrics and Chords** are separate charges. Rename and regroup stems on the song page — that edit is free. > **Used Pliris before?** Credits used to be flat — one per song. They're now priced per minute of processing, and monthly amounts scaled up to match (35 → 1,000; free 3 → 240) — see [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). Balances converted automatically; your current period restarted with the full monthly amount. ## Managing your subscription Everything billing lives one click away: 1. Click your **avatar** in the top-right corner. 2. Select **Subscription** from the dropdown. 3. Review your current plan, renewal date, payment method, and invoices. 4. Click **Manage billing** to update payment, change plan, or cancel — all handled in the Stripe billing portal. ## Which plan is right for you? - **Just getting started, or running a small library?** The free tier's 1 band, 15 songs, and Intro template may be all you need — and it's free to keep. - **Running real shows** — a bigger catalog, more analysis credits each month, the Standard/Pro/Custom Set Builder templates, and Playback Academy? That's a subscription. It removes every cap and unlocks the full toolkit in one move. ## Frequently asked questions ### Is Pliris free to use? Yes — Pliris has a free tier you can sign up for without a credit card, and there's no trial to run out. It includes 1 band with up to 10 members, 15 songs, 240 credits per month, 10 GB of storage, and exports on the FS2S Intro template. ### How many credits do I get each month? Free accounts get 240 credits per month, and All-Access accounts get 1,000 per month. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** costs 5 credits per minute of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5, and **Lyrics and Chords** costs 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. Both together is two charges. Manual mode (typing a BPM, adding sections from Ableton, uploading your own stems) never costs credits. ### Why did my credit numbers change? Credits now measure minutes of processing instead of whole songs, and monthly amounts scaled up to match — 35 became 1,000 (free: 3 became 240). New features are coming that will also use credits, and per-minute counting is what makes analysis and those features sustainable to offer. Balances converted automatically, with every account's current period restarted at the full monthly amount. See [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). ### Does re-importing an Ableton .als file cost credits? No — re-importing a `.als` to sync section edits back from Ableton is an import, not an analysis, so it costs nothing. You can ignore any out-of-credits warning on that step. ### Does Analyze give me lyrics? Only if you check **Lyrics and Chords**. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not show lyrics. An empty Lyrics tab after that option alone is expected. See [Lyrics Text vs Timing (and AbleSet)](/docs/lyrics-text-vs-timing-and-ableset). ### Where do chords come from? They show after **Lyrics and Chords**, or you type them on the Chords tab. ### Do I get charged twice if I check both Analyze options? Yes. **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is 5 credits per minute of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5. **Lyrics and Chords** is 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15. Both together is two runs, on Free and on All-Access. A 4-minute song with both is about 80 credits. ### Does Free get fewer Analyze options than All-Access? No. Both plans offer **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** and **Lyrics and Chords**. All-Access buys more credits per month (1,000 versus 240), plus unlimited bands, the full template set, and Playback Academy. AbleSet still needs **Lyrics and Chords** plus vocal-capable audio for timed lyrics — that is the same on both plans. ### How do I cancel or change my Pliris subscription? Click your avatar in the top-right corner, select **Subscription** from the dropdown, then click **Manage billing** — updating payment, changing plan, and canceling are all handled in the Stripe billing portal. ## Where to go next - New here? Start with [What Is Pliris?](/docs/what-is-pliris). - Ready to load a song? See [Uploading and Analyzing Your Stems](/docs/uploading-and-analyzing-your-stems). - Building a show? See [Building and Sharing a Setlist](/docs/building-and-sharing-a-setlist). - Curious how credits work in detail? See [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). Questions about your plan or an invoice? Click the support bubble in the bottom-right corner of any page, or email support@fromstudiotostage.com. --- # Credits: What They Cost, and Buying More > How many credits each plan gets per month, what analysis costs per minute, what is free, and how to buy one-time credit packs when a big week needs more than your grant. Category: Account & Billing URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/credits-cost-and-buying-more Processing in Pliris™ runs on **credits**. Every plan comes with a monthly grant, and All-Access accounts can buy one-time packs on top when a big import week needs more than the grant covers. ## What you get each month | Plan | Credits per month | | --- | --- | | Free | 240 | | Pliris All-Access | 1,000 | Your grant refreshes on a **30-day credit period**, which is its own clock. It is not tied to when Stripe bills you, so on the annual plan your credits still refresh roughly monthly, not once a year. **The credit meter in the account menu** (click your avatar) is where to look. It shows what is left and the date it next resets. The renewal date on **Settings → Plan & billing** is a different thing: that is when your *subscription* renews, which on an annual plan is nowhere near your next credit refresh. ## What things cost Analysis is priced **per minute of audio**, not per job, so a seven-minute song costs more to analyze than a three-minute one. | What you are doing | Cost | | --- | --- | | **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** | 5 credits per minute, rounded up to the minute (minimum 5). About 20 credits for a 4-minute song | | **Lyrics and Chords** | 15 credits per minute, rounded up (minimum 15). About 60 credits for a 4-minute song | | Both options selected | Charged separately. About 80 credits for a 4-minute song | **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** does not show lyrics. **Lyrics and Chords** is its own run. A 4-minute song is about **20 credits** for **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** and about **60 credits** for **Lyrics and Chords**. Running both is about **80 credits**, so a 1,000-credit month is roughly a dozen songs with both options. What each option returns: [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained). **These are free today:** - Building a set, and building a setlist. - Generating cue voices. - Re-importing an edited `.als` from Ableton. That is an import, not an analysis. - Editing anything by hand: lyrics, chords, section labels, tempo, routing. - Playing back, rehearsing, downloading, or sharing what you already have. Re-import, hand edits and playback are free by design, because none of them processes audio. Set building and cue voices are currently unmetered. Read that as today's behavior rather than a permanent promise. Prices are read live at the time of the job, and you see the cost before it is charged. Failed jobs refund automatically. ## Buying extra credits **Settings → Plan & billing → Buy credits** Three one-time packs: | Pack | Price | Roughly | | --- | --- | --- | | 400 credits | $15 | About 5 typical song imports | | 800 credits | $29 | About 10 typical song imports | | 1,200 credits | $45 | About 15 typical song imports | Those song counts assume a typical 4-minute song with both Analyze options (about 80 credits). Longer songs use more credits than shorter ones, so treat those song counts as guides rather than guarantees. ### How packs behave - **They never expire.** A pack you buy in March is still there in November. - **Your monthly grant is spent first.** Packs are only drawn on once the grant for the period runs out, so you never burn a pack you did not need. - **They stack.** Buy more than one and the credits add together into one balance. - **Checkout is Stripe**, the same as your subscription. ### Who can buy Packs are for **All-Access** accounts and for anyone on an active guest pass. - **On the Free plan?** Packs are not available. Upgrading is the better deal, since it raises your monthly grant rather than topping it up once. - **A member of someone else's account?** The account **owner** buys credits, and they land in that account's balance for everyone in it. You will be pointed at the owner rather than shown a checkout. ### Refunds Unused purchased credits are not refunded automatically. If you bought a pack by mistake, contact support from the bubble on any page and we will sort it out case by case. ## Running low Pliris warns you before it becomes a problem: - The credit meter shows everything you can spend against your monthly grant and, if you hold pack credits, names them separately as credits that do not expire. - **For analysis**, if a song costs more than you have left you are told **before** the job starts, not partway through. The upload and analyze surfaces check affordability against the song's real duration first. - "Not enough for this song" and "you are out of credits" are different messages, because they need different answers. One is a top-up, the other might be an upgrade. - If you hit a limit mid-import, the dialog offers **Get more credits** and takes you straight to the packs. If you are buying a pack most months, tell us. That is a signal your workload wants a bigger monthly grant than the plan gives you, and it is worth a conversation rather than a standing top-up. ## Frequently asked questions ### How do I buy more credits in Pliris? Open **Settings → Plan & billing** and click **Buy credits**. Pick a pack of 400, 800, or 1,200 credits and check out through Stripe. The credits land in your account balance right away. ### Do purchased credits expire? No. Pack credits never expire, and your monthly grant is always spent before them, so a pack you buy in a heavy month waits untouched through a quiet one. ### Can I buy credits on the free plan? No. Credit packs are for All-Access accounts and active guest passes. On the free plan, upgrading raises your monthly grant from 240 to 1,000 credits. ### How many credits does a song cost? **Key, Tempo, Time Signature and Sections** is 5 credits per minute of audio, rounded up to the minute, minimum 5 (about 20 credits for a 4-minute song). **Lyrics and Chords** is 15 credits per minute, rounded up, minimum 15 (about 60 credits for a 4-minute song). They are charged separately, so both on a 4-minute song is about 80 credits. ### Why did my credits reset on a different date from my billing date? Credits run on their own 30-day period, separate from Stripe billing. The account menu's credit meter shows the next credit reset. Plan & billing shows when the subscription renews. ### Does re-importing my Ableton set cost credits? No. Re-importing an edited `.als` is an import, not an analysis, so it is free. Ignore any out-of-credits warning on that step. ## Where to go next - [Plans, Credits, and Billing](/docs/plans-credits-and-billing) for what each plan includes. - [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained) for what Analyze does with those credits. --- # Trial and Paid Limits > What free/trial accounts can do vs paid — songs, arrangements, setlists, templates, and credits. Category: Account & Billing URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/trial-and-paid-limits Limits change as plans evolve; this page is the practical support answer customers need day to day. ## Free / trial (typical) - A small number of songs (commonly **3**) - **1** arrangement per song - **1** setlist - **Intro** Ableton template only on export - Analysis credits as shown in-app (see [Credits Explained](/docs/analysis-credits-explained)) Exact numbers can vary with promos and guest passes — the product UI is authoritative if it disagrees with this page. ## Paid plans - Higher arrangement caps per billing cycle (commonly **35 new arrangements** per cycle; resets on Stripe renewal) - Standard / Pro templates (not just Intro) - Custom template uploads only with the custom-templates entitlement - Full setlist and collaboration features on Teams-style accounts ## Templates | Access | Templates | |---|---| | Trial / free | Intro only | | Paid | Intro + Standard / Pro (as offered) | | Custom `.als` upload | Requires custom-templates flag | Free Playback Intro template (marketing): [fromstudiotostage.com/template](https://fromstudiotostage.com/template) ## Related - [Plans, Credits, and Billing](/docs/plans-credits-and-billing) - [How to Choose an Ableton Template](/docs/switching-your-ableton-export-template) --- # I Paid but Still See Trial Limits or “Get All-Access” > Why pricing CTAs still show after you subscribe, how access refreshes, and how to confirm your plan. Category: Account & Billing URL: https://fromstudiotostage.com/docs/paid-but-still-trial-or-pricing-cta Two different things get mixed up here: **marketing CTAs on the website**, and **your real account access**. ## “Get All-Access” buttons after I already subscribed The pricing sections on pages like [fromstudiotostage.com/pliris](https://fromstudiotostage.com/pliris) are ads for visitors. They can still appear when you’re signed in. If you already have All-Access: 1. Skip the pricing buttons. 2. Open Pliris directly: [bands.fromstudiotostage.com](https://bands.fromstudiotostage.com). 3. Confirm your plan from the avatar menu or [Settings](https://fromstudiotostage.com/settings). If you click checkout while already subscribed, the system **blocks a double charge**. That block means the subscription is active — it is not proof that access failed. ## I just paid and still see trial limits Access is keyed off your **email** (lowercased). The resolver caches briefly. 1. Hard-refresh once (or sign out and back in). 2. Confirm you signed in with the **same email you paid with**. 3. If it still looks free after ~5 minutes, contact support — often a Stripe/email mismatch. ## Related - [Plans, Credits, and Billing](/docs/plans-credits-and-billing) - [Signing In to Pliris](/docs/signing-in-to-pliris) - [Trial and Paid Limits](/docs/trial-and-paid-limits)